Home

Yaskawa E7B Drive O&M - Coward Environmental Systems

1. 25 63 1 32 23 00 651 00 50 4 1 5 33 5 584 2 912 7 Mie ij 5 152 4 0 754 n t 19 J Y YASKAWA 3350 ee 1028 2 b 1092 2 ne LI H I a 5660 UY 55 35 1437 6 BS Z 0 75 09 Ere s 5 U e 9 14 87 1 9434 877 7 e e e 18 00 7 44 RECOMMENDED 941 4 375 457 2 189 CONDUIT 231 1 111 1 ENTRANCE AREA TOP BOTTOM MIN 1 50 AND SIDE 3 81 2 37 60 2 LI i oo NAR 1 B 9 14 66 ee 372 4 i 4 Fel Fel 1 4 3 50 Ea 1 88 9 Nd V
2. 0 50 4PLS 012 7 2 d T T 0 75 I 19 YASKAWA 230 29 48 812 8 iba _____ d LAT L O i Er 16 50 528 7 pi L 4529 RECOMMENDED CONDUIT ENTRANCE AREA TOP BOTTOM AND SIDE MIN 1 50 i 3 81 2 37 4404 7 1 d aera 13 66 l _ 847 re eee 4 0 T io Wy Wy 250 i RETE SSE Dni L TOP VIEW DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MM FOR REFERENCE ONLY Fig 1 10 Enclosure 1 for up to 30HP 480 VAC Physical Installation 1 17 NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 FVFF Enclosures Bypass Unit 30 HP and Below 480 VAC 15 HP and Below 208V 240V With Add On Box
3. Bge Mes S ni Ground terminal Ground terminal Models CIMR _ _ 2022 30 HP 208V 4030 40 HP 480V and larger Fig 2 9 Drive Terminal Configuration Electrical Installation 2 13 Table 2 5 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all Bypass Units Tightening Possible Recommended Terminal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Terminals Screws ban AWG AWG Wire Type Nem mm mm DRIVE TERMINALS FM AC AM SC SN SP Al A2 V S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 MA Stranded MB MC MI M2 M3 Phoenix 4 2 to 5 3 wire M4 MP R R S type 3 0 5 to 0 6 26 to 16 S IG 0 14 to 1 5 Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable TB1 ON PCB A2 TERMINALS TB1 1 through TB1 26 7 0 to 8 8 20to 14 12 Eo MS 0 8 to 1 0 0 5 to 22 1 25 Use shielded twisted pair cables to input an external speed command 2 We recommend using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability 3 We recommend using a thin slot screwdriver with a 3 5 mm blade width Wiring Checks After all wiring is completed perform the following checks 1 Is all wiring correct 2 Have all wire clippings screws or other foreign material been removed from the Drive
4. e 15 JOO Main circuit terminals B21UTIIVT2 ABCDE CHARGE Teen Charge indicator Ground terminal Zoe Ground terminal Models CIMR _ _ 2018 25 HP 208V 4018 30 HP 480V and smaller 5 8 58 a1 2 AC ac EG 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 S S 3 M2 EG CL S ST Op 2 Control circuit terminals o 2222 2200002 22000 9 Ow Charge indicator Main circuit terminals CAUTION GE EE Sh uibs EUN SVL21 TVL3 91 3 Cur saz TES _ UTDLVTZ n a
5. 19 06 484 1 129 16 50 32 8 419 1 0 50 4PLS NEN NE V 912 7 MIN 6 ICS one 0 75 Ex T i9 5 V YASKAWA MEYE 32 00 29 48 812 8 748 8 44 60 1132 8 43 35 Ps ad 1 101 2 0 75 49 j 5 o d A r 12 60 e e 1 817 5 e q L 9 1 3 375 13 50 5 37 342 9 1364 RECOMMENDED 85 2 CONDUIT ENTRANCE AREA TOP BOTTOM AND SIDE IN 1 50 es OV 2 37 n n n 60 2 q _____ ca 13 66 347 4 lel It Jj eop i d 2 50 1 7 63 5 T T TOP VIEW DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MM FOR REFERENCE ONLY Fig 1 11 Enclosure 1 with Options Extension for up to 3OHP 480 VAC NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 FVFF Enclosures Physical Installation 1 18 Bypass Unit 40 HP to 100 HP 480 VAC 20 HP to 40 HP 208V 240V 0050 om 4 MIN
6. 18 DS Pi FUNCUON s icr I excep duende nan 22 b8 Energy Savings a oec e itudin ns bonia ecce 37 CI AcGBl DBOBL dresden 38 d1 Preset References 39 d2 Reference Speed Command Limits 41 d3 Jump Frequencies 42 G4 conceals 43 ET V T Pattern 44 E2 Motor i eo d p Fav es 50 F6 Com OPT Setup Applies only to the LonWorksQ option 51 Hi Digital Inputs en bI bet a dar 52 H2 Digital Outputs eoe peu eim eodem eR etd 57 HS Analog Inputs reir eb eee aote 58 L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Function 64 L3 Stall Preventi n need qi riche pini clades debs 65 L4 Speed Command Loss Detection 68 L5 Fault HGslatt tei dada ete dee den ee Rue 69 L6 Torque Detection 71 L8 Hardware Protection 73 o1 Monitor Configuration eseeesesennn 75 02 Key Selectos 79 Digital Operator Copy Function 82 Auto TUNING etate Sie en Ser I Pen uera RI US 85 Programming 5 1 Bypass Basic Programming Parameters The basic Drive programmin
7. 5 Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement 6 Removing and Mounting the Drive Control Terminal Card 8 Removing and Replacing the Drive in a Bypass Unit 9 Drive Replacement sse 9 Maintenance 7 1 E7B Maintenance Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance e e e The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive and Bypass or motor The ambient temperature should be within the Drive and Bypass specification of 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F The output current value shown in parameter U1 03 should not be higher than the motor rated current for an extended period of time The cooling fan in the Drive and Bypass should be operating normally Always turn OFF the input power before beginning inspection Confirm that the digital operator and indicator lights on the front panel have all turned OFF and then wait an additional five minutes before beginning the inspection Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock Please refer to Warnings on page i Table 7 1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied em 7 Corrective Action External terminals Are all screws and bolts tight Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly moun
8. 1 9 Two Motor 1 9 1 15 Ais ound 2 3 2 4 Mo nting uec gere Pe REDE 1 24 1 26 Mounting Dimensions eee 1 17 to 1 23 Mounting Replacement Drive eese 7 9 Multi function Analog Inputs eee 2 12 to 2 15 5 58 A 4 9 16 Multi function Analog Outputs 2 12 to 2 15 A 17 Multi function Digital Inputs eene 2 11 to 2 15 5 52 A 12 to A 14 Multi function Digital Outputs 2 9 2 15 A 15 Multi step Speed Reference Preset ales 5 39 5 53 A 8 Nameplate 1 7 1 8 NEMA 1 1 2 to 1 6 1 8 1 17 to 1 23 Noise Cooling F n tensione ttes 7 2 7 3 Bilectrical REIP REGE 1 9 teretes 2 Mechanical eese 5 42 6 20 A 9 No Load Current NLA sss 5 51 A 11 NORMAL TEST Switch sess 1 12 4 4 4 8 OFF POSIUOn 5 5 usce ped ene pier 1 12 4 8 Selector S witch sene 3 2 Off delay int hb denen A 5 Onzdelay Timer nett ires 5 16 A 4 A 5 Open Chassis enean arni Ie tee weeds 4 Operation hee ehe net 4 8 e 3 8 3 10 status U 1 12 E A 26 Operator Programming Err
9. 4 Bypass Operation DescriptOftcsnsiu ea Ca reda Er depo Lp ear Labeo aed 8 Chapter 5 asec eta eee ede 5 1 Bypass Basic Programming Parameters 2 Table of Contents vii Chapter 6 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting 6 1 Bypass In cL 2 Drive Dia fe T 3 Drive Troubleshooting oui ore a eet 17 Drive Main Circuit Test 23 Drive Date Stamp Information Dear kan ad des etae cb d 27 Chapter 7 22 uk aya R ean aya 7 1 acere e rrr X 2 Removing and Replacing Drive in a Bypass 9 Appendix Parameters 1 ccr nnmnnn A 1 Parameter List d P RUE PE V SU E 2 Monitor List oai eet ECCO ATE HERRERA YA ELA TRE ER 26 Fault Trace List a a E nui 28 Fault 2 ouo D
10. G mmand M s de Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H 6 Higher CDH Higher 00H 7 Higher 00H Lower Quantity Quantity Lower 02H Lower 02H No of data 04H Higher 10H 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H Lead data Lower 01H Higher 02H Next data Lower 58H No of data 2 x quantity High 63H crc ig Loe Lower 39H Fig D 9 Function Code 10H Message Example Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2 Handle IMPORTANT response messages in the same way Communications D 8 Modbus Data Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data are as follows Reference data monitor data and broadcast data Reference Data The reference data table is shown below Reference data can be read and written to Table D 4 Reference Data Register No Reserved Frequency reference Bit 0 Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Bit 1 Forward reverse operation 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bit2 External fault 1 Fault EFO Bit 3 Fault reset 1 Reset command Bit 4 ComNet Bit 5 ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi function digital input command 3 Bit 7 Multi function
11. L1 Sr e 4 FROM Bod CUSTOMER S o4 z A C LINES e 6 L3 aN 113 gt 6 SEE r 4 0 t2 TABLE 3 OPTION R Ki OPTION F GND LUG FOR AMPERE 3 INPUT B1 mDj 0 DRIVE EG RATINGS REACTOR INPUT NOTE 1 F4 FS FUSES EARTH cat GROUND a2 MI S3 5 S 3 a DELTA WYE T LOS pu d RFI LAI 12 1 13 1 INPUT FILTER GND1 LINE GND2 GRN YEL YEL YEL E 12 Loap PE LVA2 12 82 13 02 TERMINAL L1 12 L3 gery x ut 2 60 2 REMOVE JUMPER m 6 MA OPTIONZ 42 ER cuoc 28 20 mB 1 04 DC BUS 42 5 m SS og OPTION L LGN SEE THE FAULT Mc uam oe DRIVE KEYPAD MANUAL FOR MA p CONNECTIONS M CONTROL DRIVE T 1 RUNNING M2 L4 1 15 MANUAL w MANUAL REF IN SPEED POT L12 22 A1 010 0 OPTION 5 20K OHM S L5 1 16 e 150C E7 SERIAL TO A2 L11 1 23 v COMM RUN WITHOUT mx DRIVE L6 1 17 OPTION P 113 1 24 e PAOR M st BUN 51 l l Me L15 1 32 BYPASS DRIVE 51 e 11401 31 ENABLE WITH OPTION DIP SWITCH S1 FAULT RESET 54 el sl E 1 OFF E H STD AUTO MODE SPEED REFERENCE Ne 3 AUTO REF IN ISOLATED 4 20MADC M A2 ASSET 0 0 ON SN EE BY H 0
12. 11 COPY Function 03 01 3 02 A 25 DC Braking b2 01 62 09 A 4 Delay timers b4 01 4 02 A 5 Digital Inputs H1 01 H1 05 A 12 to A 14 Digital Outputs H2 01 2 02 A 15 Energy Saving 68 01 b8 06 A 7 Example of 3 16 3 17 Factory Reset Initialize esses A 2 Fault Restart L5 01 1 5 03 A 21 Protection L8 01 L8 19 A 22 High Slip n3 01 3 04 A 23 Hunting Prevention n1 01 n1 02 A 23 Initialization 1 00 1 05 2 Jump Frequencies 43 01 43 04 9 Key Selections 02 01 02 15 A 24 A 25 Listing of 1 to A 29 Inside Front Cover dee Renee 3 8 3 15 Monitor Select 01 01 01 08 A 23 A 24 MOP Trim Control d4 01 d4 02 A 9 Motor Overload L1 01 L1 05 A 19 Motor Setup E2 01 2 05 PI Control 65 01 65 30 5 6 Preset Reference Speeds
13. Fig D 7 Function Code 06H Message Example Communications D 7 Loopback Test 08H The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave Set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive Command Message Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH Fig D 8 Function Code 08H Message Example Write In Several Holding Registers 10H Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses The written data must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the command message Higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits in storage register address order The following table shows an example of a message when a forward run command has been set at a speed command of 60 0 Hz in the slave 1 Drive by the PLC
14. Bcc quf 29 Appendix B Capacity Related B 1 2 Appendix C Specifications eee eee C 1 Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications essen 2 Appendix D Communication 1 1 nennen nnne nnn D 1 Using Modbus Communication reet tree rra eni nn ie ba ene Fue ror nne cR RR eed 2 Modbus Function Code Details 0 7 Modbus Data Tables 5 i tete eed eat ies 9 Modbus Self Diagnosis eoo teeth uet unde rai Dp n cade RE wee canals 14 Metasys N2 Point dead cro 15 APOGEE FEN PolntDalabase o entia totidem e ean D IE 19 Appendix E Peripheral Devices eene nennen nnn E 1 Drive Input Fuse Selection for 121 Protection sssesseeeeenene 2 General Peripheral Devices ssssssssssssseeeeeneeene nennen nennen 4 Table of Contents viii Appendix F Replacement Parts 1 Bypass Replacement 2 Table of Contents ix Notes Chapter 1 Ph
15. DG 128 PG2 SEE NOTE 1 OUTPUT CONTACTOR MA CONTROL TRANSFORMER F6 CONTROL TRANSFORMER PRIMARY CONNECTIONS INPUT TERMINALS VOLTS B JUMPER LOCATION 208 H0 H2 NONE 1 6 230 240 H1 H4 H1 TO H3 H2 TO H4 460 480 H4 H2 TO H3 MA 02A 100 K3 113 62 114 3H E 11 BYPASS HEA CONTACTOR ry A2 _7 A1 115 62 116 10 A2 _7 1 TBI 26 25 REMOTE TRANSFER TO BYPASS CONTACT CLOSED BYPASS MIN RATING 0 14 120VAG 24 23 OPTION D MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2 SELECT CONTACT CLOSED MOTOR 2 MIN RATING 0 1A 120VAC PG2 21 02B MC L3 1 14 M2 L4 1 16 BS M3 15147 B L6 1 18 51 171 22 B 55 18 1 23 SN L9 1 24 PG2 BYPASS RELAY CONTROLLER PCB A2 PART NUMBER UTC000036 MANUAL SPEED POT OPTION S TOM TOM ORAS
16. sss 2 15 ern PLE 5 58 5 62 A 16 Parameters 5 60 4 A 9 16 Analog Outputs Blasco edu eost 17 18 Configuring Sake he en 2 17 Control Circuit Terminals sess 2 15 e mL EE A 17 Option 4 20 1 9 A 18 ete ee REESE A 17 A 18 Annunciation Contacts esee enne 2 9 APOGEEEEN utr teri tree 1v A 18 D 19 AUTO Selector e 1 12 2 12 2 15 3 4 4 9 4 10 5 4 5 24 REF Indicator eese 3 2 3 4 SEQ Indicator 3 2 3 4 Speed Command sss 5 4 5 12 Auto Restartes mot m 5 69 Faults Covered essere 5 69 Restart Time After 5 69 Number of Attempts essen 5 69 Parameters ERE A 21 Auto Tuning Fault Displays and 6 14 lao T o NAE LS 5 85 Line to Line lon 3 8 3 15 Motor Rated 5 50 A 25 Motor Rated A 25 Drive Wizard i oed 5 85 Auto Transfer to Bypass 2 24422222 1 16 4 10 B BAS Communication nennen iii 1 9 5 4 to 5 8 5 26 t
17. CONTACTS FOR CUSTOMER USE RATED BYPASS RUN MOTOR OL SAFETIES FAULT TEST NORMAL BYPASS OPERATOR INTERFACE PCB PART NUMBER UTC000037 2 CONTROL POWER ON DRIVE RUN SMOKE PURGE DRIVE FAULT BYPASS DRIVE OFF HAND AUTO CN204 gt TOAI CONTROL BOARD MANUAL SPEED POT OPTION 5 MANUAL SPEED ASSEMBLY PART NO URSNO001 MAX SPEEDTRIM R1 POT PCB MANUAL SPEED 1 RI w R MA 2 MOTOR OR OPTION D 125 AUTO 2 a MTR 1 126 2 1L4 120 CUSTOMER MUST PROVIDE PROPER SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION MEANS DISCONNECT FOR INSERTION OF NORMALLY OPEN BLDG AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERLOCK OR NORMALLY OPEN DAMPER END SWITCH SEE NOTE 4 AUTO MODE RUN STOP CONTACT CLOSED RUN FOR INSERTION OF NORMALLY CLOSED CUSTOMER SAFETY CONTACTS SEE NOTE 3 Items within dashed line boxes are optional equipment 114 Electrical Installation 2 21 81 83 85 CABINET BLOWER S IF REQUIRED 82 84 86 CABINET BLOWER S IF REQUIRED 100 100 114 7 s1 1R2 INDI
18. Fig 5 15 Drive Display for PI Control HAND Mode Table 5 4 Option Dependent Drive PI Control Parameters in Bypass Units Resulting Hand Auto PI Parameters Effected by Drive PCB Auto Options Specified Switch S1 E Run Stop PI Seipel mand Source TerminalA2 U1 01 Pot mA 3 amp 4 U1 01 Pot ce ERE IEEE __ IX _ MEEXES3EN NER C EE e E ESEBESE SIN ES ENS m E WES S IDE Definitions L LonWorks Option Card The factory default S Speed Potentiometer The H O A switch must be in the AUTO position J Native Protocols N2 or P1 to allow serial com or the PI function to control the Drive Jumpers required from S5 to 56 Parameter Reference 61 01 Speed Command Input Source H1 04 Terminal S6 Function Selection 0 Operator 4 Multi Step Ref 2 1 Terminals 6C Com Inv Sel 2 2 Serial Com RS485 6D Auto Mode Selection 6E Hand Mode Selection H1 03 Terminal S5 Function Selection 19 PI Disable 6C Com Inv Sel 2 19 PI Disable H3 08 Terminal A2 Signal Level 0 0 10 VDC 2 4 20mA Note Hand mode run stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND OFF AUTO switch Programming 5 24 B Discussion of Table 5 4 Options Dependent PI Control Bypass Parameter Settings Typical Drive Parameter Settings for PI Control with Various Combinations of Bypass and Control Optio
19. L3 02 Stall Prevention Level During Accel Setting Range 0 to 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 120 of Drive rated output current The stall prevention during acceleration function adjusts the acceleration time in order to prevent OC fault trips during acceleration If L3 01 0 Disabled stall prevention is disabled If the load is large enough and the acceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If L3 01 1 General Purpose then the standard stall prevention function is enabled When the output current exceeds the level set by the L3 02 parameter the Drive will discontinue accelerating and maintain speed If during acceleration the output current comes within 15 of the level set by parameter L3 02 the acceleration time is lengthened Once the output current level has dropped below the L3 02 level acceleration will begin again with the acceleration rate reaching the programmed rate once again 15 below the L3 02 level Stall level during acceleration L3 02 15 Output Current Time Output frequency l 2 Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling Time Fig 5 30 Detailed Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration If L3 01 2 Intelligent the intelligent stall prevention is enabled The active acceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to a
20. Perform a factory initialization Replace the option board Replace the control board Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 5 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Remove power to the Drive Connect the option board once An option board is not more correctly connected to the con CPF23 Communication Option Card trol board or an option board Perform a factory initialization Option DPRAM Err Interconnection Fault that is not made for the Drive Cycle power off and on to the is attached to the control Drive board Replace the option board Replace the control board Check for an external condition heo An external fault condition Opt External Fit Communication Option Card External Fault Verify the parameters Verify communication signal Ext Fault S3 External Fault at Terminal 53 EF4 Ext Fault 54 External Fault at Terminal 54 7 Eliminate the cause of an EF5 An external fault condition external fault condition External Fault at Terminal S5 exists connected to a multi Ext Fault S5 f AMA function digital input EES Ext Fault at Terminal S6 Ext Fault S6 xternal Fault at Termina EF7 Remove the fault from multi Ext Fault S7 Pee function digital input PI Feedback Loss Verify Drive is programmed to This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss PI Feedback source receive the PI Feedback source FBL Detection is pro
21. 4 5 4 6 5 2 5 16 6 21 A 4 eee terae 1 10 C 2 E 2 a 4 9 6 19 D 3 DDLY Waiting to 5 16 ee 5 42 9 Deceleration Stopping Method 5 12 5 38 A 4 A 23 Stop Indicator 2 2221122 3 5 Stall Prevention during sss 5 66 A 20 TME e pP 5 38 7 4 Troubleshooting 6 8 6 12 6 19 Decimal to Hex Conversion eese A 30 Key cie ce otio 3 3 6 16 Troubleshooting eee 6 16 es 4 5 5 78 5 79 1 12 tr eec pee me terne eben iv Delay Timer Parameters 2 2 2202 A 4 A 5 Description PtOdUCt iiie ai terr iii E eaa 1 9 Diagnostics 6 1 to 6 26 D 14 Index 2 Digital Inputs Connection Diagram eene 2 13 Control Circuit Terminals 2 14 2 15 Parameters 5 52 A 12 to A 14 Troubleshooting eee 6 10 6 16 Digital Motor Operated Pot 5 43 5 79 A 24 Digital Operator 1 11 3 1 Copy Function inerte 5 82 A 25 Data Display ee eo ite 3 2 Display Selection D
22. 200 240V 50 60Hz 52A OUTPUT AC3PH 0 240V 0 400Hz 45A 17kVA Revision Code Input Power Specifications Output Power Specifications ON MASS 7 0kg Weight SIN 1W0281234561234 eT FE FILE E131457 Serial Number UL File Number Fig 1 2 Drive Nameplate Example B Bypass Unit Model Numbers The model number on the nameplate of the Bypass unit indicates the enclosure voltage Drive rated current and options of the Bypass unit in alphanumeric codes E7TBVBO096000R00SO00L E7 Bypass Configuraton Po Not enabled Enclosure B NEMA 12 None Output Current P 3 15 PSI Transducer _ NEC Rated Amps Ex 096 96A ome S Speed Pot OT Motor Standard D 2 Motor OR Motor AND w custom Nameplates 5 Load Reactor Line Impedance 3 Bus Reactor 5 Bus Reactor Input Reactor 0 2 R 1 3 and 5 Bus Reactors are only available as an option on Drives up to 25HP at 208V and 30HP at 480V larger Drives have a Bus Reactor as standard 2 3 Input Reactor when combined with the standard Bus Reactor available on drives above 25HP at 208V and 30HP at 480V yields a total of 5 input impedance Fig 1 3 Byp
23. 50188275 11 Ese E7U41600A 250 B302 50188275 F330F7 59 59 E7U41850A B36 MAL3660036M UCB000061 113 F400F7 E7U41850A B414 MAL3660036M UCB000061 114 F500F7 40 40 50 60 75 Us ____ gt 100 1020750 2 UCB000061 12 2 _75 200 0 300 350 400 70422004 400 B477 __ MAL3680040m 72 114 500 7 8515 MAL3680040M 0 000072 F500G7 B590 _ MAL3680040M UCB000072 E7U42200A E7U43000A 450 00 og z gt 5 YASK 50 SQ D YASK PIN PART S10 P N 5P37 s puso Fl 25 Motor Circuit Protector Input Contactor Output Contactor Bypass Contactor Overload Relay Control Transformer YASK PART NO CPT Primary Fuses YASKAWA BUSSMANN 5P17 0359 FNQ R 4 5P17 0359 FNQ R 4 50210414 5P17 0359 FNQ R 4 sion 5P17 0359 FNQ R 4 5P17 0360 FNQ R 5 5P17 0361 FNQ R 7 1 2 5P17 0361 FNQ R 7 1 2 LR9 F7575 27 50210407 5P17 0360 FNQ R 5 rwr 5 58 Bypass Replacement Parts F 2 010 5P 17 0360 FNQ R 5 5P17 0361 FNQ R 7 1 2 Table F 3 Bypass Replacement Parts CPTS dary Fi Drive Input Fuses Option F DC Bus Choke 3 Reactor Option R 5 Reactor Option K RFI Filter Option E econdary Fuses Semiconductor Fuses F3 F4 F5 QTY 3 Fuse Block F3 F4 F5 3 Option X 5 Opti
24. 1 12 1 13 1 14 4 9 F 4 1 12 1 13 1 14 4 1 13 7 2 2 4 Soft Charge secte eee 6 9 6 12 6 23 Control Circuit 1 14 2 5 2 10 6 4 Characteristics arna 2 8 to 2 18 Connection 2 6 2 13 D 3 Analog Input Terminal Configuration 2 12 eei etre retinet 1 13 7 8 7 10 B 2 Bypass Replacement Parts F 2 F 4 Connector CNS eee 7 8 7 10 Inspecting esp eee d eee 7 3 Power EuSe scene ue 1 14 F 4 IndiCatOr 4 ua teme 1 11 3 5 RAUS 4 11 Transformer diee 1 13 Troubleshooting Drive 6 9 6 12 6 24 Terminal Functions esee 1 14 2 11 2 15 2 5 2 6 2 8 2 12 2 15 PRECAUTIONS terrere RETE 2 14 Control Panel eerte 1 11 3 1 Indicating 3 5 7 4 Selector 1 1 11 3 2 4 8 7 4 Control Power Transformer 1 14 3 5 F 4 Cooling tenete eem 1 24 1 25 Fan 5 73 5 74 5 81 6 25 7 6 7 7 A 22 A 25 FINS erp 6 7 6 11 7 2 7 3 4 COPY to Keypad Function 1 11 5 3 7 9 7 12 Faults sn deli te
25. Table 1 4 480V Enclosure Data i iaht Input Drive Bypass NEC OL Heat Enclosure Dimensions Weight E 2 uae Electrical Wats Model Model Sla 110 Loss NEMA 1 amp NEMA 12 FVFF of 5 Schematic CIMR Number 1 min Watts H Assembly 3 20050 inches inches Box 0 5 42P2 7 001 11 12 57 0 75 42P2 E7B 001 1 6 1 8 57 1 42P2 E7B B002 2 1 2 62 2 42P2 E7B B003 34 33 89 115 Ibs 156 Ibs 3 42p2 E7B 004 48 53 121 2948 1390 13 66 43 35 19 06 13 66 5 43P7 E7B_B007 7 6 8 4 155 7 5 45P5 E7B_BO11 11 0 12 1 217 pd 5 Dimension Drawing Dimension Drawing 10 4TP5 E7B 014 14 0 15 4 318 5 5512 5 5513 127 Ibs 164 Ibs 15 49P0 E7B B021 21 0 23 1 404 20 40111 E7B B027 27 0 29 7 408 25 40151 E7B_B034 34 0 37 4 485 142 Ibs 189 Ibs 30 40181 E7B B040 40 0 44 0 618 480 40 40241 E7B B052 520 572 1040 203 Ibs 281168 00 50 40301 E7B B065 65 0 71 5 1045 40 48 25 63 14 66 m 55 35 25 63 14 66 5 60 40371 E7B 077 77 0 84 7 1197 319 Ibs 5 Dimension Drawing Dimension Drawing 75 40451 E7B B096 96 0 105 6 1357 SA 5 5515 241 Ibs 332 Ibs 100 40551 E7B_B124 124 0 136 4 1749 125 40750 E7B_B156 156 0 171 6 2032 84 00 25 63 26 258 943 Ibs 150 40900 E7B_B180 180 0
26. 5 81 A 23 User 5 36 A 23 24 MONITOR 3 3 MOP Motor Operated Pot Function 5 43 5 70 A 12 Reference Memory esee A 9 Motor Auto Tuning Fault Displays amp 6 14 HOW TO a i anii ert 5 85 a As 3 15 Motor Rated Current esses A 25 Motor Rated 2 25 Circuit Protector 1 12 1 13 4 6 4 7 Connectors ie Gh ens oe ees 2 2 2 6 ContactOr i i eu eie 1 14 4 4 Direction eio 4 5 4 7 6 18 Grounding 6 go nai eite eerte 2 5 No Load Current NLA 5 51 A 11 B 3 Operation EEE tette nee 2 10 4 8 Overload 1 11 1 14 2 9 2 15 3 6 4 4 A 19 Parameters oi RR RE ree 11 Pr Heat C rrent sch aide 5 17 4 ProtectlOmins Riehl EG 1 9 1 12 C 4 cere reete ee ree A 19 Rated Current FLA 4 3 5 50 A 11 B 3 Rated Voltage 4 3 4 5 5 44 A 10 Speed U 1 02 sd et rene tenete cet A 26 Stopping Method Selection 5 12 A 4 Temperature Input eese A 16 A 19 Troubleshooting eee 6 17 to 6 21 Two Motor AND
27. 65 13 Feedback Loss Detection Level Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 B b5 14 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 0 Seconds Factory Default 1 0 Seconds The Drive interprets feedback loss whenever the feedback signal drops below the value of b5 13 and stays below that level for at least the time set into b5 14 See Figure 5 15 below for timing details Measured Feedback b5 13 T T 2 b5 14 ON CLOSED Loss Digital Out TIME OFE OPEN Fig 5 17 Loss of PI Feedback Feature E b5 15 Sleep Function Start Level Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz Factory Default 0 0 Hz B 65 16 Sleep Delay Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default 0 0 Seconds The Sleep Function can be programmed to prevent running the Drive when the PI loop output or the speed command is so low that no usable work is being done and or equipment damage may result The Sleep Function can be Enabled by entering a value in parameter b5 15 If the Drive s output drops below the level set by the Sleep Function Start Level b5 15 and remains there at least as long as the delay time determined by the Sleep Delay Time b5 16 then the Drive s internal Run command drops out and the Drive output ceases Though the Drive s output has ceased all other Drive functions continue Once the Drive s theoretical output returns to a level above the Sleep Function Start Level b5 15 and remains above that
28. QUICK Quick Setting Menu This menu is used to set read a limited set of parameters in the Drive Follow the key operations below to access the Quick Set ting Menu QUICK QUICK 4 Reference Source MENU Main Menu Quick Setting Terminals 2 Use and keys to scroll through the Quick Setting parameter list Number Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection This parameter s menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when 65 01 0 Control Panel 13 ADV Programming Menu This menu is used to set read every parameter in the Drive Follow the key operations below to access the Programming Menu ADV ADV Initialization Main Menu Programming Select Language gt Use V and keys to scroll through the Programming parameter group list For a complete parameter list see Appendix A 3 d 3 5 C 2 Reference Limits d Jump Frequencies d4 A A H L d6 Field Weakening H2 Digital Outputs 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 5 Serial Com Setup 1 3 5 8 1 1 Control Panel 14 VERIFY Modified Constants Parameters Menu This menu is used to set read only those parameters that have been modified from the Drive s original factory default settings Follow the key operations below to access the Modified Constants Parameters Menu VERIFY Main Menu See Note 1 Modified Consts Note 1 I
29. 6 1 CN102A 115 A A eile 25 R106 A1 Nc A2 C106 11 L V2 4 AUTO TRANSFER TO BYPASS 103 TOP BOTTOM DISABLE ENABLE 6 K104 R108 Lgs C107 0 R107 103 9 CN203 WG 05205 K120 B m 2 FACTORY SETTING 15 DISABLE K114 a wll e R109 C108 K121 WG K114 REMOTE TRANSFER TO BYPASS S104 TOP BOTTOM DISABLE ENABLE 6 TB1 a 2 FORMA 221 228 a Ze K115 R110 C109 0 NA 0 TB1 16 K116 m 2 FACTORY SETTING IS DISABLE 17 1 06 REMOTE TRANSFER 26 TO BYPASS CONTACT CLOSED BYPASS Electrical Installation 2 24 2 FORMA 113 118 CON 18 1 06 CONTROL POWER ON MOTOR OVERLOAD CUSTOMER SAFETIES FAULT DRIVE FAULT RELAY 2 FORM A 1 FORM DRIVE FAULT DRIVE RUN RELAY 2 FORM A 2 FORM A 1 FORM MOTOR OVERLOAD CUSTOMER SAFETIES FAULT RELAY 1 FORM A 1 FORM C RUN RELAY 2 FORMA DAMPER OPTION CONTROL RELAY 1 FORM A INPUT CONTACTOR CABINET BLOWER S 360VA MAX TOTAL FOR ALL BLOWERS COMBINED OUTPUT CONTACTOR DRIVE RUN BYPASS CONTACTOR BYPASS PILOT RELAY 1 FORMA BYPASS RUN AUTO TRANSF
30. Options J Serial Communications Bypass with PI Control and serial communication for run stop control and Setpoint input Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Setpoint input signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant A 7 Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator U1 01 b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 6C Com Inv Sel 2 S6 must A terminal S6 input contact opening H O A Auto selects serial com for both the be jumpered to S5 run stop command and speed command A terminal S6 input contact closure H O A Hand allows b1 01 to select Keypad Operator as the speed command source This input is jumpered to S5 therefore the contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 B PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control H5 08 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Drive communicates via protocol selected Programming 5 27 Options J and S Serial Communications and Speed Pot Bypass with PI Contr
31. ses Inside Back Cover Temperature Ambient Operating sese 1 24 C 4 Ambient Setting tette A 22 Effect on Frequency Accuracy 4 SIOTage so oro n ie etd s C 4 Troubleshooting esee 6 19 Terminal 22 1 13 1 14 Connections 0000 2 2 2 6 2 11 Control 2 8 2 11 2 15 Main Circuit 2 2 to 2 7 Inspectitig si ert eae 7 2 WILDE 2 3 SCLEW 2 3 Terminal PCB Drive Configuration 2 13 Inspecting eiecti ere PERS 7 2 Index 9 5 52 to 5 64 A 12 to A 18 Removing and Mounting see 7 8 Terminals Control Circuit sss 2 11 2 15 Terminals Drive 2 13 A 12 to A 18 Terminating Resistance 2 16 2 18 5 5 D 3 Three Wire Operation see 5 10 Timers Delays ete tert A 4 A 5 Timers Elapsed nre er rt he M ELTE 3 12 5 80 5 81 A 24 A 25 A 27 to A 29 Timer On 5 16 A 4 A 5 Top Bracket sisi cic eren reti ee de dapes 7 10 Torque Compensation esses A 8 Torque Detection or en 6 8 6 9 5o Ane eiie
32. 8POINT MOLEX HEADER AX USED TO CONNECT THE PANEL HARNESS TO THE BYPASS RELAY PCB CN102C ZN 14 POINT 1 PIECE PHOENIX CONNECTOR USED TO CONNECT PANEL MOUNTED OPTIONS TO THE BYPASS CN203 XY _1 26 POINT RIBBON CABLE HEADER CN204 USED TO CONNECT TO THE BYPASS RELAY PCB CONNECTOR CN103 3 POINT 2 PIECE PHOENIX CONNECTOR USED TO CONNECT THE OPTIONAL CABINET DOOR MOUNTED MANUAL SPEED POT TO THE OPERATOR PCB PANEL CN205 3 POINT 2 PIECE PHOENIX CONNECTOR x USED TO CONNECT THE OPTIONAL CABINET DOOR MOUNTED 2 MOTOR OR SELECTOR SWITCH TO THE OPERATOR PCB PANEL CN206A RELAY PCB 2 POINT 2 PIECE PHOENIX CONNECTOR CN103 RIBBON GABLE HEADER USED TO CONNECT THE OPTIONAL CABINET DOOR MOUNTED BLOWER S USED TO CONNECT TO THE CABINET DOOR MOUNTED OPERATOR CN206B TO THE OPERATOR PCB CONNECTOR CN203 O 2 2 PIECE PHOENIX CONNECTOR 5 USED TO CONNECT THE OPTIONAL CABINET DOOR MOUNTED BLOWER S TO THE OPERATOR PCB PANEL CN207 2 PIECE PHOENIX CONNECTOR USED TO CONNECT THE OPTIONAL CABINET DOOR MOUNTED PARTS AND THE MODE RUN AND STOP PUSHBUTTONS TO THE OPERATOR PCB PANEL RATED 1AMP 120VAC MAX K107 K112 K105 K105 K109 K109 c ollo ollo ollo 6 1 ollo 1 K105 K105 alle o 77 TBI 9 TB 710 712 213 TBI 14 1 715 71
33. Add Schematic CIMR Number 1min Watts H Assembly n M E 201 inches 0 5 E7U22P21 E7B_A002 2 2 24 68 0 75 E7U22P21 E7B_A003 3 2 3 5 68 1 E7U22P21 E7B A004 40 44 78 29 48 19 06 13 66 43 35 19 06 13 66 2 E7U22P21 E7B A006 6 8 75 110 115 Ibs 156 Ibs 3 E7U22P21 E7B A009 9 6 10 6 141 5 E7U23P71 E7B A015 15 2 16 7 202 Dimension Drawing Dimension Drawing 240 75 E7U25P51 E7B A022 220 242 273 8 5512 5 5513 10 7027 51 E7B_A028 28 0 30 8 365 127 165 164 Ibs 15 7020111 7 _ 042 42 0 46 2 578 20 7020151 E7B_A054 54 0 59 4 653 DUE Sark E7B 00 40 48 25 63 14 66 3 25 E7U20181 E7B 068 680 748 746 92 39 23 63 1466 30 E7U20221 E7B_A080 80 0 88 0 939 Dimension Drawing Dimension Drawing 5 5514 221068 S 5515 307 1b 40 E7U20301 E7B_A104 104 0 114 4 1340 50 E7U20370 E7B_A130 130 0 143 0 1523 847 lbs 60 E7U20370 E7B AI54 154 0 169 4 1544 84 00 25 63 26 25 943 Ibs 75 E7U20450 E7B A192 192 0 2112 1860 230 M NOT REQUIRED 100 E7U20750 E7B_A248 248 0 272 8 3003 1214 Ibs 125 E7U20750 E7B_A312 312 0 343 2 3045 1330 lbs 150 E7U20900 E7B_A360 360 0 396 0 3440 1423 165 Note 1 Horsepower rating is based on a standard NEMA B 4 pole motor Note 2 The underscore position in these model numbers codes for the enclosure type 1 B NEMA12 FVFF Note 3 Heat loss is the amount of heat dissipated by the drive at full load with all standard options av
34. PSIG ee 9 ee E E Ee MM ETAT t RT DERE ERR Eres reine ees HEN EE EE S ee ES 28 80 a E d Ra t RE ER eee Definitions L LonWorks Option Card The Drive factory default S Speed Potentiometer The H O A switch must be in the AUTO position J Native Protocols 2 or P1 to allow serial com to control the Drive P Pneumatic Pressure Transducer 3 15 PSIG Jumpers required from 55 to 56 and 54 to SN Parameter Reference 61 01 Speed Command Input Source H3 13 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection 0 Operator 0 Main Fref TA1 1 Terminals 1 Main Fref TA2 H1 02 Terminal S4 Function Selection 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 3 Multi step Ref 1 41 02 Frequency Reference 2 14 Fault Reset 41 04 Frequency Reference 4 H1 03 Terminal S5 Function Selection 3 Multi step Ref 1 6C Com Inv Sel 2 H3 02 Terminal A1 Gain Setting Note Hand mode run stop for Drive and Byp
35. Drive Node Address Serial Com Adr 5 05 5 06 5 07 5 08 5 09 Communication Speed Selection Serial Baud Rate Communication Parity Selection Serial Com Sel Stopping Method after Communication Error Serial Fault Sel Communication Error Detection Selection Serial Fit Dtct Drive Transmit Wait Time Transmit WaitTIM RTS Control Selection RTS Control Sel Communication Protocol Selec tion Protocol Select Communication Error Detection Time CE Detect Time Selects Drive station node number address for terminals R R S S Note An address of 0 disables serial com Selects the baud rate for terminals R R S and S 0 1200 Baud 1 2400 Baud 2 4800 Baud AGOGEE FLN 3 9600 Baud Metasys N2 4 19200 Baud Selects the communication parity for terminals R R S and S 0 No Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication error is detected 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only 4 Runn at D1 04 Enables or disables the communications timeout detection function 0 Disabled A communications loss will NOT cause a communications fault 1 Enabled If communications are lost for more than the time specified in parameter 5 09 a communica tions fault will occur Sets the time from when the Drive receives data to when the Drive sends data Enables or disables request to send RTS contro
36. E1 04 2 to 39 RPM Enter the number of motor poles 40 to 39999 User display Desired set display value is set at Max output frequency __4 digit number The number of digits from the right the decimal point is displayed 0 to 39999 Example If 200 0 is displayed at Max output frequency set 12000 When 1 03 gt 40 user units the unit selected in 01 09 will be displayed for D1 01 to D1 17 U1 01 UI 02 and U1 20 Set Value Description LCD display becomes dark Standard setting LCD display becomes light Parameters A 23 Setting Range 0 00 to 2 50 1 00 Factory Setting Menu Location Programming 15096 T Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Table A 1 Parameter List Continued oe Parameter Name m Setting Menu end Description Digital Operator Display Range Location Selects the U1 monitors displayed on the 4th and 5th lines of the digital operator display User Monitor Selection Mode 0 3 Mon Sequential Displays the next 2 sequential U1 g 91 06 Monitor Mode Sel monitors osr Programming 1 3 Mon Selectable Displays U1 monitors set by 01 07 and 01 08 Second Line User Monitor Sets the U1 monitor always displayed on the 4th line 01 07 Selection of the digital operator display Effective only when 01 i Programming 2nd Monitor Sel 06 1 Third Line User Monitor Sets
37. Giana Recheck the accel decel time otor Overheating Fault OH4 ROME 2 8 Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 Drive stops operation according to the Motor Overheat 2 sinz of eae P 5 measured by motor thermistor Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 thru 1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat Check for dirt build up on the The temperature of the Drive cooling fin Cooling fan s are not fans and cooling fins The Drive stops or continues operation 4 Motor Overheat 1 p p measured by motor thermistor according to the setting of L1 03 d 2 VIF pattern E1 01 ru 1 13 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 7 Table 61 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action The load is too large The Recheck the cycle time and the cycle time is too short at the size of the load as well as the Motor Overload accel decel time times set in C1 01 and C1 02 Designed to protect the motor The voltage of the V F pattern Review the V F pattern Fully adjustable from parameter E2 01 is high parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 Motor rated current settingis Check the motor rated current improper value in E2 01 The load is too large The Recheck the cycle time and the cycle time is too short at the size of the load as well as the accel decel time times set in C1 01 and C1 02 OL1 Motor Overloaded OL2 Drive Overload Inv Over
38. ee eto er tee Ren 5 81 Mode 5 36 Parameters tacos ee 5 9 5 10 2 O TERA ctt 4 5 5 3 5 79 24 Input Contact aede eee 1 13 F 2 Control 1 14 2 11 to 2 16 4 8 4 10 5 29 5 39 Dat z 1 7 1 8 Diodes 6 22 6 23 7 2 lg TR 1 9 Multi function Terminals Analog Inputs eese 2 12 to 2 15 5 58 5 60 5 63 6 14 16 Digital Inputs emeret Mete 2 11 2 13 2 15 5 52 to 5 55 12 Phase Loss Detection Level 6 8 A 22 1 9 2 10 2 16 5 4 5 62 POWER aser 2 2 2 6 C 2 Terminal Status 1 10 A 26 eA 10 2 3 Setting scie edes 4 5 5 44 A 10 Inspection Periodic ee o reb 7 2 IO R 1 3 Installation heiter PR 2 1 iieri tre e te 1 1 Orientation amp Clearances 1 17 1 26 NI 1 24 C 4 Integral Control PI 5 22 5 29 5 30 6 20 A 5 Interference ned mere pter e ib en 1 9 Internal P nel e eee retener E 1 13 J Jog Frequency Reference 5 39 5 53 5 54 A 8 A 12 Jump Frequency esee 4 6
39. met eae 2 1 0 00 to 41 17 Jog Frequency Reference Speed command used when a jog is selected via multi function 1 04 6 00Hz Pioeramimii Jog Reference input terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 Value 8 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 8 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Description Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display P Range Setting Location Reference Limits SSS Determines maximum speed command set as a percentage of Frequency Reference Upper n h c parameter E1 04 If speed command is above this value actual 2 2 Limit 2 2 7 2 0 0 to 110 0 100 0 Quick Setting 42 Drive speed will be limited to this value This parameter applies to Ref Upper Limit all speed command sources Determines minimum speed command set as a percentage of Frequency Reference Lower a parameter E1 04 If speed command is below this value actual 5 Limit 5 2 0 0 to 110 0 0 0 Quick Setting Drive speed will be set to this value This parameter applies to all Ref Lower Limit speed command sources Master Speed Reference Determines the minimum speed command set as a percentage of ae parameter E1 04 If speed command is below this value actual Lower Limit 5 5 0 0 to 110 0 0 0 Programming Drive speed will be set to this value This parameter only applies Ref1 Lower Limit to analog inpu
40. ous s nw s 1 3 Warnings and Cautions This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product that if not heeded may result in personal injury fatality or equipment damage Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions AWARNING YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design Under no circumstances should any YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control Without exception all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part s safe use and operation Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual NO OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IS OFFERED YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury property damage losses or claims ari
41. 1 0 75 LR2 D15 18 10 15 LC1D50 10 3 45 8052 LR2D35 10 10 75 LR2 025 14 6 15 0059 A054 LR2 D35 10 1 0 75 LR2 025 14 6 15 065 10 3 45 8065 LR2D35 10 10 75 LR2 035 10 10 75 A068 LR2 D35 10 10 75 LR2 035 10 170 75 LC1 080 10 2 100 0074 A080 8077 15203563 10 10 100 0088 B096 LR9 5567 6 30 200 LR2 035 10 10 75 LC1 D115 8 250 kcmil 100 A104 LR9 5569 6 30 200 D114 A130 8124 159 5569 6 3 0 200 LR2 035 10 170 75 LCi D150 8 250 kcmil 100 0143 LR9 25569 6 3 0 200 LR2 035 10 170 75 LC1 F185 8 30 200 A154 B156 LR9F5571 6 300 kcmil 275 0169 A192 8180 LR9F5571 6 300 kcmil 275 F5567 6 30 200 F265 6 300 kcmil 275 0211 A248 8240 LR9F7575 2 x 6 300 kcmil 2x500 189 5569 6 30 200 F330 6 300 kcmil 275 D273 LR9 F7575 2 x 6 300 kcmil 2x500 LR9F5569 6 30 200 F400 4 500 kemil 500 B302 LR9 F7579 2 x 6 300 kcmil 2x500 LR9F5569 6 30 200 A312 LR9 F7579 2 x 6 300 kcmil 2x500 LR9F5571 6 300 kcmil 275 0343 A360 8361 LR9F7579 2 x 6 300 kcmil 2x500 LR9F5571 6 300 kcmil 275 F500 2 x 2 600 kcmil 2x 500 D396 B414 LR9F7581 3 x 6 300 3x 500 B477 LR9 F7581 3 x 6 300 kcmil 3x500 LR9F7575 2 x 6 300 kcmil 2x 500 B515 LROF7581 3 x 6 300 kcmil 3x500 LROF7575 2 x 6 300 kcmil 2x 500 LC1 F630 3 x 2 600 kcmil 3x 500 B590 The fourth underscore position in these model numbers codes for the e
42. 5 71 5 72 esae DG A e 5 71 Parameters unde und IRIS 5 71 A 21 Selection dots eb 5 71 TI up ERREUR UE EUER 5 71 Torque Output nee eres 6 18 Transformers Preventive 7 3 Transistor Module Inspectitig re E ENS 7 2 6 24 Trim Control Level a scsi ci Besse A 9 Troubleshooting 2 6 1 to 6 26 Two Wire Operation eee 5 10 Twelve pulse rectification sss 2 7 C 2 C 3 U 01 Monitor 1455 3 10 A 26 A 27 U2 Fault Trace 3 11 A 28 U3 Fault History List 3 12 A 29 UL File 2 1 8 Undertorque Detection UL 5 71 5 72 ree 6 9 6 12 A 21 Undervoltage UV 6 9 6 12 Detection 19 PROLE CH OM sit 4 Up Arrow estre ui 3 3 Up Down 5 53 A 12 User 5 10 5 79 User 204 0 0 0 0000 2 3 User 5 75 5 76 23 V Ventilation cinta die RA Manes 1 24 VERIFY Copy Function eee 5 83 5 84 VERIFY Menu nitens 3 8 3 15 Mit Pattern iuit
43. 5 81 A 25 Fast Stop ie ec ettet 5 38 A 7 A 13 A 14 Fuse Checking rettet 6 25 Inspecting nente tete 7 2 7 3 Operation Delay Time 5 74 A 22 Operation Selection sss 5 73 A 22 Replacement 7 6 7 7 Troubleshooting sese 6 11 Fault Clearing teer 3 3 5 81 A 25 Covered by Auto Restart sse 5 69 iiie tte RR ere 6 4 to 6 15 Digital Output Signal esse 2 15 A 15 Effect on Auto 5 69 External Jii eh Fette dee ren tis A 14 meet 3 12 A 29 Indi Gator 31 eter eR RES 3 4 3 6 3 7 Listing 6 2 6 4 R Set ete eh eee 3 3 5 54 A 13 A 21 Trace sor 3 11 A 28 Feedback PI Function 5 22 5 30 A 5 Differential tenete tees 5 61 A 16 Display iid e eret 5 23 6 6 Loss Detection 1 5 32 A 6 Loss Detection 5 32 A 6 Loss Detection Selection 5 31 A 6 Square Root Function Activation 5 36 A 6 5 61 16 Service eer S IPSE 6 3 Field Wiring suse 1 13 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 18 FLA Motor 1 4 4 3
44. Aux Terminal A1 function is set to be a speed command input H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A terminal 55 input contact closure selects Aux Terminal A1 as a preset speed default This input contact is closed when H O A Hand Programming 5 6 Options 5 Speed Pot Bypass with speed potentiometer for speed control Hand mode speed command from speed potentiometer Auto mode speed command input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result 1 01 61 01 1 Terminals default 1 Terminals 61 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals _______ command source Speed command source Terminals Terminals H3 13 1 Main Fref TA2 Main speed command source Terminal A2 and the Aux speed command source Terminal A1 H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 2 Aux Reference default Aux Terminal A1 function is set to be a speed command input H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 default A terminal S5 input contact closure selects Aux Terminal A1 as a preset speed This input contact is closed when H O A Hand B Options J L Serial Communications Bypass with serial communication for control Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode spee
45. Contact Closure on Terminal S1 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects Drive station node number address for terminals R R S S Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to Modbus communications Selects the baud rate for terminals R R S and S 0 1200 Baud 1 2400 Baud 2 4800 Baud 3 9600 Baud 4 19200 Baud Selects the communication parity for terminals R S and S 0 No Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication error is detected 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only 4 Run at D1 04 Enables or disables the communications timout detection function 0 Disabled A communications loss will NOT cause a communications fault 1 Enabled If communications is lost for more than the time specified in parameter H5 09 a communi cations fault will occur Sets the time from when the Drive receives data to when the Drive sends data Enables or disables request to send RTS control 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Selects the communication protocol 0 Modbus 1 N2 Metasys 2 Pl APOGEE Determines how long communications must be lost before a fault is annunciated Works in conjunction with parameters H5 05 and 5 04 0 to FF H5 08 dependent 0 0 to 10 0 After these parameters are changed Drive power must be cycled before the changes
46. M wc aes FIRS jn 8 oe Minor ror or U T G5 Us ar Or wT Fus ov 1 m ENT cL SIRE o CMDREVSTOF STOP RUNSTOF stor N Lu uo owemwsme sr stor ZERO SPEED ON or Urin TDI SPEED AGREE NOAGR 112542 IDI DRIVEREADY 16 NOTRDY i UNI 0 WEMOTE Gr RN gt Bo sa 1 08 1 41 1 29 carum c cia 1 r 1 12 Bit 2 m 1 12 Bit 0 n ROW ENTE STOP oss px EI mo sume mr mo wr Communications D 19 s ES SI EIS Er Uwe SI Units SI xu Text Tox Parameter Fur oor worrrovrr 9 J rp o om wp rw or Urn US rip seem mock om ome use y ECT en fusco MF INP2 EA Ln __ O O O O O O Q
47. Open Return to normal speed command Not effective when using d1 01 thru 41 04 as speed command Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase Table A 1 Parameter List Continued a Setting Factory Description Setting Parameters A 13 Menu Location Programming Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Description Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display P Range Setting Location Digital Inputs 1E Ref Sample Hold Analog speed command is sampled then held at time of input closure 20 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Ramp To Stop 21 External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Ramp To Stop 22 External fault Normally Open During Run Ramp To Stop 23 External fault Normally Closed During Run Ramp To Stop 24 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Coast To Stop 25 External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Coast To Stop 26 External fault Normally Open During Run Coast To Stop 27 External fault Normally Closed During Run Coast To Stop 28 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop Terminal S6 Function 29 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop 4 2 wire Bro Selection External fault Normally Open During Run Fast Stop 3 3 wire Programming Terminal S6 Sel 2B External fault Normally Closed During Run Fast Stop 2C External fault Normally Open Always Detected Alarm Only Exter
48. Voltage Monitor 071 06 A 26 Outputs Analog 2 13 2 15 2 18 A 17 A 18 Outputs Digital esses 2 11 2 15 5 57 A 15 Over Current 2 4 4 4 7 5 70 6 7 Overheat OH Alarms Faults 5 73 6 7 6 11 A 19 A 22 B 3 And Auto Restart 5 70 Cooling Fin Heatsink 6 7 6 11 7 2 7 3 C 4 eR 1 24 22 MOtOE x ert 6 7 6 11 6 19 A 19 Parameters ete A 19 A 22 Pre Ala ee eee 6 11 A 22 Overload Alarms Faults aa a 6 7 6 8 And Auto Restart atem omen 5 70 Capacity iiobis te t eren C 4 Drive mats eoe RE 5 50 6 7 ae edes 6 7 A 15 A 19 Protecti oinaan ER REA eee A 19 C 4 Relay ett uen 1 13 2 2 2 3 Overtorque See Torque Detection 5 71 A 21 Overvoltage 6 6 6 9 C 4 And Auto 5 70 DC Bus See DC Bus Voltage 6 8 6 12 C 4 P Parameters Accel Decel C1 01 2 2222 00 A 7 Analog Inputs H3 02 13 A 16 Analog Outputs H4 01 H4 08 A 17 A 18 Auto Tuning 1 02 1 040 2 222 22 A 25 Capacity 1 1 Carrier Freq C6 02 6 05 8 Com OPT Setup F6 01 F6 05
49. d1 01 d1 17 8 Programming 2 22 2 2 2 5 1 to 5 85 PwrLoss Ridethru L2 01 L2 05 A 19 Ref Detection L4 01 14 06 A 21 Reference Limits d2 01 42 03 A 9 S Curve Acc Dec C2 01 2 02 A 7 Sequence b1 01 b1 12 sese A 4 Serial Com Setup H5 01 5 09 A 18 Setting and Reading sss 3 8 to 3 17 Speed Search 63 01 3 14 5 Stall Prevention L3 01 L3 06 A 20 Torque Comp C4 01 4 02 A 8 Torque Detection L6 01 16 03 A 21 Troubleshooting isisisi iriiri ereire 6 14 User A2 01 2 32 2 2 2 1 A 2 A 3 V f Pattern E1 01 1 13 2222 2 2 A 10 Parity See Modbus Communications D 2 Parts Ordering Replacement F 1 Inside Back Cover Password SONG ete Aon edm nti 5 11 A 2 Troubleshooting eese 6 16 PCB Bypass Operator Interface A3 1 13 1 14 7 2 F 4 Bypass Relay Controller A2 1 13 1 14 7 2 F 4 Drive meters 7 2 Drive Gate Drive eoa ovs rete es 7 2 Driye Power ht orm ret eR 7 2 Drive Terminal eese 7 2 7 8 Peripheral Devices AC
50. o 2 m n o o 2 i mi _ UMP FREQ _ w rio 0 ae or rao wowavosmr v 1 9 Les POWER LOSS RT 0 1 SEC 0 1 L2 02 Tao POWERTOSSRT RUN OP MODE b1 02 Fu mworwox Tr Tao Tr rao omwomewo 50 7 1 4 1 1 spo weno OR oT Lu ior wemzwow ORR nr 5 er a rao mor aero tar morepsack for fe PID P GAIN 0 01 b5 02 e i mran om 9 59 a po mom PID MODE SEL Dam DISABLE Fur _ oe prar memnr er 1 Um Fur 0 51 E o a E 4 Ez o i e pete eec Spec owemur s pmo 70 TAO RDPSRAMNUM 71 TAT RD PARAM DAT 72 TAO WRPARAMNUM e omea a a oa o o 1 9 o o ooe Us prar ovrvounr vousm 3 9 L 9 um ar 7 o
51. 3 During serial communication writing if a parameter change is also attempted via the digital operator a BUSY WRITE PROTECTED message will display Parameter change will not be possible from the digital operator until an Enter command is received via the serial communication to finish the serial writing process E A1 03 Initialize Parameters Seng aaa No Initialize factory default 2220 2 Wire Initialize 3330 3 Wire Initialize The Drive can set back to one of three default states via the 1 03 parameter 1 User Initialization 1110 The modified Drive parameters are returned to the values selected as user settings User settings are stored when parameter 2 03 1 Set Defaults 2 2 Wire Initialization 2220 The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs 51 and 52 configured as Forward Run and Reverse Run respectively 3 3 Wire Initialization 3330 The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1 S2 and 55 configured as Run Stop and Forward Reverse respectively After an initialization is performed parameter A1 03 will automatically be set back to 0 Stop Operation switch switch FWD Run Stop NC contact NO contact T Run command 52 run on momentary close 9 REV Run Stop S Stop command SN stop on momentary open Forward reverse command multi function input Sequence input common 2
52. 65 07 Fig 5 13 PI Block Diagram Bypass units are shipped with the parameters in Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 pre established for the configuration ordered To add PI control to a Bypass unit observe the control options that are included in the unit by review of the model number on the nameplate inside of door and external lower right side as well as the option codes and model number description in Chapter 1 Then revise the parameter settings indicated in Table 5 3 and 5 4 for a line of data in Table 5 4 with the same or similar combination of options and sources for the speed and run commands This will add the logic required for PI control to that required for Bypass control Table 5 3 includes parameters that are the same regardless of control options specified while Table 5 4 provides detail on the option dependent parameters Programming 5 22 Table 5 3 PI Control Parameter Settings in Bypass Units SETTING PARAMETER _____ _____ KEYPAD DISPLAY Bypass amp PI Bypass NUMBER ee UNITS DESCRIPTION For Bypass Setting b1 01 SEE TABLE SEETABLE Frequency Reference Selection Selects the Reference Source Terminals 5 4 5 2 speed command input source 1 o NA Mode Selection Enables Pl mode PI Mode Sening PI Mode H1 03 SEE TABLE SEETABLE N A Terminal S5 Function Selection Set for PI Terminal S5 Sel PI Disable Na aul M H1 04 SEE TABLE 4 N A Terminal S6 Function
53. Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier that transported the material Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty After unpacking and inspecting for damage verify that internal wire connections have not come loose during shipment by spot checking wire terminations with a screwdriver or the appropriate tool Bypass unit storage must be in a clean and dry location Maintain the factory packaging and provide covering as needed to pro tect the Bypass unit from construction site dirt water debris and traffic prior to and during construction Bypass Nameplate Information A nameplate is attached to the right side of the enclosure and the inside of the door of each Bypass unit The nameplate shown below is an example for a standard Bypass unit A C INPUT Volts 480 Hz 50 60 Phase 3 Amps 71 6 A C OUTPUT Volts 0 480 Hz 0 60 Phase 3 Amps 65 Serial No 4W033727440 0002 Model No E7BVB065R Type E7 BYPASS W D E7B 00 Inst Manual TM E7 01 CD E7 01 7 YASKAWA Fig 1 1 Bypass Nameplate Example Physical Installation 1 7 B Drive Nameplate Information A nameplate is also attached to the right side of the Drive inside the Bypass enclosure The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive Drive Model Number gt MODEL CIMR E7U2011 SPEC 20111A___ lt Drive Enclosure and INPUT
54. Check motor wiring Check input data especially motor output current and motor rated current value Digital Operator COPY Function Faults These faults can occur occurred during the operator COPY function Fault content is displayed on the operator An error during the COPY function does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output Table 6 5 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults 03 01 was set to 1 to write a parameter PRE P when the Digital Operator was READ IMPOSSIBLE write protected 03 02 0 Set 03 02 to 1 to enable writing parameters with the Digital Operator Repeat the Read Check the Digital Operator cable Replace digital operator low Inverter voltage has been detected RDE An attempted write of a parameter to DATA ERROR EEPROM on the Digital Operator failed 62 5 Replace Digital Operator CPE The Drive product code or software number Use COPY function for the same product ID UNMATCHED is different code and software number VAE The capacity of the Drive being copied and INV UNMATCH the capacity in the Digital Operator are different READ IFE The read data length does not agree Function READ DATA ERROR The write data is incorrect Use COPY function for the same Drive capacity The control method of the Drive being copied and the control method in the Digital Operator are different CYE The parameter written to
55. Communication Connection Terminal 3 Procedure for Setting Up Communication 3 Modbus Function Code Details 7 Reading Holding Register Contents 7 Write In Single Holding Register 06H 7 2 2 8 Write In Several Holding Registers 10H 8 Modbus Data Tables 9 Reference Data n ee ep P b 9 Monitor Data toe pret 10 Modbus Self Diagnosis 14 Metasys Point 22 15 Metasys 2 Analog Input Al Summary 15 Metasys 2 Analog Output AO Summary 16 Metasys 2 Binary Input BI Summary 17 Metasys 2 Binary Output BO Summary 17 Mailbox Function Points 18 APOGEE FLN Point Database 19 APOGEE FLN Point List Summary 19 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Input LAI Summary 22 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Output LAO Summ
56. E1 11 E1 04 Max Voltage 1 05 sees Mid Voltage E1 12 Base Voltage E1 13 Mid Voltage E1 08 Min Voltage E1 10 E109 1 07 E106 ET04 Frequency Min Mid Base Mid Max Freq FreqA Freq FreqB Freq Fig 5 23 Custom V f Pattern Programming Curve Increasing the voltage in the V f pattern increases the available motor torque However when setting a custom V f pattern increase the voltage gradually while monitoring the motor current to prevent Drive faults as a result of motor over excitation e Motor overheating or excessive vibration Table 5 8 is for 240V class units only For 480V class units multiply the voltage values by 2 Table 5 9 V f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 5 to 2 HP for 240V Class bud Factory Setting 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E1 03 V f Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Hz Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A Min Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Mid Output Frequency B Mid Output Voltage B Base Voltage For 480V class units the value is twice that of 240V class units Programming 5 47 Table 5 9 V f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 0 5 to 2 HP for 240V Class Continued Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency A
57. If a speed is commanded that falls within a dead band or Jump Frequency the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just below the dead band and only accelerate past it when the commanded speed rises above the upper end of the dead band for increasing references Similarly the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just above the dead band and only decelerate past it when the command speed falls below the lower end of the dead band for decreasing references Output Frequency User Frequency Reference Fig 5 22 Jump Frequency Characteristics Setting the center point of the dead band with the d3 01 through d3 03 parameters and setting the width of the dead band with parameter d3 04 determines the dead band characteristics The programmer can set up to three Jump Frequencies If multiple Jump Frequencies are programmed the following rule applies 43 01 lt d3 02 43 03 Programming 5 42 44 Sequence B 44 01 MOP Reference Memory 0 Disabled factory default The Drive offers the capacity to change the speed command much the way a Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP would Using programmed digital inputs configured as MOP Increase 1 0 10 MOP Decrease 0 11 the Drive will increase the speed command whenever the MOP Increase input is closed and decrease the speed command whenever the MOP Decrease is closed The speed command will remain constant whenever both inputs are open or closed
58. Open Hand 6E Hand Mode Sel Hand Auto Selection Closed Hand Open Auto 70 Bypass Drv Enbl Same as 6A except a run command is accepted 80 Motor Preheat 2 Closed Enable motor preheat with the current level as set by b2 10 81 EmergOverrideFWD Closed Forward Emergency Override Command 82 EmergOverrideREV Closed Reverse Emergency Override Command Parameters A 14 Table A 1 E7 User Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Deseription Setting Factory Menu No iuc P Range Setting Location E Digital Outputs Sa 0 During RUN 1 Closed when a run command is input or the Drive is outputting voltage 1 Zero Speed Closed when Drive output frequency is less than Fmin E1 09 2 Fref Fout Agree 1 Closed when Drive output speed equals the speed command within the bandwidth of L4 02 Fref Set Agree 1 Closed when the Drive output speed and the speed command are equal to the value in L4 01 within the bandwidth of L4 02 Freq Detect 1 Closed when the Drive output speed is Terminal MI M2 Function less than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis H2 01 Selection determined by L4 02 0 to 3B 0 Programming Term M1 M2 Sel Freq Detect 2 Closed when the Drive output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis determined by L4 02 Inverter Ready Closed when the Drive is not in a fault state and not in program mode DC Bus Undervolt Closed when
59. The line side power cables load side power cables and the control wiring should all be run in a separate conduit Careful attention to this recommended design practice will avoid many potential motor and Drive related problems Table 2 1 Motor Cable Length vs Carrier Frequency C6 02 Motor Cable Length 164 ft 60m maximum 328 ft 100m maximum More than 328 ft 100m Carrier Frequency 15kHz maximum 10kHz maximum See the limitations on carrier frequency based on Drive capacity and model number in Appendix B Electrical Installation 2 4 Grounding B Drive and Motor Ground Wire Landing The Drive ground lug terminal is connected to the enclosure The enclosure ground lug must be connected to earth ground See Figures 2 1 and 2 2 The Drive has a second ground lug to accept the motor ground lead See Figure 2 9 B Ground Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire 1 208 240 VAC Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100 Q 2 480 VAC Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 10 Q 3 Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as large current electrical equipment 4 Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Drive Therefore if the distance between the ground rod and the g
60. Wiring Diagram eese 2 20 Main Menu e ete Be iR 3 8 Ky iet teet mede e E 3 3 coe rete cd etd e Shae i RATE 3 9 esee 5 80 7 1 to 7 12 Master Frequency Reference 2 12 A 9 Terminal Selection 5 63 A 16 Mlaster S lave ace a cat AN RS A 18 D 1 Mechanical Vibration Resonance dust dn EE 1 24 4 6 5 41 5 42 5 47 6 20 A 9 C 4 3 3 3 8 3 0 3 16 4 5 Re db ee Lies tesa 3 9 to 3 15 iv v 1 9 A 18 D 15 to D 18 udi ee de A 23 A 24 Modbus Communications iv 1 9 6 4 A 18 D 2 to D 14 Baud ene etm es 6 10 A 18 D 2 D 4 Parameters ole Ee Ete D 4 Stop zio tr Pi ER D 2 Stopping Method at 00440221 D 4 2 13 2 16 Mode Selection 1 12 3 2 3 4 5 29 5 55 Model Number eese 1 2 to 1 8 C 2 5 84 7 9 A 24 B 2 C 2 Modified Constants Parameters Menu 3 8 3 15 5 83 Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB 2 7 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru sess HR o E RM e 5 64 5 70 A 19 B 3 C 4 MOnDIOE innert ERE 3 2 3 8 A 17 D 10 Configuration sees 2 17 5 75 to 5 78 Parameter 46 202000220 3 10 26 27 Power On Monitor
61. as damper end switches or occupied cycle timers There must be continuity between these terminals in order for the motor to run Switch Selectable Functions The slide switches used to select these functions are located on the relay controller Printed Circuit Board PCB A2 See Figure 1 9 The factory default is for these functions to be de selected Smoke Purge When enabled switch 105 this function allows a contact closure between terminals 17 and 18 of TBI to transfer motor operation to bypass for a maximum capacity smoke control function When in smoke purge mode during emergency fire smoke situations the motor overloads and safety interlock circuit are overridden to shift the priority to protecting people rather than equipment Remote Transfer to Bypass When selected switch 5104 this function allows a contact closure from a BAS between terminals 25 and 26 of TB1 to transfer motor operation from Drive mode to bypass mode This remote tranfer to bypass function overrides the Drive Bypass manual switch Electrical Installation 2 10 Bypass Relay Controller PCB TB1 ON PCB A2 x 66 safety circuit fault 14 Drive fault Bypass Run Closed Run Drive Run Closed Run Motor overload or 5 23 a QZ 20 Control 18 Circuit L Outputs 17 T Customer Provided Control Circuit Inputs and External Devices 7 Remote transfer
62. of the Drive output current rating The ampere value in E2 01 however must always be greater than the No Load Current value in parameter E2 03 or an 2 error will be displayed Programming 5 50 B E2 03 No Load Current Setting Range Model Dependent see appendix B Factory Default Model Dependent Set E2 03 to the motor no load current at rated voltage and rated frequency Consult the motor manufacturer for the proper value if the no load current is not stated on the motor nameplate F6 Com OPT Setup Applies only to the LonWorks option B F6 01 Operation Selection After Communication Error Setting Description 77 Reso Alarm Only factory default If a serial communication option board is attached to the Drive at the 2CN connector the Drive will automatically monitor the card for any type of communication errors F6 01 is applicable no matter whether a run command or speed command is coming via the option board digital operator or terminal input The setting of F6 01 determines whether the communication error is seen as a fault or an alarm If 6 01 3 Alarm Only then the fault output is not energized upon a communication error other settings of F6 01 cause the fault output to energize The setting of F6 01 does not apply to any of the embedded communication protocols used at the RS 485 422 terminals on the removable terminal board See parameters H5 0X B F6 02 Option PCB External Fault
63. using the VERIFY function This VERIFY function should not be confused with the VERIFY that is displayed on the digital operator when viewing the Modified Constants menu To VERIFY the parameter values in the Drive as compared with those stored in the digital operator set 03 01 3 OP lt gt INV VERIFY During the comparing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display VERIFY DATA VERIFYING A successful VERIFY of the parameter values will display VERIFY VERIFY COMPLETE Programming 5 83 If all the parameter values stored in the digital operator do not match those programmed in the Drive the digital operator displays the following VYE VERIFY ERROR The digital operator will not display which parameters did not match only that the verification found discrepancies in some parameter values NOTE In order to properly use the COPY or VERIFY functions the following Drive specifications must be identical between the Drive that the parameters were read from and the Drive that the parameters are to be written to e Model Number e g CIMR E7U2015 e Software Number e g 03011 also known as FLASH ID Yaskawa offers DriveWizard software that can also READ COPY and VERIFY Drive parameter values DriveWizard lists all discrepancies between the Drive and a pre saved parameter file when verifying is performed To use DriveWizard first select 02 15 0 Disabled and se
64. 0023H Frequency reference 01 01 0024H Output frequency U1 02 0025H Output voltage reference U1 06 0026H Output current U1 03 0027H Output power U1 08 0028H Torque reference U1 09 0029H Not used 002AH Not used Communications D 10 Table D 5 Monitor Data Continued Sequence input status Bit 0 Input terminal S1 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Input terminal 52 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Multi function digital input terminal 3 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 3 Multi function digital input terminal 4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 4 Multi function digital input terminal 55 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 5 Multi function digital input terminal 56 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function digital input terminal 57 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 7 to F Not used Drive status Bit 0 Operation Operating Bit 1 Zero speed Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency agree Matched Bit 3 Desired frequency agree Matched Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency gt L4 01 Bit 6 Drive startup completed Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1 Detected Bit 8 Baseblock Drive output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode Not communication 0 Communication Detected Lost Bit D Retrying error 1 Retrying Bit B Overtorque detection 1 1 Bit A Run command mode 1 Not communication 0 Communication 1 1 Bit C Frequency reference lost BitE Error including Modbu
65. 1 RPM Enter the of Motor Poles 40 39999 User Display Parameter 01 03 allows the programmer to change the units in which the speed monitors and some speed parameters are displayed The 01 03 parameter will change the units of the following e Ul1 01 Frequency Reference Monitor e U1 02 Output Frequency Monitor e U1 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start 41 01 through 41 17 Preset Frequency References and Jog Reference The table below details how the setting of 01 03 will affect the way the listed monitors and parameters will be displayed 5 2 through 39 ORPM enter the of motor poles 40 through 39999 Engineering Units The factory default setting 01 03 0 sets the Drive up to display the affected monitors and parameters in terms of hertz Hz If the speeds seem more natural in terms of percentage of maximum set 01 03 1 If the speeds are easier to work with when displaying the equivalent synchronous motor RPM set 01 03 the number of motor poles If another engineered unit such as fpm or gpm is desired set 01 03 xxxx where Digit5 Digit4 Digit3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100 speed Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places in the displayed number IfDigit5 Z0 number format is XXXX IfDigit5 21 number format is XXX X If DigitS 2 number format is XX XX IfDigit5 23 number format is X
66. 1 9 3s rowing rox wem 0 100 Lr mumcop reco 31 9 9 9 9 mumr a o o o o o 5 0 4 9 eom vr ao rarampar __ __ 8 3 e cmsmr vous 1 J 1 ww 1 9 ww s NN WE UNI 20 a 7 ojl CO PID REF COM ERR CD ERROR STATUS Communications D 22 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Output LAO Summary Table D 15 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Analog Output LAO Summary APOGEE FLN to Drive ome 1 2252502008 a se 1 o f o oum smumew o 3 0 recor rer a1 L9 ww er FREQ LOW LIM d2 02 ELTE SE num 5 wro o o o o ofe wz mwe er o omw Wz 54 d3 04 L5 01 H RUN OP MODE booo i b1 02 REF OP MODE 1 01 INPUT REF 1 a 400 eS 5 werarAMNUM 31 wama pope Communications D 23 APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Input LDI Summary Table D 16 APO
67. 11 Digital Operator Display FBL Feedback Loss LL3 Loss of Load Det 1 Flashing OH Heatsnk Overtemp Flashing OH2 Over Heat 2 Flashing OH3 Motor Overheat 1 Flashing Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Description PI Feedback Loss This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss Detection is programmed to fault b5 12 2 and the PI Feedback lt PI Feedback Loss Detection Level b5 13 for the PI Feedback Loss Detection Time b5 14 Loss of Load Detection 1 Drive output current lt L6 02 for more than the time set in L6 03 Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat The temperature of the Drive cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in parameter L8 02 Drive Internal Cooling Fan Drive overheat pre alarm signal is input from a multi function digital input terminal Motor Overheating Alarm The Drive stops or continues operation according to the setting of L1 03 Cause PI Feedback source e g transducer sensor build ing automation signal is not installed correctly or is not working Motor is underloaded Cooling fan s are not working high ambient temperature a heating unit in close proximity to Drive is present An external overheat condition exists connected to one of the multi function input terminals 53 54 55 56 57 Overheating of motor Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 12 Corrective Action Verify Drive is programmed
68. 11 SFS PI control is OFF under the following ON L limit 0 b5 17 Si 1 ower limi f Terminal A1 conditions unction b5 01 0 Upper limit selection b5 21 Pl Setpoint During JOG command input Fmax x109 24 00 r 01 H1 xx 19 and the terminal status is TRE ua MEMOBUS Reg 06H 1 ON o4 55 23 Penoozel PI target value Reg OFh bit 1 r 1 Delay Lower limit 55 22 1 0 Fmax x109 PI Snooze Level Constant 65 19 6520 L G40 anama aig ae b538 V PI Snooze Function caling 1 0 i PI Differential o 9 Sealing Fdbk H3 09 16 Bl Sho cancel XX limit H1 xx 35 Hime b5 04 PI delay time PI Output 1 55 03 55 08 Gain 0 av O ay NIS 1 1 It O0 05 10 e S roportional 2 PI Feedback PI SFS FQ P I1 1 b5 17 ain PI Limit Integral Hold Reset 95 06 PI Output Hc um Fu PI Feedback PI Differential 01 24 1 Fdbk H3 09 16 Scaling PI Differential o b5 20 Fdbk H3 09 16 1 0 Sleep function b5 28 1 o 13 09 16 selection b5 21 PI Snooze Function b5 07 E 0 CR 2 pe eue p Terminal A2 2 PI offset 1 b5 29 ti Oor 1 gt gt Wake Up H3 09 74 x JH 55 24 PI output monitor PI Differential PI Differential Wake Up Level 01 37 Fdbk H3 09 16 H3 09 16 00 2 PI offset 01 53
69. 2 06 BOARD DIP SWITCH SEE SH 3 51 2 OFF 5 M MB DRIVE ue m 6 2 06 9 w E n T 777 o S K2 7 e E e 2 19 SEE 512 e SH 2 m T3 T2 1 T3 INDICATES COMPONENTS NOT SUPPLIED BY YASKAWA MOTOR Electrical Installation 2 22 MOTOR 1 CONTACTOR MOTOR 2 CONTACTOR MOTOR SELECT CONTROL RELAY 2 FORMC RUN STOP CONTROL RELAY 1L1 1 2 F2 CONTROL TRANSFORMER 12 GND 7 z x2 MA Te T 100 xi PRESENT ONLY WITH 350VA OR GREATER RV101 MA CN102A CN102A 100 4 1 2 2 L7 L8 12 01 12 01 5 12 01 12 01 1240 1240 T TO SHEET 2 3 REMOVE THE DAMPER CONTROL AND 120 VOLT POWER OPTION D Bypass RELAY Kidd PCB JUMPER 5101 CN102C e e o 7 tt 09 e K114 5101 1 P e o 1 K125 6 1 9 ollo 19 HUN 20 3 1 DAMPER ELECTRIC lt ZN PNEUMATIC SOLENOID 9 1 5 5 K125 3 2 CN102C 2 olle 5 5 9 5 3 TB NOT USED e 5 K123 21 22 CN102B 1 5 6 1 5 2 120VAC 1PH 60HZ FOR CUSTO
70. 33 A 6 SHIFT RBSETKey eite tret rte tne nn 3 3 Shield Wire Grounding 2 5 2 12 2 14 Shipping Damage seen 1 7 Short Circuit Protection Branch 1 12 Shunt Connector CN15 sees 2 17 A 18 Skip Frequency 4 6 5 42 6 20 6 21 A 9 NIE EE D 2 Sleep Function See PI Function Sleep 5 32 A 6 Smoke 1 11 1 16 3 7 4 8 4 10 Snooze Function See PI Function Snooze 5 35 A 6 Soft Charge Contactor ume e oot A AM LA EL ton eon 6 12 Checking iaceret UPON 6 23 RW IINE 6 9 Preventive 7 3 Soft Charge Resistor CHECKIN Ge ere ees 6 23 Preventive Maintenance sese 7 3 Soft CLA Sel cti n 4 4 avare tar eed A 22 Starts esit etri 7 Software Number 1 10 A 27 SPEC OIN Oe 1 8 Specifications C 1 to C 4 D sIgn retener eed A 25 aio epe EE RO eens C 4 Speed Agreement i tert Pe 5 71 A 15 A 21 Control Accuracy tetro teretes C 4 hd C 4 Speed Command See Frequency Reference 0 I0Vdc tete 2 15 4 6 5 4 24 20 A P tegere 2 15 4 6 5 4 Bic mee 5 41 6 2
71. 4 1 Preset Speeds tte teet oi AEE heel A 8 Preventive Maintenance essere 7 1 Programming Basie uo niente eee hea dees es eoe pese 5 1 to 5 85 Error OPE inrer teme eee 6 13 Men sem nea menie 3 8 to 3 17 Option Dependent Parameters 5 3 to 5 8 PI Control Parameters 5 22 to 5 28 Protective PF nctlOns a ueniet qon C 4 4 Parameters encore ree e Ye EE A 22 PWM Frequency See Carrier Frequency A 8 Q QUICK Setting Menu eee 3 8 3 13 R Ramp to 22 2 5 12 4 Rated Current 4 3 5 50 A 11 B 3 Ready iie o Se Amet 3 2 Reactors Preventive 7 3 Pact 5 82 25 Ready Display nsnm 3 2 Receiving 1 7 REF 3 2 3 4 Reference Limits See Frequency 5 41 6 21 A 9 Reference Selection AUTO nera Arm bee AT e edet 1 12 4 9 HAND zs ate 1 12 4 9 Reference 3 4 5 5 to 5 8 5 11 A 4 Relay Controller PCB 2 7 2 F 4 Relays Digital Output 2 11 2 15 5
72. 5 42 A 9 Troubleshooting eee 6 20 6 21 1 15 1 16 2 9 5 4 5 24 6 2 And Serial eve ipte 1 9 K kVA Auto Tuning in tiere deci 5 85 ener AI NIC 6 13 6 15 Parameters Affected by sss B 3 Selecon e iu etri E RR RR A 24 Em 5 85 Converting from A 25 User Monitor Initialization 5 81 A 25 L Label Control Terminals 1 14 2 8 2 13 2 18 Lamps Indicator 2 13 7 9 4 Modere Rn I 3 2 0 3 7 Language Selection 5 9 A 2 LCD Display cette tret 3 2 5 78 A 24 LED Indicator Charge etre edes 2 13 7 9 C 4 3 2 0 3 7 siente preteen 2 4 6 19 Lights Indicator Cars Css 2 13 7 9 4 shee conse RR 3 2 0 3 7 Line to Line Resistance A 11 B 3 peus 2 22 1 9 5 4 5 24 5 51 7 10 Loss 00 reote rri 5 71 5 72 A 21 M Main Circuit Configuration essere 2 7 2 8 ode 2 2 2 3 Test Procedure 1 6 22 to 6 25 Wire Sizes and 2 3
73. 57 A 15 Remote Transfer to SOE 1 14 1 16 2 10 2 15 4 8 4 10 Removing the Drive sese 7 9 Replacing the 2 ei aN 7 Replacement Parts F 2 to F 4 See Spare Parts Ordering Inside Back Cover RESET KOY tnt teer te ERR Res 3 3 Resistance Motor Line to Line A 11 Resistor Terminating 2 16 2 18 5 5 D 3 Resonance 1 24 4 6 5 41 5 42 5 47 6 20 A 9 C 4 Resources REV Indicator nian 3 4 Reverse 5 15 4 5 15 6 18 4 Ride thru Momentary Power _055 Anca Svar rs Me tetas 5 64 5 70 A 19 B 3 C 4 Right Arrow Key cesset dentis 3 3 5 485 422 2 2 2 00 5 51 11 A 18 D 1 Communication Wiring 2 14 2 16 D 3 Control Circuit Terminals sess 2 16 Parameters 7 224 4040404 A 11 A 18 Terminating Resistance 2 16 2 18 D 3 RTS Control Selection sess A 18 Run Delay tae 5 16 A 4 Run Command During Program see 5 15 A 4 External Troubleshooting esses 6 17 SElECHON siue ate d
74. 700A Bussmann FWH 800A 500V 800A Bussmann FWH 1000A 500 1000A 4300 Ferraz A70P900 4 700V 900A Bussmann FWH 1000A 500 1000A Bussmann FWH 1200A 500V 12004 Denotes letter A through Z Peripheral Devices E 3 General Peripheral Devices The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 Never connect a general LC RC noise filter to the DriveDrive output circuit CAUTION Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to the input or output sides or a surge suppressor to the output side of the Drive When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor never turn it on or off during operation For more details on peripheral devices contact the manufacturer Magnetic Contactor Mount a surge protector on the coil When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive do not exceed one start per hour AC and DC reactor Install a reactor to connect to a power supply transformer of large capacity 600 kVA or more or to improve the power factor on the power supply side 4000 AC or DC Reactor Required amp D 600 AC or DC Reactor Not Required 0 60 400 Fig E 1 Connected Drive kVA Noise filter Use a noise filter exclusively for the
75. Chapter 1 Physical Installation 1 1 Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style 2 2 Enclosure Data 4 Confirmations upon Delivery 7 Bypass Product Optom ecc 9 Bypass Component Descriptions 11 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ccceeeeseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeees 17 Checking and Controlling Installation Site 24 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation 2 1 Termination Configuration Power Wiring 2 CODO WV IA 8 Wiring Diagram kic rp 20 Logic 22 2 3 1 Digital Operator and Control Panel Display 2 2 Drive Main ote a tpe c ose Ge me tais 8 Example of Changing a Parameter 46 16 Chapter 4 Start Up and Operation 1121 4 1 Start Up Introduetlono swicki eto a ha erect ol ea ccc d asain 2 Bypass Start Up PrepatatiOlis ae ele aia Dr 3 Bypass Unit Start Up PrOCOGUEG
76. Drive is programmed at the factory for 5 seconds of DC injection braking at start to stop a rotating motor when switching from BYPASS to DRIVE expect to see this delay each time the Drive is started If the direction of motor rotation is wrong turn the HAND OFF AUTO switch to OFF and turn the Power OFF Wait for the Red CHARGE LED near the Drive power terminals to go out When it does swap the wires in the motor junction box for T1 amp T2 or on the output terminals of the motor OLR S10 Tighten the terminal lugs reapply the power turn to HAND and re check the rotation direction With correct motor rotation press the MONITOR key if necessary to return to the DRIVE Operation menu Using the and DATA ENTER keys manually run the Drive throughout its entire operating range while observing operation If excessive vibration of the driven load is noted at specific input frequencies the Jump Frequency function may be used to eliminate this vibration by programming d3 01 through d3 04 Determine whether the remote speed command is a 0 10 VDC or a 4 20 mA signal The positive side of the signal should be connected to terminal A2 of the Drive terminal strip The COMMON of the remote speed command signal should be connected to terminal AC of the Drive See the connection diagram on page 1 of the Bypass schematic Note The factory default is 4 20 mA to change to 0 to 10 VDC adjust parameter H3 08 to 0 0 10VDC and move Dri
77. Drive rated power 15 Term A1 Level 16 Term A2 Level 18 Mot SEC Current 100 Motor rated secondary current Programming 20 SFS Output 100 max output frequency PI Feedback Not Used PI Input PI Output 100 max output frequency PI Setpoint Auto Mode Fref 100 max output frequency Hand Mode Fref 100 max output frequency PI Feedback 2 NOTE 100 10V DC output AM gain setting H4 05 H4 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10V 0 0 to 50 0 Propran Terminal AM Gain when selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 d 8 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Terminal AM Monitor Selection Terminal AM Sel Parameters A 17 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Setting Bae See Sa FM Analog Outputs a eae Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No H4 06 Terminal AM Bias Setting Terminal AM Bias Terminal FM Signal Level Selection AO Level Select1 Terminal AM Signal Level Selection AO Level Select2 Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10V when selected monitor is at 0 output 0 0 10 VDC 2 4 20 mA 0 0 10 VDC 2 4 20 mA An analog output of 4 20 mA can not be used with the standard terminal board Therefore an optional ter minal board with shunt connector CN15 is needed 110 0 to 110 0 Factory Setting Menu Location a ae Serial Com Setup ia mmc
78. Ferraz A70P50 4 700V 50A Ferraz AS0QS50 4 500V 50A Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A 4015 Ferraz A70P70 4 700V 70 Ferraz AS0QS80 4 500V 80 Bussmann FWH 100B 500V 100A 4018 Ferraz 70 80 4 700V 80A Ferraz 5005100 4 500 100A Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4022 Ferraz 70 80 4 700V 80 Ferraz A50QS 100 4 500 1004 Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4030 Ferraz 70 100 4 700V 100A Ferraz A50QS 125 4 500V 125A Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4037 Ferraz 70 125 4 700V 125A Ferraz A50QS 125 4 500V 125A Bussmann FWH 150B 500V 150A 4045 Ferraz 70 150 4 700V 150A Ferraz A50QS 150 4 500V 1504 Bussmann FWH 175B 500V 175A 4055 Ferraz A70P200 4 700V 200A Ferraz 7005200 4 700 200A Bussmann FWH 200B 500 200A 4075 Ferraz A70P250 4 700V 250A Ferraz 5005250 4 500V 250A Bussmann FWH 250A 500V 250A 4090 Ferraz A70P300 4 700V 300A Ferraz 5005300 4 500 300A Bussmann 170 4611 690V 350A 410 Ferraz 70 350 4 700V 350A Ferraz A50P350 4 500V 350A Bussmann 170 4611 690V 350A 4132 Ferraz 70 400 4 700V 400A Ferraz 70 500 4 700 500A Bussmann 170 5610 690 500 4160 Ferraz 70 450 4 700V 450A Ferraz A70QS700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 600A 500V 600A 4185 Ferraz 70 600 4 700V 600A Ferraz A70QS700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 700A 500V 700A 4220 Ferraz A70P700 4 700V
79. Hand H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control Options S Speed Pot Bypass with PI Control and speed potentiometer for speed control Hand mode speed command from speed potentiometer Auto mode PI Setpoint from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Feedback input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB 1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Terminals b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 6D Auto Mode Sel A terminal S6 input contact opening H O A Auto puts the Drive in Hand S6 must be jumpered to S5 mode to source the PI Setpoint from the Keypad Operator overrides b1 01 A ter minal S6 input contact closure H O A Hand puts the Drive in Auto mode to allow b1 01 to determine the speed command source This input is jumpered to S5 therefore the contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 2 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B
80. L1 S L2 R1 L11 51 21 T1 L31 Control circuits Electrical Installation 2 6 E7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC Table 2 3 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC CIMR 40P4 to 4018 CIMR __ _ 4024 to 4055 1 2 Hp to 30 Hp 40 Hp to 100 Hp Note 012 1 A 5 lt 5 N WIT3 i i i i i i i i i i i Power Control supply circuits Control circuits _ 4075 to 4160 and CIMR __ _ 4185 to 4300 125 Hp to 500 Hp 3 400 200 Control circuits Electrical Installation 2 7 Control Wiring Bypass Field Control Wire Landing The Bypass field control wiring is terminated on the relay control PCB A2 Terminal block TB1 The terminal designations are labeled on the door adjacent to PCB A2 see Figure 2 6 Route the control wiring as shown in Figure 2 5 terminals 1 and 2 are jumpered J1 as the unit is shipped from the factory If a customer supplied series circuit of NC safety devices is to be used this jumper is removed and the safety circuit connected between terminals 1 and 2 terminals 5 and 6 jumpered J2 as the unit is shipped from the factory If customer supplied Drive NO enabling tacts open Drive disab
81. No ETC618120 See Chapter 7 for installation of the optional Terminal Card The function of various shunt connector CN15 configurations is shown in Table 2 8 t ERCITECCEECEH La a E Fig 2 12 Shunt Connector CN15 Location Table 2 8 Shunt Connector CN15 Configuration Options CN15 Analog Output Monitor Configurations Voltage Output 0 10 VDC for terminals FM AC CH1 and AM AC CH2 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals FM AC CH1 and AM AC CH2 E Voltage Output 0 10 VDC for terminals FM AC CH1 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals AM AC CH2 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals FM AC CH1 Voltage Output 0 10 VDC for terminals AM AC CH2 The software configuration for the analog output monitor signal type is listed below Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu Digital operator Display Terminal FM Signal Level H4 07 Selection 2 i 2 i 2 0 Programming AO Level Select Programming Terminal AM Signal Level H4 08 Selection ADDE 0or2 AO Level Select2 Electrical Installation 2 17 Field Wiring Diagram Use these diagrams to document your field wiring We suggest copying this page based on your installation needs TB1 ON PCB A2 5 12 T L3 w T3 25 24 o 1 22 51
82. PC connect a standard CAT 5 Ethernet cable from the PC s RS 232 port with a DB 9 to CAT 5 adaptor to the digital operator keypad port on the Drive Before disconnecting the digital operator keypad from the Drive set parameter 02 06 Oper Detection to O disabled This will allow the Drive to continue running with the digital operator keypad removed Start DriveWizard and setup the PC communications by setting the appropriate communications port and Baud rate Typical settings are Com Port 1 and 9600 Baud Once the communications port is set connect to the Drive by clicking on the pull down menu Inverter and selecting Connect This can also be done by typing Ctrl C on your keyboard or by clicking on the yellow icon resembling two puzzle pieces This will upload all of the current parameters in the Drive to the computer as a working parameter file At this point the parameters can be saved as a backup file if desired DriveWizard is a third method of saving the complete parameter list and user settings In addition to the User Parameters 02 03 and Keypad Copy 03 01 functions discussed in this chapter DriveWizard can be employed to maintain a downloadable list of the Drive parameter set up on a PC for backup or transfer to other drives Auto Tuning is performed by selecting the Auto Tuning function from the Inverter pull down menu DriveWizard will ask you to verify that the motor is in a safe operating condition and
83. PCB is changed the first time the Drive is powered up parameter 02 04 must be set to the appropriate value listed in Table B 1 for the Drive model number After properly setting parameter 02 04 2 wire 3 wire initialization must be performed by setting parameter 1 03 2220 or 1 03 3330 respectively This will automatically program the values of all other parameters listed in Table B 2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating Table B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Voltage Model Number 02 04 Setting Nominal Hp CIMR E7U20P4 CIMR E7U20P7 CIMR E7U21P5 CIMR E7U22P2 CIMR E7U23P7 208 240VAC CIMR E7U25P5 CIMR E7U27P5 CIMR E7U2011 CIMR E7U2015 CIMR E7U2018 CIMR E7U2022 CIMR E7U2030 CIMR E7U2037 CIMR E7U2045 208 230VAC a i CI a px CIMICETUGET CIMR E7UA9P0 Capacity Related Parameters B 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 The factory setting of the following parameters may change when the Drive capacity is changed Table B 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 Parameter Number Name Digital Operator Display b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Energy Save COEF C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection CarrierFreq Sel E2 01 Motor Rated Current Motor Rated FLA E2 03 Motor No Load Current No Load Current E2 05 Motor Resistance Term Resistance 12 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time PwrL Ridethru t 12 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblo
84. PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control Programming 5 26 Options J Serial Communications Bypass with PI Control and serial communication for Setpoint input Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Setpoint input signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant 5 Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 2 Serial Com Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Serial Communication b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 6E Hand Mode Sel A terminal S6 input contact opening H O A Auto puts the Drive in Auto mode S6 must be jumpered to S5 to allow b1 01 to determine the PI Setpoint source A terminal S6 input contact closure H O A Hand puts the Drive in Hand mode to source the speed command from the Keypad Operator overrides b1 01 This input is jumpered to S5 therefore the contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 2 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch 51 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control H5 08 z 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Drive communicates via protocol selected
85. PI Setpoint from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Feedback input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant 2 Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Keypad Operator U1 01 b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control Programming 5 25 Options S Speed Pot Bypass with PI Control and speed potentiometer for speed control and setpoint Hand mode speed command from speed potentiometer Auto mode PI Setpoint from speed potentiometer Auto mode PI Feedback input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Terminals b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A
86. Parameter d4 01 determines whether the last speed command before the Run command was removed is remembered even if the power is cycled to the Drive If d4 01 0 Disabled then when a new Run command is issued the Drive s speed command will be 0 rpm If d4 01 1 Enabled then the speed command will be the last commanded speed before the Run command was removed Programming 5 43 1 V f Pattern B E1 01 Input Voltage Setting Setting Range 155 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 310 0V to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 208 0V 208V Models 240 0V 240V Models 480 0V 480V Models Set the Input Voltage parameter E1 01 to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive i e Overvoltage Stall Prevention etc E1 01 also serves as the Maximum Base Voltage used by the Preset V Hz curves E1 03 0 to D B E1 03 V f Pattern Selection o 9h oe snes 3 mh 4 wmv 6 s s Hs s s Hs s 6 Hrs gt Wh The Drive operates utilizing a set V f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 14 different preset V f patterns to select from with varying voltage profiles saturation levels frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequ
87. Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U T1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U T1 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is OL displayed AII Drives have a Control Power Fuse The fuse is located on either the Power PCB 3PCB or the Gate Drive PCB 3PCB The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching mode power supply 1 Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Control Power Fuse 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse Ifthe fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Output Transistors Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 25 Table 6 6
88. Prevention During Decel Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration Drive Voltage V If L3 01 2 Intelligent the intelligent stall prevention is enabled The active deceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible without causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 04 1 General Purpose Programming 5 66 a Set decel time b Decel time is extended Output Frequency DC Bus Voltage 380 660 760 e TIME Fig 5 32 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Deceleration B L3 05 Stall Prevention Selection During Running Seng Diss Decel Time 1 factory default Dece Time L3 06 Stall Prevention Level During Running Setting Range 3010 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 12096 of Drive rated output current The Stall Prevention During Running function will attempt to avoid a Drive OC fault occurrence while the Drive is operating at a constant speed If L3 05 0 Disabled the Drive may fault if the load increases sufficiently to cause the output current to reach the OC fault level 180 of Drive rated output current If L3 05 1 General Purpose the Drive is outputting a constant speed and the Drive s output current level exceeds the level set by parameter L3 06 for more than 100 ms the Drive will begin to decelerate at the rate s
89. Ride Thru Time L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimun Base Block Time L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Capacity Related Parameters B 4 Table B 4 480VAC Drives Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Drive Model Nominal Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default CIMR _ _ _ Hp for for for for for for for for for for b8 04 C6 02 E2 01 E2 03 E2 05 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L8 02 L8 06 a EZE EH KM ELM s sec WEM 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 9 9 9 Pas Exo 49P0 189 50 15kHz 13 3 3 ee EZA D ERA EZA E NOM 0 C 4045 4055 0 5 Note b8 04 Energy Savings Coefficiant ea 5 0 5 08221 0 E 0 0 2 109 0 gt g gt 0 EE EA 0 1 5 C 0 2 5 C 0 3 5 C 0 4 0 5 5 C 5 0 7 0 8 59 0 8 52C 0 9 S C 1 0 8 C 1 1 5 1 1 59 1 1 5 1 2 1 2 1 3 8 1 5 36 1 7 1 8 0 7 5 9 C 3 33 3 3 3 3 9 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 C6 02 Carrier Frequency E2 01 Motor Rated Current E2 03 Motor No Load Current E2 05 Motor Line to Line Re
90. Terminal Terminal Terminal programmed as Multi programmed as Multi programmed as Jog step Reference 1 step Reference 2 Reference Frequency Reference 1 d1 01 or analog input A1 Determined by b1 01 see page 5 54 Frequency Reference 2 d1 02 or analog input A2 Determined by H3 09 see page 5 54 Frequency Reference 4 d1 04 The Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi step speeds OFF OFF OFF Frequency Reference 3 d1 03 OFF Programming 5 39 As shown in Table 5 6 it is possible to use analog inputs in place of Frequency Reference 1 and Frequency Reference 2 If b1 01 1 Terminals then the analog input A1 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 1 for the first preset speed If b1 01 0 Operator then Frequency Reference 1 will be used If H3 09 2 Aux Reference then the analog input A2 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 2 for the second preset speed If H3 0942 then Frequency Reference 2 will be used IMPORTANT The programming of d1 01 through d1 04 and d1 17 will be affected by the setting of o1 03 The programming of these parameters will be in the units specified by Display Scaling parameter 01 03 Programming 5 40 d2 Reference Speed Command Limits B 02 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 110 0 Factory Default 100 096 B d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 110 0 Factory Default 0 0 The
91. User Parameter 5 User Parameter 6 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 2 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name E s No Digital Operator Display Description recor A2 07 A2 08 A2 09 A2 10 A2 11 A2 12 A2 13 A2 14 A2 15 A2 16 A27 A2 18 Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level User Param 19 A1 01 1 These are the only parameters accessible for the user A2 20 level These parameters are not related to the User Initialize User Param 20 function A2 21 A2 22 A2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 A2 28 2 29 2 30 A2 31 2 32 Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Parameters 3 Parameter No ary DC Braking b2 01 b2 02 b2 03 b2 04 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Run Command Selection Run Source Stopping Method Selection Stopping Method Reverse Operation Selection Reverse Oper Local Remote Run Selection LOC REM RUN Sel Run Command Selection During Program RUN CMD at PRG
92. X 3 DC Bus Reactor Attenuates harmonic distortion by limiting the rate of rise of the input current The bus reactor is wired to the Drive 1 and 2 DC bus terminals to provide the equivalent impedance of a 3 input reactor This option is only used on the low end of the horsepower range where DC bus reactors are not a standard Drive component 25 HP and below 208 VAC 25 HP and below 240 VAC and 30 HP and below 480 VAC Option Z 5 DC Bus Reactor Attenuates harmonic distortion by limiting the rate of rise of the input current The bus reactor is wired to the Drive and DC bus terminals to provide the equivalent impedance of a 5 input reactor This option is only used on the low end of the horsepower range where DC bus reactors are not a standard Drive component 25 HP and below 208 VAC 25 HP and below 240 VAC and 30 HP and below 480 VAC Physical Installation 1 10 Bypass Component Descriptions Bypass Unit Front Control Panel The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Bypass unit is shown in Figures 1 4 through 1 8 YASKAWA MCP q Disconnect E Keypad BYPASS Operator Indicating Lights MOTOR SAFETIES FAULT Selector Switches OFF e TEST NORMAL BYPASS ORIVE MANO AUTO Fig 1 4 E7 Bypass Unit Appearance B Keypad Operator In a Bypass unit the keypad operator is mounted flush with the hinged door of the enclos
93. and Bypass enclosure 3 Are all terminal screws tight Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits 1 Separate control wiring from power motor wiring and other high power lines 2 Separate wiring for control circuit terminals for digital outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals 3 Ifusing an optional external power supply it should be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source 4 Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults Prepare cable ends as shown in Figure 2 10 Connect the shield wire to terminal E G Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment DM Shield sheath Insulation Do not connect here Connect to shield sheath terminal E G at Drive Insulate with tape Fig 2 10 Preparing the Termination of Shielded Twisted Pair Cables Electrical Installation 2 14 Bypass Control Circuit Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2 6 Digital input signals Table 2 6 Bypass Control Circuit Terminals Signal Name Auto Mode run stop command Function Run when CLOSED stopped when OPEN NC Safety Circuit Fault when OPEN BAS Interlock Enable Drive when Closed Smoke Purge Transfer to Bypass when Closed 2 Motor OR Transfer to Motor 2 When
94. and DC reactor 2 E 2 Magnetic 2 Noise 2 Troubleshooting 6 19 Phase Loss Detection eet RUE ep ER TR 6 8 A 22 Phase to Phase 6 7 6 8 Physical Installation See Installation Physical 1 1 PI Function Accel Decel Time eee 5 33 A 6 Block Diagram 5 22 Feedback oos 5 22 to 5 32 6 6 6 11 A 6 Differential 5 61 16 Loss Detection 5 32 A 6 Loss Detection 5 32 A 6 Reference Missing Detection 5 31 A 5 Square Root Activation 5 36 A 6 Integral Limit Setting sss 5 30 A 5 Integral Time Setting sss 5 29 A 5 Maximum Boost 5 36 A 6 Offset Adjustment sese 5 30 A 5 Output ect ie tee refe 5 30 A 5 Gain Setting 5 31 A 5 Level Selection 5 31 A 5 ER nra his 5 30 A 5 Primary Delay Time Constant 5 31 A 5 Square Root Monitor 5 37 A 6 5 22 to 5 37 5 6 Proportional Gain PI 5 29 A 5 Setpolnt 5 22 to 5 28 5 33 6 Boost Setting ei
95. and Setpoint input Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Setpoint input signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator U1 01 b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 S6 must A terminal S5 input contact opening H O A Auto selects serial com for both the be jumpered to S5 run stop command and speed command A terminal 55 input contact closure H O A Hand allows b1 01 to select Keypad Operator as the speed command source This input is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 19 PI Disable A terminal S6 input contact closure disables PI mode This input is jumpered to S5 therefore the contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control H5 08 0 Modbus Option card communicates via modbus protocol Programming 5 28 The analog feedback to the Drive for the PI control is via the A2 terminal The Drive must be programmed H3 09 PI Feedback to use terminal A2 as feedback for the PI functionality of the Drive The PI setpoin
96. can READ all of the parameters in the Drive and store them for later WRITE back to the Drive or into a Drive with the same product code and software number In order to read the parameter values and store them in the digital operator select 03 02 1 Enabled If you attempt to READ the data which overwrites any previously stored data without first setting 03 02 1 Enabled you will get the following error PRE READ IMPOSSIBLE After setting 03 02 1 Enabled it is possible to store parameter values in the digital operator by setting 03 01 1 gt READ A successful READ of the parameter values will display READ READ COMPLETE Programming 5 82 An error may occur while saving the parameter values to the digital operator s memory If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter 03 01 COPY parameter values into a Drive set 03 01 2 gt WRITE During the writing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display COPY OP INV COPYING A successful COPY of the parameter values will display COPY COPY COMPLETE An error may occur while writing the parameter values to the Drive If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter 03 01 It is possible to compare the parameter values stored in the digital operator with the parameter values currently in the Drive by
97. contactor is energized causing the motor to run at full speed directly across the line Off Position No power is applied to the Bypass circuit The Drive input and output contactors are energized and the Drive is stopped run command removed The Off position takes precedence over a serial communication run command Auto Position Drive Mode The Drive input and output contactors are energized The Drive is enabled to receive a run command contact closure and speed input analog signal from a Building Automation System BAS Auto Position Bypass Mode The motor full speed across the line run stop is controlled by a BAS contact closure energizing the Bypass contactor The H O A switch must be in the AUTO position if serial communication is to be used for Drive run stop and speed control B DRIVE BYPASS Selector Switch A two position rotary switch selecting motor operation from the Drive or directly across the line When transferring from Drive operation to Bypass operation the logic circuit will require the Bypass unit to stop the motor before completing the transfer to full speed across the line operation NORMAL TEST Selector Switch A two position rotary switch test position is used to energize the Drive input contactor while operating in the Bypass mode via the HAND or AUTO switch position In Drive mode switching from NORMAL to TEST position will remove the power from the Drive and the motor will stop In Bypass mode the t
98. cooling fan to run for up to 5 minutes factory default after the run command is removed Both parameters are intended to extend fan life while still providing sufficient cooling for proper Drive operation Command OFF OPEN Run ON CLOSED Fes Fan CLOSED TET gt TIME OFF OPEN Fig 5 38 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Timing Diagram B L8 19 Overheat Frequency Reference Reduction Level Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 of maximum frequency Factory Default 20 096 of maximum frequency When the heatsink temperature reaches the OH Pre alarm level L8 02 and the Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection parameter is set for Alarm and Reduce L8 03 4 OH Alarm amp Reduce the L8 19 parameter sets the amount of speed decrease that will be applied to the Speed Command in order to lower the heatsink temperature The decrease in speed will lower the current being switched and conducted by the heat producing output transistors of the Drive Parameter L8 19 is set in percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 Programming 5 74 01 Monitor Configuration B 01 01 User Monitor Selection Setting Range 6 to 53 Factory Default 6 6 Oue Gaciorydefauly 3 OmuBws _ Programming 5 75 B 01 02 Power On Monitor Seg Frequency Reference factory default User Monitor set by 01 01 When the Drive is powered up three monitors are displayed on the digital operator The first and largest monito
99. currents that exceed Drive specifications To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user doing so will void the warranty This product must not be modified Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive and Bypass unit matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power To meet CE directives proper line filters and proper installation are required AWARNING Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed to describe details These must be replaced before operation Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit cards to prevent ESD damage The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power Clear all personnel from the Drive motor and machine area before applying power Secure covers couplings shaft keys and machine loads before energizing the Drive and Bypass unit Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual B Intended Use Drives and Bypass Units are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery For use in the European Union the install
100. fault PI Input Displays the error in the PI regulator U1 36 PI Setpoint PI Input PI Feedback PI Output Displays the output of the PI as a percentage of maximum PI Output frequency E1 04 PI Setpoint Displays the setpoint of the PI regulator U1 38 PI reference PI Setpoint PI bias 01010101010 L1 CRC error 1 Data length error Not used Always 0 Memobus Communication Error Code Parity error Transmit Err 1 Overrun error 1 Fleming error 1 Timeover ale 2 2 2 ut t 3 3 3 3 2 3 Not used Always 0 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Time Displays total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan FAN Elapsed Time Auto Mode Frequency Reference Value AUTO Mode Fref Hand Mode Frequency Reference Displays the frequency reference speed command when in Value hand mode or displays Terminal A2 when differential mode is HAND Mode Fref selected PI Feedback 2 Value 7 53 PI Feedback 2 Displays PI feedback 2 value Units depend on b5 31 setting scaling is set by b5 20 Displays the frequency reference speed command when in auto mode Parameters A 27 Fault Trace List Table A 3 Fault Trace List Fault Trace Current Fault nad Previous Fault ird Frequency Reference at Most Recent Fault U2 03 Frequency Ref U2 04 Output Frequency at Most Recent Fault Output F
101. function digital input and a multi 15 0 0 to function digital output This sets the amount of time between when 3000 0 0 0sec Programming Delay ON Timer the digital input is closed and the digital output is energized Timer Function OFF Delay Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a multi 00 Time function digital output This sets the amount of time the output 30000 0 0sec Programming Delay OFF Timer stays energized after the digital input is opened i PI Control E This parameter enables disables the closed loop PI controller PI Mode Setting 0 Disabled PI Mode 1 Enabled commanded speed becomes PI setpoint 0 1 3 Quick Setting 3 Fref PI b5 02 Proportional Gain Setting vo 0 00 to Sets the proportional gain of the PI controller 25 00 2 00 Quick Setting b5 03 Integral Time Setting Sets the integral time for the PI controller A setting of zero d PII Time disables integral control Quick Setting b5 04 Integral Limit Setting Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator Set as a 0 0 to PI I Limit of fmax 100 0 100 Programming b5 06 PI Output Limit Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PI controller 0 00 to 100 0 Pioprammin PI Limit Set as a of fmax 100 0 M 8 Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PI controller Set as a of fmax The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses Param e
102. has been confirmed The monitor display for C1 02 returns Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Operation menu Control Panel 3 17 Notes Control Panel 18 Chapter 4 start Up and Operation This chapter describes the procedures to prepare for and conduct the E7B Drive and Bypass unit start up Start Up Introductions accidere per rib Dd dg rre ert e Fa 2 Bypass Start Up Preparation 3 Bypass Unit Start Up Procedure 4 Bypass Operation 8 Selector Switch Functions 9 Switch Selectable Functions 2 4442 10 Contact Closure Inputs and Outputs 10 Start Up and Operation 4 1 Start Up Introduction In order to provide you with the most reliable Drive and Bypass unit available and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or reduction of warranty coverage an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start up procedure Please complete the checklist in this document and maintain it in a secured location Should you have a need to contact Yaskawa in the future technical service personnel may request information from this document A CAUTION Procedures within this document assume that start up is being accomplished by a Y
103. is a multi national company with offices and service representation around the world To obtain support always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance E7B Drive Bypass YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Drives Division 16555 W Ryerson Rd New Berlin WI 53151 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 262 782 3418 Internet http www drives com YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Chicago Corporate Headquarters 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 847 887 7310 Internet http www yaskawa com YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION New Pier Takeshiba South Tower 1 16 1 Kaigan Minatoku Tokyo 105 0022 Japan Phone 81 3 5402 4511 Fax 81 3 5402 4580 Internet http www yaskawa co jp YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH Am Kronberger Hang 2 65824 Schwalbach Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 888 301 YEA Document Number TM E7B 01 9 15 2007 Data subject to change without notice Yaskawa Electric America Inc Rev 07 09 YASKAWA
104. keypad as a preset speed This default input contact is closed when H O A Hand Programming 5 5 B Options P Pneumatic Pressure Transducer Bypass with pneumatic input for speed control Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal from the pneumatic transducer or 4 20 mA applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Transducer output is 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 02 0 0 Terminal Al gain 0 0 To insure no stray signal level at this unused terminal H3 09 0 Frequency Bias Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal Al input Terminal A1 is not used therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1 02 keypad as a preset speed default This input contact is closed when H O A Hand Options and 5 Pneumatic Pressure Transducer and Speed Pot Bypass with pneumatic input and speed potentiometer for speed control Hand mode speed command from speed potentiometer Auto mode speed command input signal from the pneumatic transducer or 4 20 mA applied to Drive termi
105. less Frequency Reference Output Frequenc i TIME Fig 5 34 Loss of Frequency Reference Timing Diagram To enable Frequency loss detection set L4 05 1 Enabled of PrevRef If Frequency Reference Loss Detection is enabled and the reference is lost the Drive continues to operate at the speed commanded by parameter L4 06 When the speed command returns the Drive again follows the speed command Setting H2 01 H2 02 Loss of Ref configures a digital output as a Frequency Reference Loss indication only when L4 05 1 Enabled of PrevRef Programming 5 68 L5 Fault Restart m 15 01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts Setting Range 01010 Factory Default 10 B L5 02 Auto Restart Operation Selection EET AE No Fit Relay factory default B 5 03 Maximum Restart Time After Fault Setting Range 0 5 to 600 0 Seconds Factory Default 600 0 Seconds All major faults will cause the Drive to stop For some faults it is possible to configure the Drive to attempt a restart automatically After the fault occurs the Drive baseblocks for L2 03 seconds After the baseblock is removed the Drive checks if a fault condition still exists If no fault condition exists the Drive will attempt to restart the motor If the restart is successful the Drive performs a Speed Search Regardless of the status of b3 01 Speed Search Selection from the set speed command and
106. level for at least the Sleep Delay Time b5 16 the internal Run command returns and the Drive output begins again The b5 16 Delay Time prevents oscillation about the sleep level Note The sleep function can be used even if the P1 function is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled Output Upper Limit d2 01 Sleep 65 15 Speed Command Fig 5 18 Sleep Function Response Programming 5 32 b5 17 PI Accel Decel Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default 0 0 Seconds This is a soft start function that is applied to the PI setpoint analog input Instead of having nearly instantaneous changes in signal levels there is a programmed ramp applied to level changes When changing setpoints the error can be limited by gradually ramping the setpoint through the use of parameter b5 17 b5 18 Setpoint Selection 0 Disabled factory default In order to use parameter b5 19 as the PI Setpoint set parameter b5 18 1 Enabled If b5 18 0 Disabled the PI Setpoint will either be e Modbus Register 06H If Register OFH bit 1 is high e The active speed command i e Determined by the setting of b1 01 See Table 1 Setpoint Options B b5 19 Setpoint Value Setting Range 0 00 to 100 0096 Factory Default 0 0096 Parameter b5 19 is for a PI Setpoint value When b5 18 1 Enabled the value of b5 19 will take precedent over any other PI setpoint unless the Drive is set u
107. measures infinite ohms On Drives without a board mounted contactor press the plunger in and verify that each contact measures zero ohms On Drives without a board mounted contactor release the plunger and verify that the resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that the contactor coil measures about 300 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the con tacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 230VAC contactor coil measures about 175 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil measures about 2 2M ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states The DC bus fuse is located in the negative portion of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse is used to protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short If the DC bus fuse is open at least one of the output transistors has failed When a transistor fails there is a short between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse does not protect the transistors but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a short Never replace the DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors 1 Seta digital multi
108. meer 1 9 5 9 1 SE mEumwumr 9 9 Table 4 5 Communications D 24 Mailbox Function Points Reading a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for reading any Drive parameter 70 Specifies the parameter to be read from 71 Reports the value of the parameter specified in Point 70 When this point is read it retrieves data from the parameter and sends it to the controller Example Entering a value of 387 183 hex in Point 70 specifies Drive parameter B1 04 Reading Point 71 returns the cur rent setting of parameter 1 04 to the controller M Writing to a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for writing to any Drive parameter 72 Specifies the parameter to be written to 73 Entry location of the value to be written to the parameter specified in Point 72 When this point is written to it will write the value to the Drive An enter or accept command does not need to be sent for the data to be taken by the Drive The behavior of the write is the same as with the digital operator If the Drive is running there are a limited number of Drive parameters that can be written to Example Entering a value of 387 183 hex in Point 72 specifies Drive parameter 1 04 Commanding Point 73 to a value of 1 enables the Drive for reverse run Refer to the either the 7 User s Manual or the E7 MODBUS Technical Manual for MODBUS communication set up and con
109. or 4 20mA signal at the analog input will yield a 0 100 speed command span Gain 100 Output Frequency Bias 0 Analog Input Signal Fig 5 24 Output Frequency as Commanded Via Analog Input If a different span of analog input signal is desirable it will be necessary to adjust the gain the bias or both to allow the analog input level to generate the desired frequency command Adjustment of the gain setting will change the speed command that is equivalent to the maximum analog input 10Vdc or 20mA If for instance the gain is increased to 200 then 10Vdc or 20mA will be equivalent to a 200 speed command and 5 VAC or 12mA will be equivalent to a 100 Speed Command Since the Drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter E1 04 0 5Vdc or 4 12mA will now be equivalent to 0 100 speed command span Programming 5 58 Gain 200 1 00 Output Frequency Bias 0 i OV 5V 10V 4mA 12 20mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 25 Output Frequency as Commanded via Analog Input with Increased Gain Setting Adjustment of the bias setting will likewise adjust the speed command that is equivalent to the minimum analog input level 0Vdc If for instance the bias is set to 25 then or 4mA will be equivalent to a 25 speed command Since the minimum speed command is 0 an analog input of 2 5 tol0Vdc or 8 to 20mA will no
110. origin of the Run and speed command between the Drive s Programming 5 54 terminals and the RS 485 422 port and the embedded communication protocols on the removable terminal board When a dig ital input is programmed for the Com Inv Selection function 1 0 6B that input will function as follows Table 5 14 Option Inv Function Input Status Run and Speed Command Source OPEN From the control circuit and analog input terminals CLOSED From Serial Com port R R S and S embedded protocols To switch the command source between the serial communication port and the control circuit terminals be sure to program the following parameters e Set b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection to 1 Terminals e Set b1 02 Run Command Selection to 1 Terminals e Set H1 0x Input Terminal Function Selection to 6B or 6C The Com Inv Sel 2 function will operate the same way except the logic is reversed When a digital input is programmed for the Com Inv Selection function 1 0 that input will function as follows Table 5 15 Option Inv Function Input Status Run and Speed Command Source OPEN From Serial Com port R R S and S embedded protocols CLOSED From the control circuit and analog input terminals IMPORTANT Switching the Reference and Run sources can only be done while the Drive is stopped B Function Auto Mode Sel Setting 6D B Function Hand Mode Sel Setting 6E This effects the speed command
111. replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel B Removing the Drive Cooling Fan Assembly 1 2 3 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly Remove the terminal cover Drive cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Drive Remove the Control PCB bracket if necessary to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board 13 PCB positioned near the top of the Drive Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate Drive board 3PCB positioned at the back of the Drive Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive Remove the cooling fan s from the fan assembly Mounting the Drive Cooling Fan Assembly After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive Air flow direction Fan cover Control PCB bracket Connector Gate driver Fig 7 4 Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure Maintenance 7 7 Removing and Mounting the Drive Control Terminal Card The terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring Always confirm that input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting th
112. resistance 0 20sec Programming 0 20sec Programming 1 00 Programming Torque Compensation This parameter adjusts a filter on the output of the torque Primary Delay Time compensation function Increase to add torque stability decrease to Torq Comp Time improve torque response Carrier Freq Normal Duty Selection 1 Normal Duty 1 C6 01 Normal Duty Sel 2 Normal Duty 2 lorg C4 02 0 to 10000 200ms Programming Programming p kVA Dependent Programming Carrier frequency sets the number of pulses per second of the out put voltage waveform 0 Low Noise Carrier frequency is randomly moduled for lower audible noise 2 0 kHz Coon Cartier Frequeney Selection sgg 4 8 0 kHz Fe 10 0 kHz Fe 12 5 kHz Fe 15 0 kHz Program Determined by the settings of C6 03 thru C6 05 Carrier Frequency Upper C6 03 Limit Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F Opto 15 0 kya Programming kHz Dependent CarrierFreq Max Carrier Frequency Lower C6 04 Limit Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F Programming kHz Dependent CarrierFreq Min Carrier Frequency Fropor Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when C6 05 tional Gain P 6 02 See ey Preset Reference Programming a Digital preset speed command 1 Used when b1 01 0 and when Reference 1 in hand mode Setting units are affected by 01 03
113. sess 1 4 to 1 6 Heatsink Ambient iau tas E eR 1 24 1 25 Bars ete utt ine 5 73 5 74 5 81 Parameters 15 22 25 Replacement need 7 6 7 7 iet ae ER REESE dtu 6 25 40202 2 2 2 00 7 3 Hex to Decimal 4 60000 0 A 30 High Slip Braking eene A 14 A 23 H O A Hand Off Auto Switch 1 11 1 12 4 8 4 9 And Serial com D 1 And Speed Command ees 5 11 ette ettet 4 4 Horsepower And Model 4 1 4 to 1 6 And Unit Weight esee 1 22 1 23 Horsepower Converting to kW sess A 25 Humidity REV ERE 1 24 7 3 Ambient Operating sese C 4 Hunting Prevention RE 23 Troubleshooting 6 20 IGBT Transistor Module Insp cttng net repete pA 7 2 i Rhet etn ep Aes 6 24 INCREASE Key oett eret 3 3 5 79 Troubleshooting eee 6 16 Indicator 2 13 7 9 4 Indicating LEDs 2 13 3 2 to 3 7 Replacing in ecce EHE REN 7 4 Indicators Mode ccececcccceessseceececssseceeeecseseeeees 3 2 to 3 7 Initialization kWh MORnIOE
114. settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 The addition of serial communication to the Drive and Bypass unit after shipment to the job site would be the only reason for changing this parameter See Table 5 2 for the parameter settings required to enable serial communication in the field Sati 73 Operator Digital Preset Speed d1 01 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see Parameter H3 13 Serial Com RS 485 Terminals R R S4 and S Option PCB Option Board connected at 2CN In order to run the Drive and motor with the BYPASS DRIVE switch in the DRIVE position the Drive must receive a Run com mand and a speed command Parameter b1 01 specifies from where the speed command is received when the Drive is in the AUTO mode Switching into the AUTO mode can be done by turning the Hand Off Auto selector switch to AUTO while the Drive is stopped IMPORTANT If a Run command is input to the Drive but no corresponding speed command is input the Run indicator on the digital operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the digital operator will blink Programming 5 11 If you want the Drive to follow the speed command set by the digital operator Use the HAND mode by turning the HAND OFF AUTO selector switch to HAND The speed command can then be entered into the U1 01 monitor parameter in the DRIVE Menu If you want the Drive to follow an AUTO analog speed command Connect a 0 10 VDC s
115. the U1 monitor always displayed on the Sth line 01 08 Selection of the digital operator display Effective only when Jur Programming 3rd Monitor Sel 01 06 1 Sets unit display for the frequency reference parameters and frequency related monitors when 1 03 gt 40 WC InchOfWater PSEIb SqrInch GPM Gallons Min 25 F DegFahrenheit 01 09 CFM Cubic ft Min r nee Frq Display Unit CMH Cubic M Hr LPH Liters Hr LPS Liters Sec Bar Bar Pa Pascals 10 C DegCelsius 11 Mtr Meters Key Selections Local Remote Key Function 02 01 Selection Has no function when HOA operator Part JVOP 162 is connected Local Remote Key Determines if the off key on the digital operator will OFF Key Function During Auto stop the Drive when Drive is operating from external 02 02 Run terminals or serial communications Oper OFF Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Allows storing of current parameter values as a User Initialization Selection at parameter 1 03 0 No Change No user parameter set active User Parameter Default Value 1 Set Defaults Saves current parameter settings as user 2 03 initialization 1 03 now allows selecting lt 1110 gt for 0 Programming User Defaults PREMO user initialization 2 Clear All Clears the currently saved user initialization 1 03 no longer allows selecting lt 1110 gt Sets the kVA of the Drive Enter the number based on Drive Model Use the po
116. the DATA ENTER key before the Drive will begin to accelerate or decelerate to the new set speed This is referred to as MOP Motor Operated Potentiometer type functionality When 02 05 1 Enabled the speed command is stored to memory 5 seconds after the INCREASE or DECREASE keys are released When 02 05 0 Disabled the digital operator INCREASE and DECREASE keys will change the speed command but the Drive will not accelerate or decelerate to the new speed command until the DATA ENTER key is pressed In order to change the Speed Command in the HAND mode U1 01 must be the top monitor and then the ENTER key must be pressed in order to access the Speed Command function This in not to be confused with pressing the ENTER key in order to achieve a change in speed using the INCREASE and DECREASE keys which is the subject of parameter 02 05 Programming 5 79 B 02 06 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected Enabled factory default Leaving 02 06 enabled will cause the Drive to fault when the digital operator is removed even if it s not outputting to the motor The reset key on the digital operator will need to be pressed after reconnecting the digital operator to reset the fault and continue normal operation If 02 06 0 Disabled then the Drive will not fault if the digital operator is disconnected but the Drive will discontinue motor operation If full Drive operation is required while the digi
117. the Drive was COPY ERROR compared with the parameter in the Digital COPY retest Operator and they were different The checksum in the Drive parameter area CSE was compared with the checksum in the SUM CHECK ERROR Digital Operator parameter area and they were different CRE COPY CONTROL UNMATCHED Function Use the COPY function for the same control method Retry the copy Retry Verify function After COPY is retested verify it is retested Verify VYE The set value of the digital operator and the Function VERIFY ERROR Drive do not match Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 16 Drive Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring etc the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up If this occurs use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures If a fault is displayed on the digital operator refer to Fault Detection Table 6 1 If Parameter Cannot Be Set Use the following information if a Drive parameter cannot be set B The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Drive is operating Drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Remove the run command and then set the parameters Parameter write enable is input This occurs when parameter write enable set value 1B is set for a multi function digital input terminal H1 01 to
118. the process variable to the desired setpoint Then the Drive speed may go to maximum Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 19 If the Motor Overheats Take the following steps if the motor overheats B The load is too high If the motor load is too high and the motor is used when the effective torque exceeds the motor s rated torque the motor will overheat Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration deceleration times Also consider increasing the motor size B The ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rating is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within its acceptable range B The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient When the motor is connected to the Drive output Voltage surges are generated by standing waves that can occur with certain combinations of Drive carrier frequency and motor cable length Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Drive s input power supply voltage i e 1200VAC for a 480VAC Be sure to use a motor that can withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage In particular when using a 480VAC Drive use an inverter duty NEMA MGI Parts 30 amp 31 motor Motor
119. there is a need for re initialization of the user parameters re setting to the User Initialization values of the Bypass unit then a User Initialization function should be carried out by selecting 1110 User Initialize in parameter A1 03 This will re establish the drive set up required for the Bypass application and any user parameter values that have been stored The factory parameter settings required to interface with the bypass logic circuit have also been stored in the digital keypad memory If there is a need for re initialization re setting to a known factory starting point for trouble shooting purposes of the Bypass unit then the back up file in the digital keypad memory can be copied to the drive In parameter 03 01 select 2 OP gt INV WRITE to carry out the copy function If Serial Communication is to be employed the following parameter values are essential see also Appendix D Serial Communication Significant Parameters Option Code H5 02 H5 07 H5 08 H5 09 APOGEE FIN Mods 1 0 o tenons 1 13 fo oe Programming 5 3 Table 5 2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings Parameters Effected by Options Specified and Resulting Hand Speed Resulting Auto Speed Settings Drive PCB Command Source Command Signal Options b1 H1 H1 H3 H3 H 4 gt Speed Soe 01 02 03 02 08 09 13 gie ehe ea 0 uetus s l ae 01 02 04 mA
120. timer parameter 02 10 can be used to adjust the time displayed by the U1 40 monitor in the event of fan replacement DRIVE Rdy FAN Elapsed Time Ui 40 152H U1 51 52 33 U1 52 57 60 02 12 Fault Trace Fault History Clear Function Seting 0 Disabled No Effect factory default Fabled The operator can clear the Fault Trace U2 and Fault History logs by setting 02 12 1 Enabled Clearing the Fault Trace and Fault History logs erases all the information B 02 14 kWh User Monitor Initialization Sting 0 Disabled No Change factory default Clea All The kWh monitors U1 29 and U1 30 track the power usage of the Drive and are not reset by powering down the Drive To reset the monitors back to zero set 02 14 1 Clear all Programming 5 81 Digital Operator Copy Function W 03 01 Copy Function Selection The membrane over the Drive keypad also makes the keypad non removable on Bypass units In order to use the keypad copy function on a Bypass unit order a separate keypad part number CDR001115 and obtain locally a standard 5 Ethernet cable Note The copy function is disabled when serial communication is active 0 COPY SELECT factory default OP SINV WRITE B 03 02 Read Allowed Selection Seting Enabled factory default The digital operator has parameter COPY capabilities via built in non volatile memory The digital operator
121. to Bypass input Closed Bypass Option D 2 motor OR motor 1 or motor 2 selection Closed motor 2 120 VAC 1 phase 100VA max output for customer use non fused 120 VAC damper actuator or solenoid air valve 40VA max Smoke purge input Closed purge Bypass Jumper J2 remove to install normally open enabling contacts from BAS or damper end switch Auto mode Run Stop input Closed Run Jumper J1 remove to install normally closed safety device contacts Fig 2 7 Bypass Control Circuit Inputs and Outputs Customer provided contact closure inputs must have a minimum rating of 0 1 amp at 120 VAC Electrical Installation 2 11 Drive Speed Control Circuit Wiring The auto mode speed reference speed command field wiring connection is made directly to Drive terminals A2 signal positive AC signal common and G shield Keep this lead length as short as possible to maintain signal quality Insulated twisted shielded pair wire 2 conductor 18 ga Belden 8760 or equivalent is required Do not run these wires in the same conduits as other AC power or control wires The shield must be connected on this end only stub and isolate the other end The signal employed is 4 to 20 mA with parameter H3 08 set for 2 4 20 mA For 0 to 10 VDC parameter H3 08 is set for 0 0 10 VDC and the E7 control board DIP switch 51 2 must be in the OFF position See Figure 2 11 For remote operation keep the length of th
122. to open the enclosure door Mounting Holes Mounting Holes Fig 1 15 Add on Options Box Physical Installation 1 26 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation This chapter describes wiring and the electrical installation process for a Drive and Bypass unit Termination Configuration Power Wiring 2 Field Wiring Pressure Wire Connector Wire Type Range and Tightnening Torque Specifications 3 Cable Length between Drive and Motor 4 Iple 5 Wire Routing 6 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 240 VAC 7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 8 Control WV IMIG ia cios arte ese debate 9 Bypass Field Control Wire Landing 9 Annunciation Contacts lt 9 Damper Control Circuit ve oae p adn date 10 Building Automation system Run Stop circuit 10 Safety Interlock Circuit 2 4 8 10 Building Automation System Interlock Circuit Drive and Bypass enable input 10 Switch Selectable Functions 2 10 Bypass Relay Controller 11 Drive Spee
123. use of parameters d2 01 and d2 02 places limitations on the speed command that the Drive will accept The parameters are set in units of percentage of the maximum frequency E1 04 and provide limits on any remote speed command input By entering upper or lower frequency limits the Drive programmer can prevent operation of the Drive above or below levels that may cause resonance equipment damage or discomfort see also parameter d3 0X For example limits may be needed to prevent low speed operation of cooling tower fans with gear boxes pumps with pressure dependent seals or AHUs with minimum delivery requirements Internal Speed Command d2 01 i Frequency Reference Upper Limit Operating Range i Fr ncy Reference Lower Limit d2 02 equency Reference Lowe Set Speed Command Note See also the Sleep function in Figure 5 19 for alternate lower limit implementation Fig 5 24 Frequency Reference Upper and Lower Limit Effects on the Speed Command Programming 5 41 d3 Jump Frequencies B d3 01 Jump Frequency 1 d3 02 Jump Frequency 2 d3 03 Jump Frequency 3 Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz Factory Default 0 0 Hz B d3 04 Jump Frequency Width Setting Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz Factory Default 1 0 Hz In order to avoid continuous operation at a speed that causes resonance in driven machinery the Drive can be programmed with jump frequencies that will not allow continued operation within specific frequency ranges
124. w 020 4 w 111 118 12 8 113 1 19 0 14 MOTOR n 5 121 122 61 62 123 e 124 61 162 A1 RC5 m 100 2 MOTOR OR OPTION D asi 04 ast fan 11 20 19 18 17 CN108 120 1 PHASE 100VA MAX POWER FOR CUSTOMER USE CUSTOMER TO PROVIDE FUSING BUSSMANN FNQ R 1 25 IS RECOMMENDED 120VAC DAMPER SOLENOID 40VA MAX CABINET DOOR OPERATOR PANEL PART NUMBER 0001 DRIVE KEYPAD SMOKE PURGE CONTACT CLOSED PURGE MIN RATING 0 1A 120VAC CN203 15 14 18 12 DRIVE 11 10 RUN DRIVE RUN 103 DISABLE ENABLE TOP BOTTOM AUTO TRANSFER TO BYPASS 5104 DISABLE ENABLE TOP BOTTOM REMOTE TRANSFER TO BYPASS 8105 DISABLE ENABLE TOP BOTTOM SMOKE PURGE JUMPER JUMPER MOTOR _ OVERLOAD OR CUSTOMER SAFETIES FAULT FAULT BYPASS
125. when a reverse run command is input AUTO SEQ Lit when set up for remote run command see Table 3 3 AUTO REF Lit when set up for remote speed command see Table 3 3 ALARM Lit when a fault has occurred and flashing when an alarm has occurred B Drive AUTO Sequence SEQ and AUTO Reference REF indicators The Bypass operates differently than a stand alone Drive with regard to these two indicators The Bypass control logic interfaces with the Drive via terminals that would be used in a Drive only installation for the AUTO Sequence Run Command and AUTO Reference Speed Command Since these terminals are active and the appropriate parameters configured for the Bypass unit operation see Tables 5 1 and 5 2 the AUTO Sequence and AUTO Reference LED s will be lit even when the H O A is in HAND position local control providing both the run and speed command from the local control panel The control signals are Local to the Drive and Bypass unit but Remote AUTO from the Drive itself An exception to this rule occurs for the AUTO REF indicator when serial communication is employed Table 3 3 Drive AUTO Sequence SEQ and Auto Reference REF Indicators Analog Input Serial COM Input Remote REF Control Panel 3 4 B Drive Run Indicator The status of the RUN indicator is shown in Table 3 4 when the Drive is either in the Hand or Auto mode Table 3 4 RUN Indicator Blinking Drive is decel
126. will take effect Factory Setting 1 1 1F 3 0 3 1 ms 1 0 Chapter Ref Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 1 Monitoring operation status of the Drive 2 Setting and reading Drive parameters 3 4 Resetting faults Input multi function commands Menu Location Quick Setting Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming An OR operation is performed between the multi function command input from the DDC and the command IMPORTANT input from multi function digital input terminals S3 to 57 Communications D 4 Message Format In Modbus communication the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below The length of the data packets is changed by the command function contents Slave address Function code Error check Fig D 4 Message Format The space between messages must support the following DDC to Drive Drive to DDC DDC to Drive Time Seconds 24 bits long 2 a He ve 24 bits long 5 ms min setting Fig 0 5 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Drive address from 0 to 32 If 0 is selected commands from the master will be broadcast i e the Drive will not return responses Function Code T
127. 0 E7BVA002 E7BBA002 0 5 22 CIMR E7U22P2 003 E7BBA003 0 75 3 2 CIMR E7U22P2 E7BVA004 E7BBA004 1 4 0 CIMR E7U22P2 E7BVA006 E7BBA006 2 6 8 CIMR E7U22P2 009 E7BBA009 3 9 6 CIMR E7U22P2 015 E7BBAOI5 5 15 2 CIMR E7U23P7 240 VAC E7BVA022 E7BBA022 7 5 22 CIMR E7U25P5 E7BVA028 E7BBA028 10 28 CIMR E7U27P5 E7BVA042 E7BBA042 15 42 CIMR E7U2011 E7BVA054 E7BBA054 20 54 CIMR E7U2015 E7BVA068 E7BBA068 25 68 CIMR E7U2018 080 E7BBA080 30 80 CIMR E7U2022 E7BVA104 E7BBA104 40 104 CIMR E7U2030 Physical Installation 1 2 Table 1 1 Bypass Continued Bypass Bypass Base Model Number Continuous Uses Voltage HP Output Basic Drive NEMA 1 223 2 Current Model Number Amps E7BVA130 E7BBA130 50 130 CIMR E7U2037 E7BVA154 E7BBA154 60 154 CIMR E7U2037 E7BVA192 E7BBA192 75 192 CIMR E7U2045 230 VAC E7BVA248 E7BBA248 100 248 CIMR E7U2075 E7BVA312 E7BBA312 125 312 CIMR E7U2075 E7BVA360 E7BBA360 150 360 CIMR E7U2090 001 001 0 5 1 1 CIMR E7U42P2 001 001 0 75 1 6 CIMR E7U42P2 E7BVB002 E7BBB002 1 2 1 CIMR E7U42P2 E7BVB003 E7BBB003 2 3 4 CIMR E7U42P2 E7BVB004 E7BBB004 3 4 8 CIMR E7U42P2 E7BVB007 E7BBB007 5 7 6 CIMR E7U43P7 7 11 7 11 7 5 11 CIMR E7U45P5 E7BVB014 E7BBBO014 10 14 CIMR E7U47P5 E7BVB021 E7BBB021 15 21 CIMR E7U49P0 E7BVB027 E7BBB027 20 27 CIMR E7U4011 480 VAC
128. 0450A D169 50188267 7020550 75 50188275 E7U20750A 0273 50188275 7020900 D343 UCB00006 E7U21100A D396 UCB00006 E7U22P2VA FAL3600311M E7U22P2VA E7U22P2VA E7U22P2VA E7U22P2VA E7U22P2VA E7U23P7VA 7025 5 E7U27PSVA E7U2011VA E7U2015VA E7U2018VA E7U20221A E7U20301A E7U20370A E7U20370A E7U20450A E7U20750A A002 A003 50188255 A004 50188255 N A 50188256 A006 50188256 A009 50188256 015 FAL3603015M 50188250 A022 FAL3605016M 50188251 A028 FAL3605016M 50188251 A042 FAL3610018 50188252 1 FAL3600311M 50188254 2 2 A054 50188252 A06 50188252 A080 50188260 04 50188260 138 2 30 50188267 139 154 5018826 139 192 5018826 111 A248 LAL3640036 50188275 U20900A 40 0 480 FAL3600311M 50188254 0 FAL360031 50188254 002 FAL3600712 50188255 N A FAL3600712M 50188255 B003 FAL3600712M 50188255 M M M A361 MAL3660036M UCB000061 113 M M M 004 FAL3600712 50188255 3 E7U42P2VA E7U42P2VA E7U42P2VA E7U42P2VA E7U42P2VA E7U42P2VA E7U43P7VA B007 50188256 E7U45P5VA FAL3601513M 50188256 7047 5 014 50188250 E7U4011VA B021 50188251 704011 027 50188251 704015 B034 50188251 E7U4018VA 8040 50188252 E7U4030QA 052 50188252 E7U4030QA 8065 50188252 E7U4037QA B077 50188252 E7U4045QA 8096 50188260 E7U4055QA 100 B124 50188267 E7U4055QA B124 50188267 E7U4075QA B156 50188267 E7U40900A 50188267 E7U41100A 200
129. 0A Ferraz A70P600 4 700V 600A Bussmann FWH 600A 500V 600A Ferraz 50 600 4 500V 600A Ferraz A70P700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 700A 500V 700A Denotes letter A through Z Peripheral Devices E 2 Table E 2 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection 400V Series Drive Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2 ModelNo CIMR E7 Model Rating Fuse Mfr Model No Fuse Mfr Model No 40P4 Ferraz A60Q10 2 600V 104 Ferraz 070 6 006 13 700 6 Ferraz A70QS16 14F 690 16 40P7 Ferraz A60Q10 2 600V 104 Ferraz 070 6 006 13 700 6 Ferraz A70QS16 14F 690 16 41P5 Ferraz 60012 2 600V 12A Ferraz 6 900CPGRC14 51 25 690V 25 Ferraz A70QS20 14F 690V 20 42P2 Ferraz 60015 2 600V 15A Ferraz 700525 22 700 25A Ferraz A70QS20 14F 690V 20 43P7 Ferraz A60Q20 2 600V 204 Ferraz 700520 14 700V 20A Ferraz A70QS25 14F 690V 25 44 0 Ferraz 60030 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700532 14 700 32A Ferraz A70QS40 14F 690V 40 45 5 Ferraz 60030 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700532 14 700V 32A Ferraz A70QS40 14F 690V 40 47P5 Ferraz 60030 2 600V 30 Ferraz A70QS40 14F 700 40 49 0 Ferraz 70 50 4 700 50 Ferraz A50QS50 4 500V 50A Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A 4011
130. 0V 0 to 510 0 480V 0 to 255 0 240V 0 to 510 0 0 0VAC Programming 480V Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Setting Factory Range Setting Location Parameter Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Description Motor Setup Motor Rated Current Set to th ior na late full load amps 10 to kVA Motor Rated FLA CE tne eae ote T aono amps 200 Dependent E2 03 No Load Current Sets the magnetizing current of the motor am Programming Motor Line to Line E2 05 Resistance Phase to phase motor resistance normally set by the autotuning 0 000 to 9 8420 Programming routine 65 000 So Resistance Com OPT Setup Quick Setting Sets the stopping method for option PCB communications error BUS fault Active only when a communications option PCB is Operation Selection after installed and when b1 01 or b1 02 3 F6 01 Communication Error 0 Ramp to Stop 0103 Programming Com Bus Fit Sel 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Input Level of External Fault from Communication Option Always detected 56 02 Detected only during run Dort Programming EF0 Detection Stopping Method for Ramp to Stop External Fault from Coast to Stop 50 08 Communication Option Card Fast Stop 00 3 Programming EFO0 Fault Action Alarm Only F6 05 5 TA Display 1 Programmin 100 8192 Drive Rated Current 5 5 Current Unit Sel Parameters A 11 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Paramet
131. 1 9 98 99 eee ms ra mos v xr sw o 1 Hae mourn Hoo mom 7 _ 1 see 1 91 15 1 J Communications D 20 nd Ens SI Units a EUM Units SI Parameter a er 9 31 9 come a oo o ERO coire BISBEE OS sr 0 9 9 CBLIOSTMR __ 1 9 899 31 9 ur oor Ls E RESET RUE E rr av cower 155 Tio MINS MON OFF 9 1 Communications D 21 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Input LAI Summary Table 0 14 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Analog Input LAI Summary Drive to APOGEE FLN Point Drive Number Database Descriptor Units Intercept Default Min Max 5 meum ww wroumr rer foo Em eu erm Rd Baten 9 399 DRIVE KWH lorl 32767 kVA Dep 32767 3 mew 5 ess vor a Lu mormor vous 31 15 RV RATED AMP AMPS 5 59
132. 1 A 9 Loss D et ct10n 4 os Ee arde 5 68 A 21 Selection 1 12 3 4 5 2 5 4 A 4 Setting 5 79 Signal Polarity oce eet 2 12 4 6 Troubleshooting 2 6 17 6 18 Speed Reference Multiple Multi step Speed A 8 Speed Search e deeem ed 5 18 Auto Tuning gente ep tee 5 85 Parameters emn ao atte dente e A 5 Stall Prevention Parameters ase e da ei tae 5 65 A 20 Specifications n pones 4 Troubleshooting 6 18 n eemper rere Red 4 to 4 11 ASSISTANCE eere spans eren Inside Back Cover Benchmark data 51 tm etti 4 7 Preparation for nettes am este e en 4 3 Proced re i t eR RIEN 4 4 STOP Indicator 3 2 3 5 Stopping Method sss 2 10 5 12 A 4 519 has ei ee Pes 5 13 Coast w Timer censerent 5 14 D in to Stop ether epe 5 14 External Fault from OPT 11 Ramp to Stop vs eet aad 5 12 Selection ws oet Petre 5 73 A 22 Storage Temperature 4 Switch Selectable Functions 1 16 4 8 4 10 Switching Carrier Frequency 2 4 A 8 B 3 T Table of Contents eene vii Technical Inside Back Cover Technical Training
133. 12 to 2 15 5 63 Upper Limit eer Rem 5 41 6 21 A 9 Full Load Amps FLA 1 4 4 3 4 6 5 50 A 11 B 3 Fuse Control 2 1 14 4 DC BUS aii taste teret deed C 4 F 2 Drive Input otitis ls as eet eee 1 9 Troubleshooting 6 2 6 8 6 23 to 6 25 FWD Indicatot rere rere reet tr tr 3 4 G Gain Adjustments 4 6 5 58 5 62 A 16 Analog Output 5 31 A 17 PI Outp t onset ree A 6 PI Square Root Rete 5 37 Proportional e et tei 5 29 A 5 Gate Drive PCBs mee 7 2 7 7 Spare F 2 F 3 Rear RED 6 24 6 25 Troubleshooting 6 9 6 12 Ground Fault Functions esses 5 70 6 6 A 22 Ground Fault Interrupter Troubleshooting 5 nie mettere 6 20 Grounding uii eet 2 5 6 6 6 19 7 10 PROCS CHONG C 4 Shield 2 12 2 14 Terminals err 2 2 2 3 2 13 2 15 H HAND Mode sete omn 3 4 5 55 A 14 eene tede 4 8 4 9 POSIOB in arit 1 11 1 12 Speed Command 5 4 5 12 5 24 Hardware Protection Parameters 5 73 A 22 Harmonics And enne 1 10 Mitigation n nere hp iens C 2 C 3 Heat Loss Rejection Data
134. 13 TB1 Label Defining Customer Control Circuit Connection Points TB1 with Terminal Numbers Printed on the PCB Slide Switches for switch selectable functions Auto Transfer Remote Transfer and Smoke Purge are behind this Fig 1 8 Control Terminal Strip ribbon cable connector See Fig 1 9 for details B Contactors The Bypass is a 3 contactor Bypass circuit employing IEC rated contactors in an electrically interlocked arrangement to allow mutually exclusive operation in Drive or Bypass modes To minimize enclosure space requirements they are mounted in a 3 contactor assembly The control logic and soft start characteristic of the Drive limit the Drive input and output contactors to motor FLA current or less For this reason the Drive input and output contactors have lower current ratings than the Bypass contactor The Bypass contactor is exposed to motor inrush current LRA when starting the motor across the line and therefore requires a higher current rating B OverLoad Relay The OverLoad Relay OLR is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel depending on rating just above the Bypass contactor see Figure 1 7 Electrically on the output power side of the Bypass unit the adjustable thermal OLR provides overload protection for the motor in both the Drive and Bypass operating modes The Bypass three phase output power connection to the motor is made to the output terminals of the overload relay The OLR is
135. 198 0 2486 271515 n 200 41100 E7B B240 240 0 264 0 2955 Dimension Drawing 1240 Ibs 5 5525 250 41600 E7B_B302 302 0 3322 4225 1352 Ibs NOT REQUIRED 300 41850 E7B_B361 361 0 397 1 4425 350 41850 E7B_B414 414 0 455 4 4451 400 42200 E7B_B477 477 0 524 7 5099 TBD TBD 450 42200 E7B 515 515 0 566 5 5154 500 43000 E7B B590 590 0 649 0 7329 Note 1 Horsepower rating is based on a standard NEMA B 4 pole motor Note 2 The underscore position in these model numbers codes for the enclosure type V NEMAI NEMA12 FVFF Note 3 Heat loss is the amount of heat dissipated by the drive at full load with all standard options available inside the enclosure Drive heat sink losses are included in the heat loss data Heat loss data is for the enclosure without the add on enclosure Note 4 Height dimension H excludes the mounting screw tabs Depth dimension D excludes MCP disconnect handle Note 5 This data represents the total weight with all possible standard options Weight could be less depending on the options specified Note 6 All standard options are available in this size enclosure except options E RFI Filter and K 5 Output Reactor Options E and K require the add on enclosure Note 7 All options are available in this size enclosure except E RFI Filter R 3 Line Reactor and K 5 Output Reactor Only option E combined with either option R or option K can be installed in the add on enclosure Options R and K tog
136. 2 04 1075 Output Frequency Fig 5 4 DC Injection Braking to Stop IMPORTANT If an overcurrent OC fault occurs during DCInj to Stop lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 until the fault no longer occurs 3 Coast w Timer When the Run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to a stop If a Run command is input before time T Operation Wait Time expires the Drive will not run and the Run command will need to be cycled before operation can occur The time T Operation Wait Time is determined by the output frequency when the Run command is removed and the active deceleration time C1 02 Ignored Run Command 7 ON Run Command CLOSED Deceleration 1 02 OPEN Ax E 100 E v Minimum Drive Output 9 Baseblock Output Frequency Voltage X S Time L2 03 Interrupted 2 6 i Minimum 100 Maximum 0 Output Output Frequency Frequency Timer Value T Output Frequency at Stop Command Input Fig 5 5 Coast to Stop with Timer Programming 5 14 B b1 04 Reverse Operation Sating 0 Reverse Enabled Reverse Disabled factory default ExchgPhs Rev Dsbl For some applications reverse motor rotation is not applicable and may even cause problems e g air handling units pumps etc Setting parameter b1 04 to 1 or 3 will cause the Drive to ignore any inputs
137. 2 2 600V 12A Ferraz A070GRBO006T13 700V 6A Bussmann FWH 20A14F 500V 20A Ferraz A60Q15 2 600V 15A Ferraz A70QS25 22F 700A 25A FWH 20A14F 500V 20 Ferraz A60Q20 2 600V 20A Ferraz 6 900CPGRC14 51 25 690V 25A Bussmann FWH 25A14F 500V 25A Ferraz A60Q30 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700532 14 700A 32A Bussmann FWH 45B 500V 45 Ferraz A50P50 4 500V 50 Ferraz A70QS50 14F 700V 50 Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A Ferraz ASOP80 4 500V 80A Ferraz A50QS70 4 500V 70A Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A Ferraz 50 80 4 500V 80A Ferraz 5005100 4 500V 100A Bussmann FWH 100B 500V 100A Ferraz 50 125 4 500V 125A Ferraz A50QS150 4 500V 150A Bussmann FWH 175B 500V 175A Ferraz 5 150 4 500V 150A Ferraz A50QS175 4 500V 175A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A Ferraz 5 150 4 500V 150A Ferraz 5005200 4 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 2004 Ferraz A50P200 4 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 225B 500V 225A Ferraz A50P250 4 500V 250A Ferraz 3005275 4 300V 275A Bussmann 170 4610 690V 315A Ferraz A50P300 4 500V 300A Ferraz 005350 4 300V 350A Bussmann FWH 350A 500 350A Ferraz 50 350 4 500V 350A Bussmann FWH 400A 500V 400A Bussmann FWH 450A 500V 450A Ferraz A50P450 4 500V 450A Ferraz A070URD33KIO550 700V 550A Bussmann FWH 500A 500V 500A Ferraz 50 600 4 500V 60
138. 4 6 5 50 A 11 B 3 Flash ID autetn ERREUR A 27 Floating Point Control Up Down Control eee 6 13 MOP Increase Decrease A 12 Forward Run Stop 5 10 A 4 Frequency 15 Frequency Output ACCUFaCy uiuis to wins Mel gate RD RE C 4 Command 5 5 5 11 Jump hine See ee 5 42 6 21 A 9 Lower 5 41 9 Max Output eese 5 45 A 10 C 2 Meter Analog Monitor eee A 17 Mid Output ero etre ere A 10 Minimum Output eese 6 17 A 10 Monitor 11 00 A 26 Prohibited 3 ne 5 42 6 21 A 9 Rated tain ite ection C 2 Setting Resolution sese 4 Setting Signal Speed Command C 4 Troubleshooting eene 6 21 Upper Limit sees 5 41 6 21 A 9 Frequency Reference Speed Command Analog Input 2 8 to 2 15 A 4 A 16 Bias eot pp 5 58 A 16 Gall oH EHI 5 58 A 16 Loss 5 68 A 21 Lower ee 5 41 A 9 Preset References 1 thru 4 5 39 5 54 A 8 Setting Method Selection 5 79 A 24 Source 61 01 1 12 3 4 5 2 5 4 A 4 Terminals 5 5 erts 2
139. 4 Sel 11 MOP Decrease Closed Speed Command Decreases Open Speed Command Held Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1 02 must be set to 1 Continued on next page Parameters 12 Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Terminal 55 Function Selection Terminal S5 Sel Forward Jog Closed Drive runs forward at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 Reverse Jog Closed Drive runs in reverse at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 Fault Reset Closed Resets the Drive after the fault and the run command have been removed Fast Stop N O Closed Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Fast Stop N C Closed Normal operation Open Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Timer Function 3 2 wire Input for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 0 to 6E 0 3 wire Used in conjunction with a multi function digital output PI Disable Turns off the PI controller and PI setpoint becomes speed command Program Lockout Closed All parameter settings can be changed Open Only speed command at U1 01 can be changed TrimCtl Increase Closed Increase motor speed by value in d4 02 Open Return to normal speed command Not effective when using 41 01 thru d1 04 as a speed command Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease Trim Ctl Decrease Closed Decrease motor speed by value in d4 02
140. 5 44 Faults Errors 6 7 6 13 Parameters niodo edt Id A 10 Selection aee eot na Mea dandis 5 44 Vibration 4 Voltage Allowable fluctuation 6 9 6 12 C 2 C 3 lp A 10 Drop eet 2 3 Input See Input 22222221 A 10 Maximum Output sese 2 C 3 Rating Drive sees 1 2 C 2 C 3 Related Parameters esee A 10 W Watchdog Timer nne eee 6 5 Weight iere 1 4 to 1 6 1 22 to 1 23 Wire Clamping Torque eee 2 3 2 14 Gauge tenete ER 2 3 2 14 IB rg 2 4 6 19 Ro ting nite bte eee 2 6 y lE 2 3 2 14 Wiring Electrical Installation eese 2 1 Control Circuit ere i 2 9 Diagrams eee ede 2 11 2 20 Distances ac tarte S ue BERR AE 2 4 6 19 Field Diagram ene ete 2 18 Ground iie a QE 2 5 Main Circuit Configurations sese 2 6 2 7 Terminals A E E 2 2 to 2 6 Shielded Twisted Pair Wires 2 14 Three Wire Control esee 5 10 Two Wire Control sese 5 10 Z Zero speed output signal esses A 15 Index 10 Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows Normal M
141. 52 5 53 Hi 01 gt 54 1 02 55 1 03 H2 01 S6 1 04 S7 1 05 9 H2 02 O SN 16 C SC 15 gt SP 14 E G EP V 15 0 20mA 10 T A1 0 10VDC 20k 9 Speed A2 H3 08 EM Command 4 20mA 250 Q 9 0 to 10V 20kQ 6 4 04 9 Terminating Resistance j 4 AC 1100 51 1 R Y R 1 5 D 5 ae Fig 2 13 Field Wiring Diagram Electrical Installation 2 18 Notes Electrical Installation 2 19 Wiring Diagram
142. 5512 8 5513 10 E7U27P51 E7B D030 30 8 339 365 127 15 164 Ibs 15 E7U20111 E7B_D046 462 508 578 208 20 7020151 7 _ 059 594 65 3 653 3 bust E7B 00 40 48 25 63 14 66 5 3 25 E7U20181 E7B_D074 748 823 746 2999 5 m 203 1466 Dimension Drawing 30 E7U20221 E7B_D088 88 0 96 8 939 Dimension Drawing S 5515 S 5514 221 Ibs 307 Ibs 40 E7U20301 E7B_D114 114 0 125 4 1340 50 E7U20370 E7B D143 143 0 1573 1523 847 Ibs 60 E7U20450 E7B_D169 169 0 185 9 1762 84 00 25 63 26 255 943165 75 E7U20550 E7B_D211 211 0 2321 2244 NOT REQUIRED 100 E7U20750 E7B D273 273 0 300 3 3003 Moin 1214 Ibs 125 7020900 E7B D343 343 0 3773 3296 1330 Ibs 150 7021100 E7B D396 396 0 435 6 4029 1423 Ibs Note 1 Horsepower rating is based on a standard NEMA B 4 pole motor Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 The underscore position in these model numbers codes for he enclosure type V NEMAI B NEMA12 FVFF included in the heat loss data Heat loss data is for the enclosure without the add on enclosure Height dimension H excludes the mounting screw tabs Depth dimension D excludes MCP disconnect handle enclosure This data represents the total weight with all possible standard options Weight could be less depending on the options specified Heat loss is the amount of heat diss
143. 6 K 152 4 075 19 o V YASKAWA 43 00 40 48 1092 2 1028 2 E joes H lt HERE 0 75 19 E 5 S ea iaa 23 00 22 33 5 584 2 RECOMMENDED 23 00 CONDUIT 15842 ENTRANCE AREA TOP BOTTOM MIN 450 AND SIDE 8 81 2 37 th ph gh 802 14 66 372 4 3 50 88 9 TOP VIEW DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MM FOR REFERENCE ONLY Fig 1 12 Enclosure 2 for 40HP to 100HP 480 VAC NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 FVFF Enclosures Physical Installation 1 19 Bypass Unit 40 HP to 100 HP 480 VAC 20 HP to 40 HP 208V 240V With Add On Box
144. 6 EN 12 1 24 B n 102 C102 0 NL 0 Lt AG K107 0 NA 0 K108 R103 C108 0 1 WG K109 K117 TB1 TB1 512 111 x MA CN102A K120 TB1 TB1 TB 1 0 NL 0 K110 ZN 3 ale 6 Ar 1 96 17 JUMPER 7 CUSTOMER SAFETY INTERLOCKS elle CN102B Ki21 1 8 3 125 1 AUTO MODE gi JUMPER RUN STOP CONTACT CLOSED RUN M4 CN102B L4n 26 B 7 N 9 4 DAMPER EI SWITCH CLOSED REMOVE JUMPER FOR RUN STOP PB OPTION DAMPER OPEN 6 BAS INTERLOCK ND a Ze R104 C104 K119 Ie CN102C e sue K6 117 118 CN102C R112 K115 11 7 K123 CN102A 112 T 2 eile 5 AF 1 6 6 4 te CN103 CN203 CN206A 13 1 4 81 83 85 A1 2 CN206A 2 CN103 CN203 CN206B 1 12 B2 B4 B6 CN206B 2 CN103 CN203 11 K124 R105 C105 K21 114 2 6 CN102A 118 ZN 5 I K106 2 K124 R116 CN10 CN102A CN203 6 3 8 A1 Nu A2 05204 a 6 0 ollo K110 K2 CN102A 116 G 0 NA 0 K3 ym
145. 6 DRIVE RUN BYPASS RUN DRIVE FAULT MOTOR OVERLOAD OR CUSTOMER SAFETIES FAULT Electrical Installation 2 25 Notes Electrical Installation 2 26 Chapter 3 Control Panel This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Control Panel Digital Operator and Control Panel Display 2 Digital Operator Keys creme it ree ne nens 3 Drive Mode Indicators ie e cepe ertet porn Dig uae 4 Control Panel Indicator Lights 5 Drive Main Menus sic dion tte e Ere be DU 8 Main Menu Structure nieto tendere ern rs 9 DRIVE Operation Mri reiecit ke dert 10 QUICK Quick Setting 13 ADV Programming Menu eese 14 VERIFY Modified Constants Parameters Menu 15 A TUNE Auto Tuning Menu eese 15 Example of Changing a Parameter 16 Control Panel 3 1 Digital Operator and Control Panel Display The various items included on the Digital Operator Display and Control Panel are described below V YASKAWA 6 Menu Display E Frequency Ref See Table 3 12 60 00 2 U1 02 60 00Hz U1 03 10 054 MENU isi Key Descriptions ae See Table 3 1 A See Table 3 2 Ready Display Drive can operate when a drive command i
146. 77 B077 0074 080 8096 KAL36150 150 4 350 kcmil 250 0074 8096 6 4 45 poss A104 Do88 A104 8124 0114 A130 8124 KAL36250 250 4 350 kcmil 250 0114 0143 154 8156 0143 A130 8156 4 210 120 D169 192 8180 0169 154 8180 0211 A248 8240 LAL36400 400 1 x 1 600 kemil 375 0211 A192 8240 0273 8302 2 x 1 250 kcmil 2x375 D273 A248 B302 0343 A312 MAL36600 1 3 310 500 kcmil 1 3 x 300 0343 A312 8361 0396 A360 B414 0396 A360 414 477 MAL36800 800 1 3 310 500 1 3 x 300 8477 8515 8515 8590 8590 CUSTOMER A C MOTOR WIRING BYPASS MODEL NO STANDARD BYPASS OVERLOAD RELAY OR WITH OPTION OVERLOAD RELAYS OR WITH OPTION D CONTACTORS E MFG WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING MFG WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING MFG WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING a PART RANGE TORQUE PART RANGE TORQUE PART RANGE TORQUE 208v 240v 480v NUMBER AWG NUMBER AWG NUMBER AWG 0002 002 001 LR2 D13 18 10 15 182013 18 10 15 LC1 009 18 10 8002 0003 003 Boos LR2D15 18 10 15 0004 004 8004 0007 Ao06 LR2D15 18 10 15 LR2 015 18 10 15 LC1D18 18 8 15 0010 009 0016 A015 8014 0024 022 8021 LR2 015 18 10 15 LR2 015 18 10 15 LC1D25 18 8 15 D030 A028 8027 LR2D25 14 6 15 LR2 015 18 10 15 LC1D32 14 6 20 182035 10 10 75 LR2 D15 18 10 15 LC1 D40 10 3 45 8040 0046 A042 LR2 D35 10
147. 8 Charge Indicator 2 13 C 4 Circuit Breakers E 1 12 And Starts 4 6 4 7 Input Power Connection sss 2 2 2 3 Clearancesssst A an 1 24 1 26 Coast T0 SIOD ter rrt nears 5 12 5 51 5 73 And Damper Control sese 2 10 4 11 18 19 22 Com OPT Setup 5 51 A 11 Communications 5 4 5 12 5 24 5 51 A 18 D 1 55 eee S E 6 4 6 10 OPUOUS lt nitet 1 8 1 9 Parameters A 11 A 18 oret 2 16 COMPONENTS 1 11 3 2 7 2 Conduit Entta nce Are trece 1 17 Recommended Use 2 4 2 12 6 19 Configuration sioe sarete oet 2 1 2 12 2 13 Physical 1 11 1 17 to 1 23 2 2 Connections P nDCtIODS 5 treo ttr re eR RUPEE RR ER PUR PERS 2 15 InSpection eee ree el 1 7 7 2 5d etae itera PERDERE 1 13 2 2 2 11 Preventive Maintenance 7 2 Serial iae D 2 D 3 IZING wis ated e e EROR P RES 2 3 Contact Closure Inputs amp Outputs sss 4 10 Contactors Bypass io rhe its 1 13 1 14 4 4
148. 8 TERMINAL com s n 19 1 21 SPEED BOARD ANALOG REFERENCE 0 10VDC SEQ SEE TABLE 2 SHIELD JUMPER SEE E E sieo NOTES v w 24V n E EG n nc gt OPTION N r OPTION K 3 15 PSI PRESSURE TRANSDUCER ordin zi x c OPTION P S RN k 7 haber or 5 LOAD 4 20MA 777 output L2 2 REACTOR L4 3 145 PSI 3 15 PSI WEE HR PNEUMATIC FOLLOWER vecja s m 2 ls amp ca PART NO wi Ac el OPTION 5 AG SOR ON 8 1 114 121 B 8 I 115 1 20 Bw 1 g 2 MOTOR AND E B SEE o OPTION A FL H ST 4 4 4 ELE B e e m i S10 o oLa 71 olo EB E Re e NS m rol e F o SEE NOTE2 an z a oF e err err e m JUMPER stp r c notes e 5 6 5 n e 510 473 11 a e e e 9 G a 9 e ay aa ay af M su Qd e n sed Ks ON o s 1 o 8 pl m a m lt uno Y E E L2 1 07 2MOTOR 1 1 T2 T2 12 OR 2 TOA2 1 T9 T T3 T T9 OPTION D AC MOTORS AC MOTOR 2 AC MOTOR AC MOTOR 1 AC MOTOR 2 Electrical Installation 2 20 1L1 Fi 12 F2 100
149. 9 RF3 0050 4 5P17 0260 FWH 100B 5P19 0104 1 5101 URX000059 50RB001 URX000059 50RB001 5 620 0141 5P620 0142 UF1000039 _ RF3 0050 4 5P17 0261 FWH 125B 5P19 0105 5P620 0143 5P620 0144 UF1000041 _ RF3 0090 4 UFU000035 FWH 175B 5 19 0105 URX000085 5P620 0143 1000041 _ RF3 0090 4 5 620 0013 UF1000042 _ RF3 0130 4 5P620 0013 RF3 0130 4 5P620 0013 RF3 0130 4 5P620 0147 RF3 0330 4 5P620 0148 RF3 0330 4 5P620 0090 55972 600 99 l gt up Ert N uFvoo0025 FwH saisr uruooos2 70308 1 URxoo0041 2 5620 0109 488003 RL 00204 5 620 0131 NA sero FWH 10A14F UFU000062 70308 1 5P620 0111 9RB003 _ URXO00041 488002 5620 0017 5P620 0132 5P620 0132 5 620 0133 5 620 0133 5P620 0135 UFU000031 FWH 35B 5 19 0104 1BS101 URX000052 25RB003 URxoooo48 18RB003 5 620 0136 5P620 0137 UFU000032 FWH 40B 5 19 0104 URX000053 25RB004 URX000052 25RB003 URX000083 Ri 5P620 0138 5P620 0139 5P620 0142 5P620 0142 5P620 0144 e RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0018 4 RF3 0025 4 RF3 0050 4 RF3 0050 4 RF3 0090 4 RF3 0090 4 RF3 0090 4 RF3 0130 4 5P620 0070 5P620 0146 5P620 0147 5P620 0148 5P620 0090 UFI000044 RF3 0330 4 RF3 0330 4 RF3 0330 4 55972 600 99 55972 600 99 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4
150. A Hand Off Auto TB Terminal Block D B Drive Bypass S10X Slide Switch Number N T Normal Test X Closed Contacts or Enabled DRV FLT Drive Fault Contacts 0 Open Contacts or Disabled Start Up and Operation 4 8 For additional influences on the Drive behavior in Drive operating mode consult Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 These tables explain the settings of Drive parameters required by the Bypass logic Table 5 1 and those that are also dependent upon the control options present on the unit Table 5 2 For Example In the second line of Table 5 2 for a Bypass equipped with no options and switch S1 2 in the off position the hand mode speed command is based on the setting of d1 02 and the auto mode speed command signal is 0 10VDC Selector Switch Functions Operating in HAND position Drive mode The Drive can be operated locally from the control panel by first placing the DRIVE BYPASS switch in DRIVE Then placing the HAND OFF AUTO switch in the HAND position gives the front panel control of the Drive operation Moving the switch to HAND also provides the run command to the Drive When placed into HAND mode the Drive begins running at the hand mode speed command Operating in AUTO position Drive mode The Drive can be operated remotely by placing the DRIVE BYPASS switch in DRIVE Then placing the HAND OFF AUTO switch in the AUTO position gives a remote device BAS or DDC control of the Drive In the AUTO position the Drive
151. As a convenience to the user the Drive will respond to a Run input even when the digital operator is being used to adjust parameters If it is necessary that external Run commands not be recognized while the Drive is being programmed set b1 08 0 Disabled Programming 5 15 B b1 11 Drive Delay Time Setting Setting Range 0 to 600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds If a time is set into parameter b1 11 the Drive will delay executing any run command until the b1 11 time has expired During Drive delay time execution the digital operator will display DDLY Waiting to RUN Both the ALARM and Run indicators will blink while the Drive waits to execute the Run command b2 DC Braking The DC Braking Group contains parameters associated with the DC injection braking feature Parameters involving the starting frequency current level braking time and motor pre heat current level are located here B b2 01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Factory Default 0 5 Hz Parameter b2 01 sets the output frequency where the Drive begins DC Injection during Ramp to stop in order to lock the rotor of the motor and established the end point of the ramp If b2 01 E1 09 Minimum Frequency then DC Injection begins at E1 09 Parameter b2 01 also determines the output frequency that the Drive must be at or below before a Zero Speed condition is considered true This affects any digital output con
152. By turning off the bi directional capability the speed search will only try to match the speed in the last known direction Programming 5 21 b5 PI Function The capability to accept an analog signal as feedback for a PI Proportional Integral control function is built into the Drive Speed Command PI Setpoint D1 04 pos ee Frequency Reference _ a SR p Siep tunon D1 02 2 selection b5 21 51201 1 D536 RUN 4 0 E Delay on off D1 01 Frequency reference b5 01 0 Timer Enable Disabl ti 515 3 nable Disable reverse operation Option Card I 93 when PI output is negative Sleep Level i Scalin Sleep Function Serial Com oe PI SFS cancel 9 b5 0123 T 1 34 01 03 pper limit 109 2 i n b5 01 1 OFF v 0 o PI Differential Output Fdbk H3 09 16 Le N 90 gt o gt O gt gt frequency PISFS at 5
153. CATES COMPONENTS NOT SUPPLIED BY YASKAWA INDICATES CUSTOMER WIRING SEE SHEET 2 FOR NOTES AND TABLES Logic Diagram L1 POM o 1 4 FROM 12 pu 12 CUSTOMERS A s TA A C LINES L3 113 3 6 GND Lue f 777 EARTH GROUND E 4 d amp K110 K116 K119 L1 L2 L3 81 102 AF 8 6 m 5 3 5 5 qa 6 BYPASS DRIVE 51 ENABLE A1 SEQ COM 5 JUMPER E NSP MANUAL SPEED POT OPTION S MAX SPEED TRIM R2 FAULTRESET S4 CN103 1 e CN204 CN203 20 CN102C Ri EAE MANUAL 1 HAND AUTO ss aad SPEED 2 CN204 CN208 21 CN102C MANUAL REF IN 7 e 117 M 1 0 010 0 2 CN103 13 20k ohm 2 5K OL 3 CN204 CN203 22 CN102C SN CN102B AC ANALOG COM SN 3 14 8 RY1 M1 B 1 2 10 STANDARD AUTO MODE DRIVE SPEED REFERENCE INPUT M2 OMADE RUNNING 2 L2 2 10 f RY2 WITH PARAMETER AUTO REF IN M3 H3 08 1 2 ASSETBY M3 gt L3 2 18 PARAMETER H3 08 54 ISOLATED 4 SERIAL 4 SHOWN AUTOMODE _ AC ANALOG COM MEME M4 L4 2 18 IN CONTROL WITH RELAY LOGIC REFERENCE PARAMETER RY3 CIRCUIT H3 08 0 AND SHIELD G 733 CONTROL G Shep 1 5
154. Cannot Set 17 If the Motor Does Not Operate 18 The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed 19 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow 4 22 19 If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command 19 If the Motor Overheats 20 If Peripheral Devices Like PLCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or Running Drive 2 20 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive IS RUM 21 If There is Mechanical Vibration 21 If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped 22 If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started or Stalls 22 If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User Speed Command 22 Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure 23 Drive Date Stamp Information 2 27 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 1 Bypass Diagnostics Troubleshooting the Bypass Printed Circuit Boards In order to check the two circuit boards PCB A2 and A3 on the schematic diagram in Chapter 2 based on the following table it is assumed that they are assembled and wired in the unit and all the Bypass functions were wo
155. Closed Remote Transfer Transfer to Bypass when Closed Signal Level Dry Contacts Analog input signals Drive 15 VDC power supply 15 VDC power supply for analog Transmitters 15 VDC Max current 20 mA Analog Input or Speed Command 0 to 10 VDC 100 0 to 10 V 20 Multi function analog input Function set by H3 09 4 to 20 mA 100 0 to 10 VDC 100 H3 08 4 to 20 mA 250Q 0 to 10 V 20kQ Analog input common Shield wire optional ground line connection point Digital output signals Running on Drive Running on Bypass CLOSED During Operation Drive Fault 11 12 CLOSED During Fault Condition 12 13 OPEN During Fault Condition Motor Overload or Safety Circuit Fault 14 15 OPEN During Fault Condition 15 16 CLOSED During Fault Condition Dry contacts Contact capacity 1 A max at 250 VAC 1 A max at 30 VDC Analog output signals Drive FM Multi function analog output Multi function Frequency Output analog monitor 1 0 to 10 VDC 100 frequency Function set by H4 01 AC Analog output common AM Multi function analog output Multi function Current Monitor analog monitor 2 0 to 10 VAC 100 Drive s rated current Function set by H4 04 0 to 10 VDC max 5 2 mA max Switch Selectable Options Electrical Installation 2 15 Table 2 6 Bypass Contr
156. Cooling Fan 02 10 Operation Time Setting Fan ON Time Set Fault Trace Fault History Clear Function FLT Trace Init kWh User Monitor U1 29 02 14 Initialization kWh MonitorClear 2 15 Hand Key Function Selection Oper Hand Key 03 01 Copy Function Selection Copy Function Sel 03 02 Read Allowed Selection Read Allowable Motor Rated Power 1102 Mtr Rated Power Motor ene Current T1204 Rated ene Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed timer 02 07 0 Power On Time Time accumulates whenever Drive is powered 1 Running Time Time accumulates only when Drive is running Determines parameter values after a drive initialization A1 03 is executed This should always be set to 1 American Spec 1 American spec WARNING Parameter 02 09 should always be set to 1 American Spec Do not set This parameter does not normally require adjustment Possible damage to equipment or injury may occur if this setting is changed from 1 American Spec 02 09 is a macro parameter that can change the default values of terminal I O and many other parameters in the drive Consult the Yaskawa fac tory for details This parameter is not available in software versions gt 4010 Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time Clears the fault memory contained in the U2 and U3 monitors 0 Disabled no effect 1 Enabled resets U2 an
157. Detection Selection 00 ___ Always Detected factory default Detected only during operation B F6 03 Option PCB External Fault Stopping Method 0 Rampre Sop Coast to Stop factory default Alum Only If an external fault is received from the LonWorks or other communication option card the settings of F6 02 and F6 03 will determine the Drive operation in reaction to the fault signal Parameter F6 02 will determine if the external fault is always recognized F6 02 0 Always Detected or only recognized when the Run command is active F6 02 1 Detected only during operation Once the fault is recognized parameter F6 03 will determine the operation of the Drive If parameter F6 03 is set to anything other then 3 the Drive will fault and a stopping sequence is begun If F6 03 3 Alarm Only then the external fault is treated like an alarm Operation will continue and an EFO fault will flash on the digital operator Programming 5 51 B F6 05 Current Scaling via Communication Option PCB 0 ___ A Display factory default 100 8192 Drive Rated Current A communication option card can read the Drive s DPRAM to access the current monitor The format of the current reading in the DPRAM will be determined by parameter F6 05 6 05 0 A Display gt Current is a decimal number corresponding to actual Amperes F6 05 1 100 8192 Drive Rated Current gt Current reading i
158. Drive Delay Time Setting Wait to Run Time Hand Frequency Reference Selection HAND Fref Source HAND AUTO During Run Selection HAND AUTO Run Emergency Override Speed E Override Speed Emergency Override Reference Selection E OverrideRefSel DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DCInj Start Freq DC Injection Braking Current DCInj Current DC Injection Braking Time at Start DCInj Time Start DC Injection Braking Time at Stop DCInj Time Stop Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Sequence Selects the speed command frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S4 and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects the run command input source 0 Operator Hand and Off keys on digital operator 1 Terminals Contact Closure on Terminal S1 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 3 Coast w Timer A new run command is ignored if input before the time in C1 02 expires Determines the forward rotation of the motor and if reverse operation is disabled 0 Reverse Enabled Reverse Disabled Exchange Phase Change direction of forward motor rotation Ex
159. Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction Peripheral Devices E 4 Appendix F Replacement Parts This appendix lists the primary parts that may be needed to maintain or service the Drive and Bypass unit Bypass Replacement 2 Note Part numbers listed in Appendix F are for units being produced at the date of publication When purchasing replacement parts confirm with Yaskawa Customer Service Center 800 927 5297 that part numbers ordered are compatible with the Drive or Bypass unit serial numbers specific to the installation Bypass Replacement Parts F 1 Bypass Replacement Parts Table F 3 Bypass Replacement Parts Drive NEC MAIN P N NOM SQ D YASK SQ D VOLTS CIMR HP PART PART P N K1 NO NO LC1 o5 Do 50188255 D003 50188255 1 Do FAL3600712M 50188255 E7U22P2VA N A 50188256 E7U22P2VA 2 nov 50188256 E7U22P2VA D010 50188256 E7U22P2VA E7U22P2VA E7U22P2VA E7U23P7VA D016 FAL3603015M 50188250 E7U27P5VA D024 FAL3605016M 50188251 E7U27P5VA D030 FAL3605016M 50188251 E7U2011VA D046 FAL3610018M 50188252 702015 20 Dos FAL3610018M 50188252 E7U2018VA 25 KAL3615026M 5018826 E7U20221A 30 Doss KAL3615026M 50188260 E7U20301A 9 KAL3625032M 50188267 E7U20301A 4 KAL3625032M 5018826 5 Du KAL3625032M 50188267 E7U20370A E7U2
160. DriveWizard 2 002222 1v v 3 15 5 85 E usd ies ete eei 6 4 6 13 D 12 Elapsed Time MO nit tes itat ettet 3 12 5 80 5 81 24 25 A 27 to A 29 Electrical 2 1 Enable 5 53 6 10 A 14 Drive Bypass Run 1 15 2 10 2 15 4 8 4 10 Energy SAVING oieee 7 25 RE ER II EG 5 29 A 5 Serial Communication 1 9 A 18 D 4 Speed Command Loss Detection 5 68 A 21 Speed Search bestes em 5 18 A 5 Enclosure eee Romo 1 4 1 26 2 6 DrawIngs tiere een 1 17 to 1 21 1 2 1 8 4 Energy Saving Parameters etas Stem tet ae te Besse A 7 B 3 Predictor Software eterne SELECT OM o sr ein eue tri eue 5 37 1 24 1 25 6 19 7 3 4 5 3 3 Exterior Dimensions 1 17 to 1 23 External Fault EF 5 51 6 6 6 10 A 14 F Factory Repair usate ete iere 6 3 Fan Heatsink Cooling Bypass Replacement F 4 Checking ette ete ene 6 25 Cumulative Operation Time Setting
161. E7BVB034 E7BBB034 25 34 CIMR E7U4015 E7BVB040 E7BBB040 30 40 CIMR E7U4018 E7BVB052 E7BBB052 40 52 CIMR E7U4024 E7BVB065 E7BBB065 50 65 CIMR E7U4030 077 E7BBB077 60 TT CIMR E7U4037 E7BVB096 E7BBB096 75 96 CIMR E7U4045 E7BVB124 E7BBB124 100 124 CIMR E7U4055 E7BVB156 7 156 125 156 CIMR E7U4075 E7BVB180 E7BBB180 150 180 CIMR E7U4090 E7BVB240 E7BBB240 200 240 CIMR E7U4110 E7BVB302 E7BBB302 250 302 CIMR E7U4160 The Nema 12 FVFF Enclosure is ventilated and filtered with gaskets UL does not recognize NEMA 12 ventilated enclosures therefore for UL purposes these units are designated NEMA 1 Physical Installation 1 3 Enclosure Data Table 1 2 208V Enclosure Data i 4 ight Input 1 Drive Bypass NEC OL Heat Enclosure Dimensions Weight ocu AE Wane Model Model Sia 110 Loss NEMA 1 amp NEMA 12 FVFF of B Peor Schematic CIMR Number 1 min Watts H w D Assembly inches inches Box 0 5 E7U22P21 E7B_D002 24 2 6 68 0 75 E7U22P21 E7B_D003 3 5 3 8 68 1 E7U22P21 E7B D004 4 6 5 1 78 29 48 19 06 13 66 43 35 19 06 13 66 2 E7U22P21 E7B D007 7 5 8 2 110 115 Ibs 156 Ibs 3 E7U22P21 E7B D010 10 6 17 141 5 E7U23P71 E7B D016 167 184 202 Dimension Drawing Dimension Drawing 7 5 E7U27P51 E7B_D024 242 266 273 5
162. END PI Output Reverse Selection 0 0 limit when PI output goes negative Drive stops b5 11 Output Rev Sel 1 Reverse when PI goes negative Drive reverses 1 Programming Y 0 limit automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1 04 0 0 PI Feedback Reference 0 Disabled b5 12 Missing Detection Selection 1 Alarm 0to2 0 Programming Fb los Det Sel 2 Fault 0 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Sets the PI feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds 0 0 to 25 5 1 0sec Programming Fb los Det Time Sleep Function Start Level Sets the sleep function start frequency 0 0 to 200 0 0 0Hz Programming Sleep Level Sleep Delay Time 8 NET 8 6 i Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds 0 0 to 25 5 0 0sec Programming Sleep Time PI Accel Decel Time Applies an accel decel time to the PI setpoint reference 0 0 to 25 5 0 0sec PI Setpoint Selection 0 Disabled Vorl Progra PI Setpoint Sel 1 Enabled 91 nee PI Setpoint Value y 0 00 to PI Setpoint Depends on b5 20 100 00 0 0096 PI Setpoint Display Scaling Set display setting unit of b5 19 U1 24 and U1 38 0 to 39999 Programming Setpoint Scaling Input Source Selection for Sleep function Mode PI Sleep Input Source 0 PI Setpoint PI Sleep Source 1 PI Input Programming 2 Snooze PI Snooze Level Sets the PI snooze function start level as a percentage of maximum Snooze Level frequency 1 04 EM PL Snooze Delay Time Sets the
163. ER RELAY 2 FORMA 2 FORMA REMOTE TRANSFER RELAY L7 1 06 L8 1 06 SMOKE PURGE S105 TOP BOTTOM K117 1 1 DISABLE ENABLE i SMOKEB BGE 9 q 2 17 18 C110 7 8 SMOKE PURGE 2 FORM A FACTORY SETTING CONTACT KE IS DISABLE CLOSED PURGE Cw 09 8 1 FORMA CN103 R122 10 08206 SMOKE PURGE 1 2 BYPASS BYPASS DRIVE CONTROL RELAY 183 gag IRA R117 c2 7 8 4 FORMA NORMALLY OPEN NO L1 3 D FORM HAND OFF auto ig K120 AUTO MODE e o LC gogo 144 R118 C113 7 8 CONTROL RELAY 2 FORM A NORMALLY OPEN NO LH 6 HAND OFF auro 48 K121 HAND MODE o R39 1 4 R119 C114 0 8 CONTROL RELAY 2 FORM A NORMALLY OPEN NO 1 A Jat TEST NORMAL e e 1 FORMA x K123 750 TEST NORMAL 183 IRA R121 C116 7 8 CONTROL RELAY NORMALLY OPEN BYPASS RELAY PCB UTC000036 CONNECTORS 2 FORMA 1 2 K124 0 1 FORM C OPERATOR PCB UTC000037 2 CONNECTORS TB1 CUSTOMER CONNECTION POINT ON 26 POINT 1 PIECE PHOENIX a CONNECTOR TORQUE WIRE CONNECTIONS TO 4 4 POUND INCH CN102A Z N 8POINT MOLEX HEADER n USED TO CONNECT THE PANEL HARNESS TO THE BYPASS RELAY PCB CN102B CZ N
164. GEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Digital Input LDI Summary rU to TOi FLN Point Rn Off 0 On 1 MINORFLT X FLT NOFLT FLT FAULT 01 12 Bit U1 12 Bit 6 ae L7 erm 3 3 5 3 2 serie su L mese 3 553 121 3189 oer 444 DRIVE READY ZERO SPEED ELT 5 1237 o 1 sore READY OTA o o Ls 9 oe Une BARDES E a L 5 pem mue L3 3 1 3 1 3 13 1 9m T 9N Tres HND AUTO MON MULTI OUT 1 MULTI OUT 2 MULTI OUT 3 SAFETY ILOCK Hung 40 4 5 MF IN 1 MON 59 93 97 MF IN MF IN 3 MON IN 4 MON m m APOGEE Logical Digital Output LDO Summary Table D 17 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Digital Output LDO Summary i WF to E7 Point Off 0 On 1 m obmo Lor mv aero arf 5 1 9 o o 3 mw wm s oxa 1 9 9 9 1 9 Pence 5 9 5 ea 31 9 7 9 9 31 9 73 7 ws 9 7 wes o 3 wms 31 912 98 e mowoxs 1 9 o cowmrew 1 9 ENABLE _ 155
165. Gas Oil Mist Abnormal vibration or noise AC Power Supply Main circuit amp control voltage Loose lugs screws amp wires Hot spots on parts Corrosion Bent conductors Breakage cracking or discoloration Check spacing AC Power Circuit amp Terminal Blocks Loose damaged Devices Leakage DC Bus Capacitors Ruptures broken expansion Capacitance amp insulation resistance Noisy Relays amp Contactors Contact discoloration Cracked Soft Charge Resistors Discoloration Speed reference voltage current Control Circuits Operation I O contact operation Relay logic Abnormal fan noise Cooling System Cooling Fans Fins amp Heatsink Loose connectors Free of accumulation Yearly General Conductors amp Wire Connections LEDs Monitor display values Key and selector switch functionality Clean Keypad Front Panel Digital Operator and Display Front Panel vey 8 Morne Ean X X X X NE NE m X X X X X X eal oe X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X If the Drive is used under the following conditions it may be necessary to inspect more often e High ambient temperatures humidity or altitudes above 3 300 feet e Frequent starting and stopping e Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load e Excessive vibration and or shock loading e Poor environment including dust metal particles salt sulfuric acid and chlorine Maintenance 7 3 Replacing Control Panel i
166. H1 05 If the parameter write enable input is OFF the parameters cannot be changed Turn it ON and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting numbers are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Enter the correct password in A1 04 If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Shift Reset Key and the MENU Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter A1 04 B OPEO1 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to Operator Programming Errors in this chapter and correct the setting B CPFOO or is displayed This is a Digital Operator communications error The connection between the Digital Operator and the Drive may be faulty Remove the Digital Operator and then reinstall it Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 17 If the Motor Does Not Operate Use the following information if the motor does not operate B Ensure the digital operator is securely connected to the Drive B The motor does not operate when the HAND key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible The Speed Command Frequency Reference is too low If the Speed Command frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive
167. HAND OFF AUTO switch to HAND The DRIVE RUN LED will turn ON and the Drive will ramp up to 6 HZ Verify that motor rotation is correct Note In Bypass packages the Drive is programmed at the factory for 5 seconds of DC injection braking at start to stop a rotating motor when switching from BYPASS to DRIVE expect to see this delay each time the Drive is started If the direction of motor rotation is wrong turn the HAND OFF AUTO switch to OFF and turn the Power OFF Wait for the Red CHARGE LED near the Drive power terminals to go out When it does swap the wires in the motor junction box for 1 amp T2 or on the output terminals of the motor OLR S10 Tighten the terminal lugs reapply the power turn to HAND and re check the rotation direction Start Up and Operation 4 5 10 11 12 If a Speed Potentiometer option is present turn the Speed Potentiometer fully counterclockwise to ensure that the local speed command is zero If necessary press the MONITOR key to return to the DRIVE Operation menu The AUTO SEQ and REF LEDs and the STOP and CONTROL POWER ON LEDs on the control panel should be ON at this time To start the motor in Drive mode move the HAND OFF AUTO switch to HAND then rotate the Speed Potentio meter clockwise to establish a speed command in the 6 to 10 Hz range The DRIVE RUN LED will turn ON and the Drive will ramp up to this setting Verify that motor rotation is correct Note In Bypass packages the
168. IEW DIMENSIONS INCHES FOR REFERENCE ONLY Fig 1 13 Enclosure 2 with Options Extension for up to 40HP to 75HP 480 VAC NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 FVFF Enclosures Physical Installation 1 20 Bypass Unit 125 HP to 250 HP 480 VAC 50 HP to 125 HP 208V Q 0 9 0 15 00 381 CIRCUIT BREAKER HANDLE LOCATION 42 00 1066 8 37 75 958 8 MIN SPACE REQ D TO OPEN DOOR 35 50 901 7 1 I 3 00 76 2 20 00 13 00 508 TE 330 2 4 PLS NJ 405 100 2014 1400 25 4 25 4 1 38 L 35 00 xl 35 1 889 THIS DIMENSION IS 23 50 IF FRAME CIRCUIT BREAKER IS USED EYEBOLTS ARE REMOVABLE 10 00 254 1 1 i D lt 84 00 2133 6 i X 170 43 2 1 20 00 508 RECOMMENDED CONDUIT ENTRANCE AREA TOP AND BOTTOM COVER PLATE 5 00 127 12 00 304 8 TOP VIEW 3 00 76 2 FOR BOTTOM CONDUIT ENT
169. IVE BYPASS switch is in the DRIVE position HAND OFF AUTO switch is in the OFF position NORMAL TEST switch is in the NORMAL position Note If the TEST position is selected while the DRIVE BYPASS switch is in the DRIVE position the fault code UV DC Bus Undervolt will be briefly displayed and the Drive will shut down TEST mode is only available when in the BYPASS position terminal unit dampers in supply fan applications are open to prevent duct flexing or damage in a full speed across the line starting situation e Theelectro mechanical motor OverLoad Relay OLR S10 is adjusted to equal the Full Load Amps FLA value from the motor nameplate The OLR is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel depending on rating just above the Bypass contactor See Figure 4 1 Electrically on the output power side of the Bypass unit the adjustable thermal OLR provides overload protection for the motor in both the Drive and Bypass operating modes The OLR is set up in the factory to be a manual reset device requiring operator attention if an overload trip out is experienced OverLoad Relay Adjustment Dial Bypass Contactor Fig 4 1 Typical Motor Overload and Contactors IMPORTANT To maintain overcurrent short circuit and ground fault protection the manufacturer s instructions for setting the motor OLR must be followed Apply power to the Drive and Bypass package Ensure that all t
170. L2 03 The time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V f pattern after speed search current detection mode is complete Sets the Drive s DC Bus undervoltage trip level If this is set lower than the factory setting additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary Parameters 19 0 0 to 25 5sec 0 1 to 5 0sec 0 0 to 5 0sec Voltage Class Dependent EVA Programmin Dependent 8 Programmin Dependent 8 8 KEV Programmin Dependent 8 Voltage Class Dependent Parameter No L3 01 L3 02 L3 04 L3 06 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Stall Prevention Selection During Accel StallP Accel Sel Stall Prevention Level During Accel StallP Accel Lvl Stall Prevention Selection During Decel StallP Decel Sel Stall Prevention Level During Decel StallP Run Sel Stall Prevention Level During Running StallP Run Level Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Stall Prevention 0 Disabled Motor accelerates at active acceleration C1 01 or C1 03 The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short 1 General Purpose When output current exceeds L3 02 level acceleration stops It starts to accelerate at current value recovery 2 Intelligent The active acceleration rate C1 01 or 02 is ignored Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time w o exceeding the current value set in L3 02 This
171. MER USE CUSTOMER MUST PROVIDE PROPER SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION 2 MOTOR OR OPTION D _____ 5 3 K125 K5 K4 CN102C 122 121 CN102C le 7 AE O 6 2 1 A1 A2 3 tia MTD ON PANEL RC4 6 4 K125 K5 8 CN102C 124 123 53 t 6 4 2 A1 N 2 MTD ON PANEL CN103 CN203 18 RCS CN205 MA OOX 125 CN205 st OQ R123 117 6 AUTO 2 1 MTR 2 CN103 N oxx 126 0 06 0 208 19 1 alo oe s1 3 23 24 MOTOR SELECT CLOSED MTR 2 g De ee can c E MTD SEPARATELY MTD SEPARATELY ON CABINET DOOR ON CABINET DOOR STOP Bine Ke CN207 LL CN207 MA 119 119 120 120 100 o lao o C 2 z s3 3 13 _7 14 CN103 CN103 5 CN103 MTD ON PANEL 23 24 CN203 25 cniozc 77208 CN207 Eneo CN102C 119 120 CN102C RC28 6 A F Electrical Installation 2 23 RUN STOP ENGINEERED OPTION OPERATIONAL ONLY IN THE HAND MODE 17 1 06 CN103 CN203 26 120VAC FROM SHEET 1 R113 CN103 CN203 5 CN103 CN203 1 18 1 06 K109 R114 CN103 CN203 6 2 AF 6 MA L5 1 27 MA 8 11 123 MC CN102B K104 L6 1 29 P C101 HG K105 R115 CN103 CN203 7 08203 fr 2 CN102B R 0 NA 0 K10
172. Main Circuit Test Procedure Continued The Heat Sink amp Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor modules of the Drive 1 Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely 2 If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the fan motor can be checked with a digital mutli meter Set the digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Measure across the fan motor terminals If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the motor 24Vdc Cooling Fans Heat Sink amp Internal The Heat Sink Cooling Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive 1 Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely 2 If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the motor can be checked with digital mutli meter 230 240VAC Cooling Fans Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Heat Sink Measure across the fan motor terminals If the fan motor is good the measured value should be about 500 ohms If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 230 240VAC to the fan to test the motor Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse It is located on e
173. Mid Output Voltage A Min Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage 1 11 Mid Output Frequency B 1 12 Mid Output Voltage 1 13 Base Voltage V For 480V class units the value is twice that of 240V class units Parameter No V f Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A Min Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Mid Output Frequency B Mid Output Voltage B Base Voltage For 480V class units the value is twice that of 240V class units Programming 5 48 Table 5 10 V f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 3 to 40 HP for 240V Continued Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A Min Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage 1 11 Mid Output Frequency B 1 12 Mid Output Voltage 1 13 Base Voltage For 480V class units the value is twice that of 240V class units Table 5 11 V f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 50 to 150 HP for 230V E1 03 V f Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Max Voltage Frequency Mid Output Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A Min Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Mid Output Frequency B Mid Output Voltage B Base Vo
174. PI snooze function delay time in terms of seconds 0 to 3600 Osec Programming Snooze Delay Time PI Snooze Deactivation Level When the PI feedback drops below this level normal PI operation 0 to 100 0 Prosrammiin Wake Up Level starts again Set as a percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 8 8 PI Setpoint Boost Setting Temporary increase of PI setpoint to create an overshoot of the Setpoint Boost intended PI setpoint 015100 oe Programming PI Maximum Boost Time Sets a time limitation for reaching temporarily boosted PI setpoint Max Boost Time intended PI setpoint 5 25 0 to 3600 Programming PI Snooze Feedback Level PI snooze mode will be activated when PI feedback is above this 0 to 100 60 Prosrammin Snooze Feedback level Set as a percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 Denotes that parameter be changed when the drive is running Range depends 55 20 setting Units depend 5 31 setting 1 Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as a percentage of b5 Level f E1 04 0 to 100 0 Programming Fb los Det Lvl maximum frequency i 0 1 1 Parameters 6 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name m Setting Factory Menu x 2 Description No Digital Operator Display Range Setting Location PI Feedback Square Root T b5 28 Function Selection T 165 1 0 Programming PI Feedback SqRt ES b5 29 PI Square Root Gain A multiplier appl
175. RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0010 4 RF3 0018 4 RF3 0018 4 RF3 0025 4 RF3 0050 4 RF3 0050 4 RF3 0050 4 RF3 0090 4 RF3 0090 4 RF3 0090 4 RF3 0130 4 RF3 0150 4 RF3 0150 4 RF3 0330 4 RF3 0330 4 UFI000044 RF3 0330 4 RF3 0330 4 55972 600 99 55972 600 99 55972 600 99 55972 600 99 FS5972 800 99 a ee a es ee es ee UFU000023 FWH 3A14F UFU000062 7098 1 URx000039 2RB004 1 000039 URX000078 URX000077 5P620 0014 5P620 0014 URX000081 URX000081 5P620 0018 5P17 0338 FWH 20A14F UFU000062 70 08 1 uRxoooo46 12RB004 TURX000044 oRBoo4 5P620 0133 RL 00802 5620 0025 5P620 0031 5P620 0035 5P620 0040 5P620 0045 5P620 0045 5P620 0057 5P620 0065 5 620 0065 5 620 0147 5 620 0081 5 620 0148 5 620 0086 5P620 0090 RI 5P620 0091 5P620 0094 RI URX000089 5P617 0392 FNQ R 7 UFU000046 FWH 700A UFU000065 BH3145 3 5P620 0094 URX000089 5P17 0395 FNQ R 10 UFU000048 FWH 1000A UsEBUsBaR f 5P620 0098 URX000091 5P 17 0395 FNQ R 10 UFU000048 FWH 1000A USEBUSBAR 5P620 0098 URX000091 i zt ___ 1 ___ t i ___ J seowe n 5 620 0013 urrmoo 0150 4 pt ___ m i ___ a Et 1 Bypas
176. RR eR 3 4 5 12 A 4 DOULCC lies 1 12 4 9 5 12 Terminals iiiter tir dard 2 14 2 15 RUN 040000 0 3 2 3 5 Running Signal Digital Output eee 2 15 Stall Prevention during 44 2212 5 67 A 20 Index 8 5 Safety Circuit eese 2 10 2 11 4 3 4 4 A 14 Scaling Display Digital Operator eee 5 77 A 23 PL Setpoint e ntipsatesiee nieto 5 33 A 6 Schematic Diagram 2 6 2 11 2 20 2 22 S Curve Characteristic essere A 7 SEO sate 3 2 3 4 Selector Switches 1 11 1 12 3 2 4 9 Sequence Parameters seen A 4 Serial Communications D 2 to D 25 E HEN D 4 APOGEE FLN eere D 19 to D 25 Baud 18 D 2 D 4 Drive Node 4 D 4 Metasys N2 aententia D 15 to D 18 Parameters A 11 A 18 D 4 Run Command eese 5 12 Self Diagnosis 24 0 D 14 Serial NUMBER E ERE E en renes dp 1 7 1 8 Setpoint PI Function 5 22 to 5 28 5 33 A 6 Boost Setting iere tenerte 5 35 A 6 Display Scaling eee 5 33 A 6 SBIGCLIOTLS eco restet eee 5 23 5 33 A 6 mot tine E 5
177. RTANT using Speed Search If the length of cable between the Drive and motor is ever changed after Auto tuning then Auto tuning should be performed again IMPORTANT The speed estimation mode cannot be used when there are multiple motors operated by one Drive or the motor is two or more frames smaller than the standard size motor per the Drive capacity Programming 5 18 AC power supply Set frequency Start using reference speed detected ra Output frequency Output current Rot 10 Minimum baseblock time 12 03 x 0 75 1 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency 2 immediately before the baseblock 2 After AC power supply recovery the motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Fig 5 8 Speed Search Estimated Speed Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time AC power supply on Start using speed detected J E Set frequency reference Output frequency Output current DoD lt 4 gt 10 ms Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time L2 03 b3 05 Note If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply off time is long operation may be the same as the search in case 1 Fig 5 9 Speed Search Estimated Speed Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblo
178. RUNMNG FORWARD REVERSE MONTTOR o FORWARD REVERSE 9 ET EST 0 0 0 0 0 MINOR FAULT NO MINOR FAULT MINOR FAULT MAJOR FAULT NO MAJOR FAULT MAJOR FAULT DRIVE COMMUNICATION SAFETY CLEAR SAFETY SET HAND AUTO REFERENCE MONITOR 0 L9 9 BI 19 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 5 MONITOR OFF Metasys N2 Binary Output BO Summary Table 0 12 Metasys Binary Output Summary Metasys N2 to E7 ObjsctlD LOCAL REMOTE AND LOCAL REMOTE AND BO 10 PANEL LOCK STOP RESET KEYS STOP RESET KEYS ENABLED DISABLED EFO NOT ACTIVATED IF EFO ACTIVATED IF BoI COMMUNICATION FAULT ENABLE CABLE LOSS OCCURS CABLE LOSS OCCURS Communications D 17 Mailbox Function Points Reading a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for reading any Drive parameter AO 30 Specifies the parameter to be read from the E7 Drive AI 38 Reports the value of the parameter specified in AO 30 When this point is read it retrieves data from the parameter and sends it to the controller Example Writing a value of 387 183 hex to AO 30 specifies Drive parameter b1 04 Reading AI 38 returns the current setting of parameter b1 04 to the controller Writing to a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for writing to any Drive parameter AO 31 Specifies the parameter to be written to AO 32 Entry location of the value to be written to the parameter specified in AO 31 When this point is written to it will write th
179. RY DUE TO POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE WITH OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTED INTERNALLY VERIFY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS WITH THE FACTORY DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MM FOR REFERENCE ONLY Fig 1 14 Enclosure F1 for 125HP to 250HP 480 VAC NEMA 1 and NEMA FVFF 12 Enclosures Physical Installation 1 21 Dimensions and Weights Table 1 6 Bypass Dimensions and Weights Rated Input Voltage Continuous Output Current Amps Nominal NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 Bypass Dimensions inches mm Height Wall Mounting Dimensions HxW Drawing Number w Add on Box Weight Drawing Ibs Number 2 4 3 5 1 2 3 4 0002 0003 0004 ENEd D010 7 0024 _ 1 2 3 5 5 10 15 0046 5 0074 43 00 25 63 30 0088 1092 2 651 0 6 0 D143 8400 3775 100 D273 2133 6 958 9 2 125 D343 1 2 A002 1 A004 Gm 06 5 015 7 5 A022 15 A042 5 A068 30 0 0 60 75 0 9 2 2 43 00 25 63 17 03 1092 2 651 0 432 6 192 8400 100 248 2133 6 37 75 217 958 9 551 2 125 312 150 A360 A130 A154 1 Horsepower rating is based on standard NEMA B 4 pole motor design 17 03 432 6 217 551 2 2 2 4 5 4 5 2 Height dimension includes the mounting screw tabs 3 Add on box adds 13 6 inches to Height dimension and 91 Ibs Max to total 30 5 x 16 5 774 7 x 419 1 41 5 x 23 0 1054 1
180. Select from even odd or none Stop bits 1 bit selected Communications Protocol Modbus Number of Connectable Units 31 units max Communications D 2 Communication Connection Terminal Modbus communication uses the following terminals S S R and R The terminating resistance must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the Serial Communication chain Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch 51 5 5 81 RS 422A Terminating OFF ON r RS 485 eed poe or Bony rosistance D2 Switch of DIP Switch 51 1 located on R 1 gt terminal board Terminating resistanc 1 2W 110 Ohms R Fig 0 2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistance 1 Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring IMPORTANT 2 Use shielded cables for the communication cable and use proper shield clamps 3 When using RS 485 communication connect S4 to R and S to R on the control circuit terminal board See Fig D 3 below 4 Shield at one end only Fig D 3 RS 485 Communication Connection Procedure for Setting Up Communication Use the following procedure to perform communication with the DDC 1 Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the Drive 2 Turn ON the input power to the Drive 3 Set the required c
181. Selection Set for Terminal S6 Sel Com Inv Sel 2 5 2 H3 08 SEE TABLE N A Terminal A2 Signal Level Signal selection Term A2 Signal 0 10 VDC 5 4 5 2 0 to 10 VDC Drive control board switch 51 2 off 4 to 20 mA Drive control board switch S1 2 on H3 09 SEETABLE N A Terminal A2 Function Selection Selects Terminal A2 Sel PI Feedback 5 2 how this input will be used by the Drive ee percent ee Wa E custom display for PI Control monitoring Selectable 01 08 24 3 Third Line User Monitor Selection Display 3rd Monitor Sel 24 PI Feed PI Feedback back Digital Operator and Control Panel Display for PI Control In Table 5 3 the 01 0 parameter listed setup the Drive display to indicate 3 variables for PI control as in Figure 5 14 when the HAND OFF AUTO switch is in AUTO o FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM AUTO AUTO DRIVE Rdy PI SETPOINT Frequency Ref 2 OUTPUT U1 02 54 98 U1 24 12 4 PI FEEDBACK Monitor Fig 5 14 Drive Display for PI Control AUTO Mode Programming 5 23 When the HAND OFF AUTO switch is transfered to the HAND position the display will automatically change to indicate the speed command as in Figure 5 15 Fan ORE SPEED COMMAND Frequency Ref OUTPUT Ul 24 0 0 FEEDBACK ESC MA STOP
182. Selection P disables current limit A nee sie Soft CLA Sel Disable or rogramming 1 Enabled OH Frequency Reference 5 0 0 Reduction Level Sets the amount of frequency reference reduction when 20 0 Proti pA an Overheat Pre alarm OH is detected id nets Fref During OH 100 0 Selects the drive response upon failure of the internal cooling fan 0 Disabled FAN alarm is displayed 1 Enabled OHI fault occurs OHI Detection Selection for Fan Failure OHI Detect Sel Programming Parameters A 22 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Hunting Prevention Selection Hunt Prev Select Hunting Prevention Gain Setting Hunt Prev Gain High Slip Braking Deceleration Frequency Width HSB Decel Width High Slip Braking Current Limit HSB Current Ref High Slip Braking Dwell Time at Stop HSB DwelTim Stp High Slip Braking Overload Time HSB OL Time User Monitor Selection User Monitor Sel User Monitor Selection After Power Up Power On Monitor Digital Operator Display Selection Display Scaling LCD Brightness Adjustment LCD Contrast Factory setting changes to 2 when b5 01 1 Description 0 Disabled Hunting prevention function disabled 1 Enabled Hunting prevention function enabled If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded hunting prevention may reduce the vibration There is a loss of responsiveness if hunting prevention is en
183. Speed Search Enables disables and selects the speed search function at start 0 SpdsrchF Disable Speed search at start is disabled estimated speed method is used at other times 1 SpdsrchF Enable Speed search is enabled estimated speed method 2 SpdsrchI Disable Speed search at start is disabled Speed Search Selection current detection method is used at other times 0103 2 5 SpdSrch at Start 3 SpdscrhI Enable Speed search is enabled 9 current detection method Estimated Speed Method Actual motor speed and direction is estimated then the motor is ramped from that speed to the commanded speed Current Detection Method Current level is monitored while output frequency is ramped down Speed Search Deactivation Used only when b3 01 3 Sets the speed search operation current Current as a percentage of Drive rated current 120 Programming SpdSrch Current SAP 8 Speed Search Deceleration NN Time Cae when b3 01 3 Sets the deceleration time during speed 0 1 to 10 0 2 0sec Programming SpdSrch Dec Time i Speed Search Delay Time Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to 0 0 to h 0 2sec Programming Search Delay allow time for an external output contactor to re energize 20 0sec Bidirectional Speed Search 0 Disabled Selection 1 Enabled 1 1 Programming Bidir Search Sel M Delay Timers Timer Function ON Delay Used in conjunction with a multi
184. Speed command source Keypad Operator d1 01 H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Transducer output is 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 2 Aux Reference default Terminal A2 function is set to be a speed command input This setting also gives terminal A2 priority over d1 02 for preset speed 2 see Programming Manual H1 02 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A terminal S4 input contact closure selects A2 as preset speed 2 speed S4 must be jumpered to SN input The S4 input is jumpered to SN therefore it is always closed H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1 01 to select d1 01 keypad as a preset speed An open contact selects serial com for the run stop command the serial com speed command is overridden by the preset speed above This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 4 Multi Step Ref 2 default A terminal S6 input contact closure selects 41 04 keypad as a speed S6 must be jumpered to S5 input When open the speed command is determined by preset speed 2 This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H5 08 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Drive communicates via protocol selected Options J or L and 5 Serial Communications and Speed Pot Bypass with serial communication for control with hand mode speed potentiometer Hand mode speed command from speed potentiometer Auto mode speed command inpu
185. T FAULT 3rd MOST RECENT FAULT 4th MOST RECENT FAULT ELAPSED TIME CURRENT FAULT ELAPSED TIME 2nd FAULT ELAPSED TIME 3rd FAULT ELAPSED TIME 4th FAULT READ PARAMETER DATA Communications D 15 E7 Parameter U1 01 U1 02 U1 03 U o6 cia ala e c ci Metasys 2 Analog Output AO Summary Table D 10 Metasys N2 Analog Output Summary Metasys N2 to E7 Object Name E 228 Object ID AO 1 AO 2 AO 3 AO4 AO 5 AO 6 7 8 AO 9 AO 10 AO 11 AO 12 AO 13 AO 14 AO 15 AO 16 AO 17 AO 18 AO 19 AO 20 AO 21 AO 22 AO 23 AO 24 5 DECELERATION TIME 5 PI PROPORTIONAL GAIN PI INTEGRAL TIME 5 5 1 STALL PREVENTION LEVEL ACCEL 1 REFERENCE OPERATION MODE SELECT RUN OPERATION MODE SELECT 5 5 b1 02 PI MODE SELECT STALL PREVENTION LEVEL RUN E E E 2 2 1 pe a 0 JUMP FREQUENCY BANDWIDTH NUMBER OF AUTO RESTARTS 7257 71 OPERATOR DISPLAY MODE 3 AO 26 PI PRIMARY DELAY TIME 27 PI FEEDBACK REFERENCE MISSING DETECTION SELECT C C C C 1 PI FEEDBACK REFERENCE nO MISSING DETECTION LEVEL FEEDBACK REFERENCE AO 30 READ PARAMETER NUMBER AO 32 WRITE PARAMETER DATA Communications D 16 Metasys N2 Binary Input Summary Table 0 11 Metasys Binary Input Summary E7 to Metasys 2 Object Name RUN STOP MONITOR 0 somm
186. V 480V Models Factory Defaults 208 0V 208V Models 240 0V 240V Models 480 0V 480V Models B E1 06 Base Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 60 0 Hz B E1 07 Mid Output Frequency A Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 3 0 Hz B E1 08 Mid Output Voltage A Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 18 0V 208V Models 18 0V 240V Models 18 0V 480V Models B E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 1 5 Hz B E1 10 Mid Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 10 8V 208V Models 10 8V 240V Models 10 8V 480V Models B E1 11 Mid Output Frequency B Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 0 0 Hz B E1 12 Mid Output Voltage B E1 13 Base Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 0 0V 208V Models 0 0V 240V Models 0 0V 480V Models Programming 5 46 To set up a custom V f pattern program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1 04 through E1 13 Be sure that the following condition is true E1 09 E1 07 E1 06
187. XXX For example If 01 03 10425 then at full speed the digital operator will display 42 5 Configuring parameter 01 03 for displaying in terms of an engineering unit is only appropriate if the actual display units have a linear relationship with the actual output speed Programming 5 77 01 05 LCD Contrast Adjustment Setting Range 0105 Factory Default 3 The contrast setting of the LCD display of the digital operator can be adjusted by the setting of parameter 01 05 The higher the number programmed into 01 05 the darker the background will become Set 01 05 to the value that makes the LCD the easiest to view at the normal viewing distance and angle B 01 06 User Monitor Selection Mode OF 3 Mon Sequential factory default 3 Mon Selectable B 01 07 Second Line User Monitor Setting Range 11053 Factory Default 2 B 01 08 Third Line User Monitor Setting Range 11053 Factory Default 3 Normally the monitors shown directly below the active monitor are the next two sequential monitors If 01 06 User Monitor Selection Mode is set to 1 3 Mon Selectable those two monitors are locked as specified by parameters 01 07 and 01 08 and will not change as the top parameter is scrolled with the INCREASE and DECREASE keys DRIVE PI Feedback Active Monitor Title Active Monitor U1 37 0 00 PI Output 01 07 37 U1 38 2 50 PI Setpoint 01 08 38 For Example The Display above sho
188. Y YASKAWA E7B Drive Bypass Technical Manual This Manual also available on Www drives com Model E7B Document Number TM E7B 01 Quick Reference for Bypass Parameters Parameter Factory Parameter Factory Parameter Factory Number Setting Number Setting Number Setting Number Setting Parameter Factory N A2 13 b5 22 H1 02 L5 03 A2 15 b5 24 the bypass L6 02 5 schematic pa f pfe _ __ schematic 1819 2 the bypass coon 1 me See Table 2 of 01 01 ojojo a ae Ww See Table 2 of the bypass schematic a the bypass schematic 1 1 wn o e ws e 1 2 1 1 1e mw os ewwv 1 mo s s wa mw s f ew 1 1 1 mw o ee 1 3s e 1 fe 1 ev mw 2 e __ s 1 1 E mo x ee 1 ws 1 1 2 f 991 11 5 1 1 mw o ew 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 151 1 ww o f w 2 1 1 Exucp 1 ww Jem ee 9 ux s wo
189. abled Gain setting for the Hunting Prevention Function If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and 1 01 1 increase the gain by 0 1 until vibration ceases If the motor stalls while 1 01 1 decrease the gain by 0 1 until the stalling ceases Sets how aggressively the Drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor If overvoltage OV faults occur during HSB this parameter may need to be increased 1 to 20 Sets the maximum current to be drawn during a HSB stop Higher n3 02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current and therefore increased motor heating 100 to 200 Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E1 09 Minimum Frequency If this time is set too low the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is shut off Sets the time required for a HSB Overload Fault to occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during a HSB stop Normally this does not need to be adjusted Monitor Select Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up when 01 02 4 Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up 1 Frequency Ref 2 Output Freq 3 Output Current 4 User Monitor set by 01 01 0 0 to 10 0 30 to 1200 6 to 53 1104 Sets the units of the Frequency References d1 01 through d1 17 and the Frequency Reference Monitor U1 01 0 Hz 1 100
190. ailable inside the enclosure Drive heat sink losses are included in the heat loss data Heat loss data is for the enclosure without the add on enclosure Note 4 Height dimension H excludes the mounting screw tabs Depth dimension D excludes MCP disconnect handle Note 5 This data represents the total weight with all possible standard options Weight could be less depending on the options specified Note 6 standard options are available in this size enclosure except options E RFI Filter and K 5 Output Reactor Options E and K require the add on enclosure Note 7 All options are available in this size enclosure except E RFI Filter R 3 Line Reactor and K 5 Output Reactor Only option E combined with either option R or option K can be installed in the add on enclosure Options R and K together require an increase in the size of the E7 Bypass Enclosure Contact the factory if all three options are required Option A 2 Motor AND for 30 and 40 Hp or for 75 Hp and 100 Hp require the next size enclosure Option D 2 Motor OR for 40 Hp or for 75 Hp and 100 Hp require the next size enclosure Note 8 Heat sink mounted externally varies the depth dimension depending on the drive size Depth will not exceed dimension shown Note 9 options are available in this size enclosure except options D 2 Motor or A 2 Motor AND for 75 Hp and 100 Hp require the next size enclosure Physical Installation 1 5
191. als the value of the input to will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 1 is selected If b1 01 1 the setting of d1 01 will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 1 is selected The determination of Preset Speed 2 is made much the same way as Preset Speed 1 except that the setting of parameter H3 09 decides whether the analog input A2 or d1 02 is Preset Speed 2 If H3 09 2 Aux Reference the value of the input to A2 will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 2 is selected If H3 0922 the setting of d1 02 will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 2 is selected B Function Fault Reset Setting 14 Whenever the Drive detects a fault condition the fault output contact will close and the Drive s output will shut OFF causing the motor to coast specific stopping methods can be selected for some faults such as L1 04 for motor overheat Once the Run command is removed the fault can be reset by either the RESET key on the digital operator or by closing a digital input configured as a Fault Reset H1 Ox 14 B Function PI Disable Setting 19 When the PI Function has been enabled by b5 01 PI Mode Selection it can be indefinitely disabled by closing a digital input configured as a PI Disable input H1 0x 19 When disabled the Drive operates as a standard Drive that does not have PI enabled B Function Com Inv Sel 2 Setting 6C The Com Inv Selection function allows the user to switch the
192. and the protocol to be employed Metasys APOGEE or Modbus will provide the necessary parameter settings and wiring jumpers to be network ready when delivered Project specific H5 0X parameters setup by the user Option K 5 Output Reactor Employed on the output side of the Drive for reduction of peak voltages applied to the driven motor In long Drive to motor lead length situations high carrier frequency and reflected waves can cause high voltage spikes at the motor An output reactor provides motor protection in these long motor lead length situations This option is installed on the output power side of the Drive between the output contactor and the Drive Option L Serial Communication Echelon LonWorks An isolated RS 422 485 circuit board provides LonTalk protocol for network communication to a BAS This option plugs into the CN2 connection on the Drive control circuit board Option M 4 to 20 mA Output Provides two programmable 0 to 10 VDC analog outputs or two programmable 4 to 20 mA analog outputs Option N Input Capacitive Network Radio Frequency Interference Filter Electronic equipment can be sensitive to low levels of voltage distortion and electrical noise This passive wye delta capacitve filter is intended for installation on the VFD input in order to protect other sensitive electronic loads it provides attenuation of conducted RFI and EMI Option P Pressure to Electrical Transducer This transducer is employed
193. anymore A2 and or Operator A3 boards wiring connectors jumpers Read 8 12 VAC voltage on Operator 11 board light pins before ordering replacement User functions on TB1 Bad user wiring shorting to TB1 Check the wiring and terminals on TB1 terminals 7 to 16 faulty terminals bad relays before ordering replacement Auto Remote Purge Loose wiring on TB1 bad switches Inspect wiring Relay board switches Functions faulty of Relay A2 board inputs before ordering replacement Drive Damper Solenoid Loose wiring on Drive terminals 3 at j Inspect Drive wiring TB1 connections does not operate incomplete TB1 connections Any light off but functions Bad light module loose Operator are right A3 board cable Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 2 Drive Diagnostics Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows Normal Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a m to 5 00 p m C S T Emergency After normal hours 7 days a week including weekends and holidays To contact Drives Technical Support please call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 5 for Technical Support Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com Support information such as technical manuals FAQs instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website www drives com When call
194. art Attempts Sets the number of Num of Restarts 0 10 BENE times the Drive will perform an automatic re start L5 03 Maximum Restart Time After Fault If not success Max Restart Time fully started after this time restart attempts stop and 5 600 0 Drive faults 02 ere Key Function During Auto Run Enables or dis Oper STOP Key 02 15 Hand Key Function Selection Enables or disables the Hand Key Disabled ee 03 02 1 Read Allowed Selection Enables or disables keypad Read Allowable Enabled Shaded Areas Parameter settings required by the Bypass logic The shaded Bypass Parameter Settings in Table 5 1 document Drive parameter settings required to interface with the Bypass logic circuit that have been established at the factory and stored in a dedicated location in the memory as User Initialization values think of it as a back up file Table 5 1 is also used to document parameters that have been factory set for convenience to typical values for fan and pump applications These parameters may be changed to meet the needs of the specific application If additional parameters are set to the specific needs of the application project and the system operation has been checked and verified then the User Initialization values should be stored in memory again by selecting and entering 1 Set Default in parameter 02 03 When
195. ary 23 APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Input LDI Summary 24 APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Output LDO Summary 24 Mailbox Function Points aired 25 Communications D 1 Using Modbus Communication Serial communication can be performed with Direct Digital Controllers DDCs or similar devices using the Modbus protocol Modbus Communication Configuration Modbus communication is configured using 1 master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial communication between master and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time Consequently the slave address of each slave must be initially set so that the master can perform serial communication using that address Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified functions and send a response back to the master Master Fig D 1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive Communication Specifications The Modbus communication specifications are shown below Table D 1 Modbus Communication Specifications mem Seo Interface RS 422 RS 485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps Datalength 8 bits fixed Communications Parameters Parity
196. askawa authorized service person who has training on the product and is capable of working through the detailed steps with power applied to the Bypass unit while the enclosure door is open Start Up and Operation 4 2 BYPASS START UP PREPARATION 1 2 Review this Bypass Technical Manual and any option instructions and schematics shipped with the Drive and Bypass unit Verify that the model numbers and voltage ratings are as specified in the purchase order by matching the nameplate data for each unit to the purchase order Verify that the unit has been installed in accordance with Chapter 1 Receiving and Mechanical Installation and Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Inspect the security of the supply line power ground connections and all control circuit connections as identified in Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Double check all the power wires and motor wires Verify that the electrical supply power lines are connected to the input circuit breaker and that the motor leads are connected to the output terminals of the overload relay Ensure that all connections are tight loose wire connections may cause intermittent problems or overheating Factory connections sometimes come loose during shipment Review the installer s wired schematic Determine if a driven motor safety circuit is connected This is a series circuit of NC contacts from devices such as a smoke fire sensor freeze up thermostat or high static p
197. ass Unit Model Number Bypass Unit Enclosures All Bypass units are intended for non hazardous locations Various enclosure types are provided to protect against the applica tion environmental conditions Nema Type 1 Enclosures are constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection against incidental contact with enclosed electrical equipment and falling dust or dirt NEMA Type 12 FVFF Enclosures NEMA provides for both non ventilated and ventilated NEMA 12 enclosures When ventilated a suffix to the type number defines the ventilation method NEMA 12 FVFF enclosure has Forced Ventilation with inlet air Filter and outlet air Filter The internal pressure is positive with respect to the ambient pressure UL does not recognize NEMA 12 ventilated enclosures therefore these enclosures are designated NEMA 1 for UL purposes Physical Installation 1 8 Bypass Product Options Option A Two motor AND control Allows the operation of two motors from one Drive or Bypass Pump 1 AND pump 2 are operated at the same speed via the output from one Drive or Bypass The motors are always operated simultaneously therefore no transfer switch is involved With the 2 motor AND option motor OverLoad Relays and fuses are provided for each motor and the Drive s internal motor overload function is disabled The two motors can be of different capacity if this capacity difference was considered in the ordering process The fact
198. ass is always via H3 08 Terminal A2 Signal Level the front control panel HAND OFF AUTO switch 0 0 10 VDC 2 4 20mA H3 09 Terminal A2 Function Selection 0 Frequency Bias 2 Aux Reference Programming 5 4 Discussion of Table 5 2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings Drive Parameter Settings for Various Combinations of Bypass and Options Notes See Appendix D Communications for additional information on serial communication Hand mode run stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND OFF AUTO switch The HAND OFF AUTO switch must be in AUTO position if serial communication is to be used to control the Drive For monitoring only of Drive parameters and operation via serial communication the user needs only to set up the H5 0X Serial Com Setup parameters All other parameters may remain as they were factory programmed for the Bypass unit and options Option L LonWorks serial communication always requires DIP switch S1 1 terminating resistor to be ON See the LonWorks Option Installation Guide IG AFD 20 LONWORKS for additional parameter setting instructions B Options None Bypass with no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal 4 20 mA applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Te
199. asts to a stop during operation The fault contact is not activated Table 6 4 Auto Tuning Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Probable Cause Er 01 Fault Er 02 Minor Fault Er 03 STOP key Er 04 Resistance Er 12 I det Circuit Er 13 Leakage Inductance Fault End 3 Data Invalid There is an error in the data input for autotuning There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current A minor fault is detected during auto tuning The STOP key is pressed during auto tuning and the auto tuning is interrupted Auto tuning is not completed within the specified time The auto tuning result became other than the parameter set range Current flow exceeded the motor rated current Current detection value symbol was reversed Any of U TI V T2 and W T3 has open phase Auto tuning did not finish within the set time Tuning result became other than the parameter setting range Rated current set value is set too high Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 15 Check input data Check Drive and motor capacity Check motor rated current Check input data Check wirings and around the machine Check the load Check input data Check motor wiring f a motor and a machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine Check current detection circuit wiring and mounting procedure
200. ation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive EN 50178 1997 10 Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices EN 60201 1 1997 12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices Part 1 General Requirements IEC 60204 1 1997 EN 61010 1997 11Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment 950 1991 1 1992 A2 1993 3 1995 A4 1996 modified ilOther The Drive and Bypass unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes 240Vac maximum 240V Class and 480Vac maximum 480V Class This manual is for reference only and subject to change without notice Introduction This Section describes the applicability of the Manual Product Description The E7 Bypass unit provides a means of bypassing the Drive while allowing the motor to operate at full speed directly from the AC line It incorporates an AC Drive and three contactor Bypass arrangement in a single UL listed enclosure The three electrically interlocked IEC rated contactors isolate the Drive when operating in Bypass mode Control logic provides industry standard Hand Off Auto functions and safety circuit interlocks in both drive and Bypass operating modes E7 Bypass components include a fused 120 VAC control circuit transformer an input Motor Circuit Protector MCP circuit breaker disconnect motor overload relay selector s
201. ations These parameters may be changed to meet the needs of the specific application In Table 5 1 of this manual shading is used to distinguish between settings required by the Bypass logic and those that may be changed From the ADV Programming menu go to parameter E1 01 and select the nominal input voltage that the Drive will receive in this specific application The overall voltage classification of the Drive cannot be changed by this parameter However the input voltage should be adjusted within the range available for the given voltage class of the Drive to match the input voltage level normally found on the jobsite For example 480 VAC class Drives may be employed on nominal three phase voltage distribution systems of 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC The factory default values may need to be changed to meet the needs of the application distribution voltage From the ADV Programming menu go to parameter E2 01 and enter the Motor rated current Set this parameter to the Full Load Amps FLA rating shown on the motor nameplate This is essential for proper Drive operation and motor overload protection If the unit being started has the Speed Potentiometer option proceed directly to step 7 Otherwise press the MONITOR key to return to the DRIVE Operation menu The AUTO SEQ and REF LEDs and the STOP and CONTROL POWER ON LEDs on the control panel should be ON at this time To start the motor in Drive mode move the
202. bly Drive Model Number Warranty status determines whom you should contact to obtain a new Drive For a Bypass unit that is still under warranty begin by contacting Yaskawa Technical Support 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 5 for technical support Technical support may also be reached through e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com A Yaskawa distributor should be contacted to replace a Drive that is no longer under warranty When the Drive arrives verify that the Drive is the correct model number B Removing the Drive Before installing the new Drive the old Drive must be removed from the Bypass assembly As a safety precaution disconnect the AC power line coming into the main Bypass circuit breaker to ensure that no power is in the Bypass unit Check the Drive DC Bus voltage to be sure it is at a safe level before working inside the Bypass enclosure DC Bus voltage can be monitored by the CHARGE status indicator LED near the power terminals Be sure the LED is extinguished before pro ceeding Another method is to measure the DC voltage across terminals 1 and on the power terminal block NS WI LU C ea e ee JM CC CITE ww uu ss otque CAUTION Terminal for DC DC Bus CHARGE Status Bus Voltage Indicator LED Fig 7 6 Drive Power Terminal Block Maintenance 7 9 Discon
203. cannot restart until the external run command is removed and the UV1 fault is reset If L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru the Drive restarts without the UV1 fault if power is returned within the time specified in L2 02 the Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time During the power loss but before the fault trip the digital operator will display a UV alarm If L2 02 is set for a time longer than the control power supply can be sustained a UV1 fault will not occur and the Drive restarts upon the return of AC power The time that the control power supply can be maintained varies with Drive size The larger the Drive the greater the potential ride thru time If L2 01 2 CPU Power Active the Drive ignores 12 02 and attempts a restart as long as the control power supply is still able to maintain a minimal voltage level In effect setting L2 01 2 CPU Power Active factory default is programming the Drive for maximum Power Loss Ride thru An equivalent setting is 12 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru t with L2 02 set to a time longer than the control power supply can be maintained after power is lost Note The run command must be held during power loss for any power loss ride thru capability to be possible It is for this reason that 3 wire control is not recommended for use with the Momentary Power Loss function Programming 5 64 L3 Stall Prevention 13 01 Stall Prevention Selection During Accel Seting General Purpose factory default
204. ccelerate as quickly as possible without exceeding the L3 02 output current level IMPORTANT Stall Prevention during Acceleration is not effective when the output frequency is less than 6Hz Programming 5 65 The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 01 1 General Purpose a Set accel time b Accel time is extended Output Frequency L3 02 Output Current TIME Fig 5 31 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration The L3 02 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current If the motor capacity is small compared to the Drive s capacity or if the motor stalls during acceleration lower the set value of L3 02 L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel Did Intelligent The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during deceleration If L3 04 0 Disabled stall prevention is disabled and if the load is large and the deceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If L3 04 1 General Purpose then the standard stall prevention function is enabled If during deceleration the DC Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level see table below the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed Once the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level the deceleration will continue down to the Speed Command level See figure below Table 5 18 Stall
205. change Phase Reverse Disabled Change direction of forward motor rotation and disable reverse operation 1 2 3 Cycle External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from hand local mode to auto remote mode the drive will not run Accept External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from hand local mode to auto remote mode the drive WILL run 0 Disabled Run command accepted only in the operation menu 1 Enabled Run command accepted in all menus except when b1 02 0 After a run command Drive output will start after this delay time Selects the speed command input source in hand mode 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 Selects if drive will permit switching between HAND and AUTO modes while running 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sets the speed command used in emergency override mode when b1 15 0 Selects the emergency override reverse source 0 Use b1 14 Ref 1 Use AUTO Ref Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop 61 03 0 is selected If b2 01 E1 09 DC Injection braking starts at E1 09 Selects the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current Sets the time length of DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second When b1 03 2 actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows b2 04 10 Output Frequency E1 04 W
206. ching from NORMAL to TEST position will remove the Drive run command and the motor will stop In Bypass mode the test position powers the Drive for programming or other tests while keeping it isolated from the motor Start Up and Operation 4 9 Switch Selectable Functions The switch selectable functions Smoke Purge Auto Transfer and Remote Transfer represent various methods of transfer ring from the Drive mode of operation to the Bypass mode They may be enabled in any combination from none of them to all of them See Table 4 1 for a summary of some common combinations of these switch selectable inputs Smoke Purge When enabled switch S105 this function allows a contact closure between terminals TB1 17 and TB1 18 to transfer motor operation to Bypass for a maximum capacity smoke control function When in smoke purge mode during emergency fire smoke situations the motor overloads and safety interlock circuit are overridden to shift the priority to protecting people rather than equipment Note Smoke purge overrides all other control inputs and selector switches Smoke purge operation can only be terminated by opening the contact closure at terminals TB1 17 and TB1 18 or by opening the Circuit Breaker CB1 Auto Transfer to Bypass When enabled switch S103 the Bypass unit will automatically switch into Bypass mode on a Drive fault After clearing the Drive fault condition the function resets by moving the circuit breaker to t
207. ck t 12 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V F Ramp t L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level OH Pre Alarm Lvl L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Ph Loss In Lvl 02 04 Drive kVA Selection Inverter Model Capacity Related Parameters B 3 Capacity Related Parameter Values The following tables detail the factory default settings for the parameters that are affected by the setting of parameter 02 04 Table B 3 208 240VAC Drives Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Drive Model Nominal Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default CIMR __ _ for for for for for for for for for for b8 04 C6 02 E2 01 E2 03 E2 05 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L8 02 L8 06 3 33 38 sis 9 T3 T9 Toc Eze reme mm Ls ec i i 25P5 0 399 27P5 2011 a 5 5 1 D 1 2037 3 90 aus T ET Note b8 04 Energy Savings Coefficiant 22 1 wu 9 eds dan 782 Ea La 2 3 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 25 50 3 NM 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C6 02 Carrier Frequency E2 01 Motor Rated Current E2 03 Motor No Load Current E2 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance L2 02 Momentary Power Loss
208. ck time Current Detection Method b3 01 2 or 3 The current detection method starts searching from a predetermined frequency while monitoring the Drive output current to determine when the rotor speed and the Drive output speed frequency match The current detection version is not bi directional To enable current detection Speed Search at start set b3 01 3 SpdscrhI enable and program any digital input equal to Speed Search 1 1 0 61 or Speed Search 2 1 0 62 Speed Search 1 will start searching from the max frequency E1 04 and ramp down to meet the rotor speed Speed Search 2 will start search ing from the set frequency and ramp down to meet the rotor speed IMPORTANT ita UV1 fault occurs when current detection Speed Search is attempted increase the setting of L2 04 IMPORTANT it an OC fault occurs when Speed Search is attempted after power loss recovery increase the setting of L2 03 Programming 5 19 Run command SEE ON Deceleration time set b3 03 Maximum output awe frequency or set frequency Set frequency reference Output frequency b3 02 Speed search current level Output current Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Lower limit is set using Speed Search Delay Time b3 05 Fig 5 10 Speed Search Current Detection Method at Startup AC power supply ON Output frequency before power loss Deceleration time set in b3 03 Set fr
209. correc tion capacitors When the Forward H1 0X 81 or Reverse H1 0X 82 Emergency Override multi function input is closed the drive will run at either the B1 14 reference B1 15 0 or the AUTO reference B1 15 1 and OVRD Emergency Override will be displayed on the digital Emergency Override Forward or Reverse Emergency operator Emergency Override is active Override input is closed OVRD Emergcy Override If the Drive Enable H1 0X 6A or Bypass Drive Enable H1 0X 70 is programmed the emergency override function can only be activated when the Enable input is open If the Enable input is closed at any time during emergency override the drive will stop PRHT Motor Preheating 1 Motor Preheating Motor is preheating Mot r Preheat 2 inp t is closed Check the input circuit and increase the input power to Low input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 y S DC Bus Undervoltage within specifications UV DC Bus Undervolt The DC bus voltage is 12 05 The acceleration time is set too Flashi 208 240VAC Trip point is lt 190Vdc hort Extend the time in C1 01 Flashing 480VAC Trip point is lt 380Vdc Voltage fluctuation of the input Check the input voltage power is too large Cycle power off and on to the UV2 Control Power Supply Undervoltage of the External load connected pulling Drive CTL PS Undervolt control circuit when running down the Drive power supplies Repair or r
210. croll to Programming menu Initialization Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Programming menu Select Language Accel Decel Press the INCREASE key until C1 01 Accel Decel is displayed Accel Time 1 Accel Time 1 30 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec Press the SHIFT RESET key to move flashing digit to the right Control Panel 16 Table 3 13 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu Continued Digital Operator Display Decel Time 1 3 0 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec ADV Decel Time 1 02 030 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec ADV Decel Time 1 02 0480 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 Ci 02 00 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 1 02 00 0 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec ADV Entry Accepted ADV Decel Time 1 40 0sec 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec DRIVE Main Menu Operation DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref 01 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 00A Description Press the INCREASE key to display C1 02 Decel Time 1 Press the DATA ENTER key to access setting display Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right Press the INCREASE key to increase the set data Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the set data Entry Accepted is dis played for 1 0 sec after the data setting
211. ctions and maintains setpoint for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure flow or temperature regulation This manual is applicable to E7 Drives defined by model numbers CIMR E7U by model numbers 7 _____ This manual reflects the software version 4010 contained within Bypass units defined This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the Yaskawa website www drives com The date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made Introduction iii This manual may describe trademarked equipment which is the property of other companies These trademarks are the property of the registered owner companies and may include the following APOGEE FLN trademark of Siemens Building Technologies Inc Metasys trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus trademark of Schneider Automation Inc LonWorkS trademark of Echelon Corporation Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product These documents may be provided with the product or upon request or downloaded from www drives com Documents may include the following TM E7 02 Programming Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 11 Modbus Manual included on CD ROM with product TM AFD 20 LONWORKS Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 21 APOGEE Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 22 Metasys Manual inclu
212. cy fluctuation 5 DC Reactor Optional Built in Measures for power supply harmonics 12 Pulse Power supply characteristics characteristics Rectification Not possible Possible Table C 1 208 230VAC Drive and Bypass Specifications Continued Bypass ModeINumberEVEL Dus ss 99 39 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240VAC Proportional to input voltage oT Ratediv ltage 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240VAC 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Hz Rated input current A Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 15 Allowable frequency fluctuation DC Reactor Built in Measures for power supply harmonics 12 Pulse Power supply characteristics characteristics Possible Rectification Note The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Bypass and Drive s rated output current is equal to or greater than the motor s rated current A phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Only 208V model numbers are shown Specifications C 2 480 Table C 2 480VAC Drive and Bypass Specifications 7 15 2C 25 21 27 34 Maraon 1 3 5 5 5 2 2 3 Bypessrdedoupucurem 16 48 76 M 4 77 100 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC Proportional to inpu
213. d Control Circuit Wiring 12 Drive Terminal Block Configuration 13 Wiring e Ee e unie 14 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions 14 Bypass Control Circuit Terminal Functions 15 DIP SWITCH S 16 Shunt Connector CN TA mtem de dms 17 Field Wiring Diagram iie tree dee 18 Wiring Diagram zi cote ergo attentis end ida dst E 20 LOGIC ETT a 22 Electrical Installation 2 1 Termination Configuration Power Wiring The Circuit Breaker MCP is located in the upper right hand side of the Bypass unit The Bypass three phase input power connection is made to the input terminals of the MCP See Figure 2 1 and 2 2 for representative examples Motor Input Power Connections Ground Lug Input Power 7 1 6 __ ES Fig 2 1 Typical Input Power Connection Fig 2 2 Typical Input and Output Power Wall Mount Unit Connections Floor Mount Unit The OverLoad Relay OLR is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel depending on rating just above the bypass contactor The Bypass three phase output power connection to the motor is made to the output terminals of the OverLoad Relay See Figure 2 3 for r
214. d Output Voltage A Mid Voltage A Minimum Output Frequency Min Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Voltage Mid Output Voltage B Mid Voltage B Base Voltage Base Voltage Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Setting Range Factory Setting Menu Location VIF Pattern es Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line 0 50Hz 1 60 Hz Saturation 2 50 Hz Saturation 3 72 Hz 4 50 Hz VTI 5 50 Hz VT2 6 60 Hz VTI 7 60 Hz VT2 8 50 Hz HSTI 9 50 Hz HST2 A 60 Hz HST1 B 60 Hz HST2 C 90 Hz D 120 Hz F Custom V F FF Custom w o limit Output voltage V VMAX E1 05 VBASE E1 13 FMIN E1 09 FA FBASE FMAX E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 Frequency Hz To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will be disre garded Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner E1 04 FMAX 2 1 06 FA gt 1 07 FB gt E1 09 FMIN Set only when V f is finely adjusted at rated output range Adjustment is not normally required Parameters 10 155 t0 255 0 240V 310 to 510 0 480V 0 to 255 0 240V 0 to 510 0 480V 0 0VAC Programming 240V Quick Setting 480V 0 to FF Programming 0 to 255 0 240V 30 Progra A 0 to 510 0 det rogramming 480V 0 0 to Programming 0 to 255 0 240V Ra ne 18 0VAC Programming 480V i us 0 to 255 0 24
215. d U3 monitors and returns 02 12 to zero Used to reset the kilowatt Hour monitor to zero 0 Disabled no change 1 Clear all Resets U1 29 to zero and returns o2 14 to zero Enables or disables the Hand key on the digital operator 0 Disabled 1 Enabled COPY Function This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the digital operator 0 COPY SELECT no function 1 INV gt OP READ All parameters are copied from the Drive to the digital operator 2 OP gt INV WRITE All parameters are copied from the digital operator into the Drive 3 OP lt gt INV VERIFY Parameter settings in the Drive are compared to those in the digital operator NOTE When using the copy function the Drive model number and software number U1 14 must match or an error will occur Enables and disables all digital operator copy functions 0 Disabled No digital operator copy functions are allowed 1 Enabled Copying allowed Sets the motor rated power in kW NOTE T1 02 should be left at the Drive default the last 3 digits of the Drive model number Sets the motor rated current Used only during an auto tune Parameters A 25 Menu Location Setting Range Programming 0 to 65535 Programming Programming emi Programming Programming Programming Auto Tuning E 0 00 to kVA Ano 650 00 Dependent uto Tuning kVA kVA Monitor List Table A 2 Monitor L
216. d command input signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB 1 4 Significant 3 Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator d1 01 H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1 01 to select d1 01 keypad as a preset speed An open contact selects serial com for speed command and run stop This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H5 08 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Drive communicates via protocol selected Options J or L Serial Communications Bypass with serial communication for run stop control and speed monitoring Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator d1 0X H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 2 Aux Reference default Terminal A2 function is set to be a speed command input This setting also gives terminal A2 priority over d1 02 for preset speed 2 see Pro
217. dback for PI operation though the setpoint can come from a number of different sources refer to the section covering the PI parameters for more information regarding specifying the setpoint source PI parameters are listed in section b5 Parameters H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain and H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias can be used to configure the A2 analog input to match the signal from the Feedback Transmitter The U1 24 monitor PI Feedback can be used to check the PI Feedback level with the digital operator Function PI Differential Setting 16 Normal PI operation will adjust the Drive output in order to match the measured feedback value to a desired setpoint When PI is operated in the differential mode however the Drive output is adjusted in order to maintain a desired differential between two feedback signals When the A2 analog input is configured as a PI Differential H3 09 16 PI Differential the Al analog input becomes the other PI Differential input The desired differential is set by parameter b5 07 PI Differential Setpoint and can be set so that A2 is held less than A1 b5 07 0 or A2 is held greater than A1 b5 07 gt 0 When PI Differential operation is chosen the A1 feedback level can be monitored by U1 24 PI Feedback and the A2 feedback level can be monitored by U1 53 PI Feedback2 Programming 5 61 H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 0 H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias Se
218. ded on CD ROM with product DriveWizard Software and Manual Included on CD ROM with product Option Instructions Included on CD ROM with product Definitions of Acronyms and Abbreviations AC Alternating Current LRA AIC Amps Interrupting Capacity MCP CB Circuit Breaker MTBF CIMR Control Induction Motor Rotation NC CN Connector NEC CPT Control Power Transformer NEMA CPU Central Processing Unit NO DIP Dual Inline Package OLR FLA Full Load Amperes PCB FVFF Forced Ventilated inlet Filter outlet Filter PI HOA Hand Off Auto RTS HP Horsepower SFS IEC International Electrotechnical Commission TB IGV Inlet Guide Vanes THD IPM Intelligent Power Module VA KVA Kilo Volt Amperes VAC LED Light Emitting Diode VAV Locked Rotor Amperes Motor Circuit Protector Mean Time Between Failures Normally Closed National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association Normally Open Over Load Relay Printed Circuit Board Proportional plus Integral control action Request To Send Soft Start Terminal Block Total Harmonic Distortion Volt Amperes Volts Alternating Current Variable Air Volume Terminology in This Manual Standard or Configured options are available with standard lead times Engineered or Custom options are available only with extended lead times Introduction iv Resources Available Table of Resources Manuals Installation Guides and CD s TM E7 01 E7 Driv
219. digital input command 4 Bit 8 Multi function digital input command 5 Bit 9 Multi function digital input command 6 BitA Multi function digital input command 7 Bits B to F Not used 0002H Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003H to 0005H Not used 0006H PI Setpoint 0007H Analog output 1 setting 11 V 726 to 11 V 726 gt 10V 660 0008H Analog output 2 setting 11 V 726 to 11 V 2 726 gt 10V 660 Multi function contact output setting Bit 0 Digital output 1 Terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit1 Digital output 2 Terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit2 Not Used Bits 3 to 5 Not used Bit 6 Set fault contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Fault contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 8 to F Not used 000AH to 000EH Not used Reference se lection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit1 Input PI setpoint 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 3 to B Not used C Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled D Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled F Not used Note Write 0 to all unused bits Also do not write data to reserved registers Communications D 9 Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor da
220. e IMPORTANT terminal card Removing the Drive Terminal Card 1 Remove the terminal cover on the Drive 2 Remove the Digital Operator and front cover on the Drive 3 4 Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card until they are free It is not necessary to remove Remove the wires connected to FE and NC on the terminal card the mounting screws completely They are captive and self rising Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow Mounting the Drive Terminal Card Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card Confirm that the terminal card and the Control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion The connector pins may be bent if the terminal card is forced into place possibly preventing correct Drive operation CN8 T VIL T res I Mounting Screw Mounting Screw Fig 7 5 Terminal Card Removal Procedure Maintenance 7 8 Removing and Replacing the Drive in a Bypass Unit Drive Replacement If possible save the existing drive programming by copying it to the memory in the keypad operator via parameter 03 01 When it has been determined that a Drive fault requires a Drive replacement see Chapter 6 there are several steps required before the Bypass will be operable again First a new Drive must be ordered Begin by determining the model number Drive that is in the Bypass assem
221. e the Run Stop Push Button 3 wire control configured option It is removed when this option is present and must be in place when this option is not part of the unit specification See Figure 1 9 terminals 1 and 2 are jumpered J1 as the unit is shipped from the factory If a customer supplied series circuit of NC safety devices is to be used this jumper is removed and the safety circuit connected between terminals 1 and 2 terminals 5 and 6 are jumpered J2 as the unit is shipped from the factory If a customer supplied Drive NO enabling contacts are to be used such as a damper end switch or occupied cycle timer this jumper is removed and the enabling contacts wired between terminals 5 and 6 Physical Installation 1 15 B Switch Selectable Functions The slide switches used to select these functions are located on the relay controller Printed Circuit Board PCB A2 See Figure 1 9 The factory default is for these functions to be de selected Smoke Purge When enabled switch S105 this function allows a contact closure between terminals 17 and 18 of TBI to transfer motor operation to bypass for a maximum capacity smoke control function When in smoke purge mode during emergency fire smoke situations the motor overloads and safety interlock circuit are overridden to shift the priority to protecting people rather than equipment Auto Transfer to Bypass If enabled switch S103 the E7 Bypass unit will automatically trans
222. e User Manual TM E7 02 E7 Drive Programming Manual TM E7 21 E7 APOGEE FLN Technical Manual TM E7 22 E7 Metasyse N2 Technical Manual IG AFD 20 LONWORKSe Option Installation Guide IG AFD 23 BACnet Option Installation Guide IG AFD 50 3 15 PSI Pressure Transducer Installation Guide IG E7B 02 E7B Drive Bypass System with Touchpad Control Panel Option CD E7 01 CD ROM Drives for Building Automation DriveWizarde Software DriveWizarde Software Version 5 3 Energy Savings Predictor for E7 Flyers Bulletins Pricebook Binders And Specifications FL E7 01 Flyer 2 page E7 Drives and Bypass Packages BL E7 01 Bulletin Multi page E7 Drives and Bypass Packages PB E7 01 E7 Price Book DRGE7 E7 Drives Resources Guide Binder for Building Automation SGE7 01 EngSpec15172 E7 Specification Guide Section 15172 for Consulting Engineers SGE7 10 SubmittalSpec E7 Submittal Specification SGE7B 10 SubmittalSpec E7 Bypass Submittal Specification SGE7C 10 SubmittalSpec E7 Configured Submittal Specification SGETE 10 SubmittalSpec E7 Engineered Submittal Specification See also www drives com Introduction v Notes Introduction vi Table of Contents Quick Reference Parameter 81 Inside front cover Warnings and C AU ONS oco ele dece es RE iii
223. e and the rotor and output speeds match When the output frequency is higher than the actual rotor speed the slip causes the current to be high As the output frequency is lowered the closer it comes to the rotor speed the lower the current draw will be When the output current drops below the level as set in b3 02 100 Drive Rated Current the output frequency stops decreasing and normal operation resumes B 53 03 Speed Search Deceleration Time Setting Range 0 1 to 10 0 Seconds Factory Default 2 0 Seconds Parameter b3 03 sets the deceleration ramp used by the current detection method of Speed Search when searching for the motor s rotor speed Even if Speed Search 2 is selected for Speed Search at start the time entered into b3 03 will be the time to decelerate from maximum frequency E1 04 to minimum frequency E1 09 B b3 05 Speed Search Delay Time Setting Range 0 0 to 20 0 Seconds Factory Default 0 2 Seconds In cases where an output contactor is used between the Drive and the motor extra waiting time is provided after power returns and before Speed Search is performed This extra time allows for the contactor to operate When Speed Search at start is used b3 05 will serve as the lower limit of the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 B b3 14 Bi Directional Speed Search Selection Enabled factory default The b3 14 parameter can be used to turn off the bi directional capabilities of the Speed Estimation form of Speed Search
224. e control wiring to 50 m or less Separate the control wiring from high power lines input power motor leads or relay sequence circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer and not from a Digital Operator use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E G as shown in Figure 2 8 Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2 5 G Shield terminal V Speed setting power supply 15 V 20 mA External kQ A1 Master speed reference 0 to 10 V 20 frequenc erena a O Master speed reference 4 to 20 mA 250 0 to 10 V 20 P Wire Pair Fig 2 8 Analog Input Terminal Configuration on Drive Electrical Installation 2 12 Drive Terminal Block Configuration The wiring terminals are shown in Figure 2 9 2 EH s sc se A1 Ae v EG s Memaj Ec Control circuit terminals i
225. e defective dynamic DynBrk Transistr The dynamic braking transistor failed voltage defective dynamic braking transistor or resistor braking resistor Monitor DC bus voltage Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 9 Table 61 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Low input voltage at R L1 Cheek the ut circuit and zi S L2 and T L3 increase the input power to within DC Bus Undervoltage specifications 0 1 The DC bus voltage is lt L2 05 d tomo cus Noe 5 The acceleration time is set too DC Bus Undervolt 208 240 Trip point is lt 190 4 nem Extend the time in C1 01 480VAC Trip point is 380Vdc Voltage fluctuation of the input Check theatip l voltage power is too large Cycle power off and on to the Drive Control Power Supply Undervoltage UV2 iia Repair or replace the Power CTL PS Undervolt Undervoltage of the control circuit when pu me own the Drive power Gate Drive PCB running supplies Remove all control wiring and test Drive Cycle power off and on to the Drive Soft Charge Circuit Fault Contacts on the soft charge UV3 Th h contactor are dirty and the soft Check the condition of the soft MC Answerback pre charge contactor opened ware the charge contactor does not charge contactor Drive was running function mechanically Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Some feature
226. e is 10Vdc it is safe to work inside the Drive If not wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged Measure DC Bus Voltage The input diodes rectify or transform the three phase input AC voltage into a DC voltage 1 Seta digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting 2 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place t
227. e motor output wiring is incorrect When the Drive U T1 V T2 and W T3 terminals are properly connected to the motor the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is received The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type so be sure to check the specifications The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U TI V T2 and W T3 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow B The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Acceleration Level is too low the acceleration time will be too long Check to be sure that the set value is suitable B The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the motor speed and torque will be limited Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command Use the following information if the motor operates at a higher speed than the Speed Command B A signal is being input to the Speed Command current terminal A2 If a preset frequency reference is selected the preset reference takes priority over the normal reference If the PI mode of operation is enabled the Drive output frequency will change to regulate
228. e power supply to the Drive again SN SC SPA1 A2 V AC V AC R R MA MB 51 7 AM 5 M4 1 2 E G Fig D 10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self Diagnosis Function 6 During normal self diagnostic operation the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value If an error occurs a CE Modbus communication error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the fault contact output will be turned ON and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF Communications D 14 Metasys N2 Point Database Metasys 2 Analog Input Al Summary Table D 9 Metasys N2 Analog Input Summary E7 to Metasys N2 Object Name SPEED REFERENCE OUTPUT SPEED OUTPUT CURRENT kWATT HOUR METER OUTPUT POWER 0 1kW DRIVE TEMPERATURE AC OUTPUT VOLTAGE DC BUS VOLTAGE ELAPSED TIME HOURS ELAPSED TIME 10K HOURS MEGAWATT HOUR METER DRIVE RATED CURRENT COMMUNICATION ERROR CODE o o o PI DEVIATION PI OUTPUT CAPACITY PI REFERENCE LAST FAULT CODE E FREQ REF FAULT OUTPUT FREQ FAULT OUTPUT CURRENT FAULT OUT VOLT REF FAULT DC BUS VOLTS FAULT OUTPUT POWER FAULT INPUT TERM STATUS FAULT OUTPUT TERM STATUS FAULT OPERATION STATUS FAULT ELAPSED OPERATION TIME FAULT MOST RECENT FAULT 2nd MOST RECEN
229. e value to the Drive An ENTER or ACCEPT command does not need to be sent for the data to be taken by the Drive The behavior of the write is the same as with the digital operator If the Drive is running there are a lim ited number of Drive parameters that can be written to Example Writing a value of 387 183 hex to AO 31 specifies Drive parameter b 1 04 Writing a value of 1 to AO 32 enables the Drive for reverse run Communications D 18 APOGEE FLN Point Database APOGEE FLN Point List Summary This database is for APOGEE FLN Application 2721 and features 97 logical points 29 Logical Analog Inputs 35 Log ical Analog Outputs LAO 19 Logical Digital Inputs LDI and 14 Logical Digital Outputs LDO These points configure control or monitor the operation of the Drive Information to consider when referencing this table Points not listed are not used in this application 2 Asingle value in a column means that the value is the same in English units and in SI units 3 Point numbers that appear in brackets e g 03 can be unbundled at the field panel Number 8 SI Units SI Units SI Units Text Text Parameter o rao cmmaps s 1 o m ear 1 L L1 imr esr Ws sem ww 9 Lim per 5 xr car rowers rear pve rei re S i
230. ect able Smoke Purge feature S105 via a contact closure at terminals TB1 17 and TB1 18 The motor is running at full speed across the line and the Drive is de energized B Motor OL Safeties Fault Indicator Table 3 9 Motor OL Safeties Fault Indicator The motor overload S10 has tripped OFF de energizing both the Drive and Bypass Circuits Or the NC motor safety circuit connected to terminals TB1 1 and TB1 2 has an open circuit condition The motor overload S10 and NC motor safety circuit are satisfied Control Panel 3 6 B Drive Fault Indicator Table 3 10 Drive Fault Indicator The Drive has tripped OFF due to an internal Drive fault The Drive is ready for operation or operating normally B Smoke Purge Indicator Table 3 11 Smoke Purge Indicator The Smoke Purge function has been selected by closing switch S105 on On PCB A2 and the building fire control system has closed a contact between terminals TB1 17 and TB1 18 Smoke Purge is not active the Drive amp Bypass are operating normally Control Panel 3 7 Drive Main Menus The Drive s parameters and monitoring functions are organized into groups called menus that make it easier to read and set parameters The Drive is equipped with five menus The five menus and their primary functions are shown in Table 3 12 and are directly available by pressing the MENU key Table 3 12 Drive Main Menus The Drive can be run in this menu Al
231. ed agree 1 Drive operation ready During fault detection Minor fault 1 During fault detection Major fault Parameters 26 Table A 2 Monitor List Continued Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Cumulative Operation Time ati zont f the Dri Elapsed Time splays total operating or power on time of the Drive Solare Number isplays Drive s software number FLASH ID ey 2 Terminal 1 Input Voltage Displays the input voltage on Terminal 1 as a percentage of Term A1 Level 10V DC Terminal A2 Input Voltage isplays the input current or voltage on Terminal A2 as a Term A2 level percentage of 20mA or 10 V DC Motor Secondary Current 10 Displays the amount of current being used by motor to Mot SEC Current produce torque Iq Description le 1 1 1 1 1 21 4 5 6 8 0 4 8 9 0 4 6 7 8 Output Frequency After Soft Start Displays the frequency reference speed command after the SFS Output accel and decel ramps Si Displays the feedback signal when PI control is used CPU Number CPU ID Displays control board hardware revision kWh kWh Lo 4 Digits Displays the accumulated kWh MWh kWh Hi 5 Digits Displays the accumulated MWh First Parameter Causing an OPE Sure 7 EN T OPE Detected Displays the parameter number causing an OPE
232. ed by parameter L5 01 1F Overload OL1 Closes before a motor overload occurs 90 of time 20 OH Prealarm Closes when the Drive s heatsink temperature exceeds the setting of parameter L8 02 38 Drive Enable Closes when the Drive enable input is active 39 Waiting to Run Closes during the time after a run command is issued but the Drive is not running due to the time set in parameter b1 10 3A OH Freq Reduce 3B Run Src Com Opt 3D Cooling Fan Err Closed during internal cooling fan failure Parameters 15 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu e Description No Digital Operator Display Range Setting Location Saas eT H3 02 Terminal Al Gain Setting Sets the speed command when 10V is input as a 0 0 to 100 0 Prosramimin Terminal 1 Gain percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 1000 0 T 5 H3 03 Terminal A1 Bias Setting Sets the speed command when OV is input as a 100 0 to 0 0 Pros 5 Terminal 1 Bias percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 100 0 A Terminal A2 Signal Level Selects the signal level of terminal A2 H3 08 Selection 0 0 10VDC switch S1 2 must be in the off position 2 Programming Term A2 Signal 2 4 20 mA switch 51 2 must be in the on position 2 Selects what effect the aux terminal has on the Drive 0 Frequency Bias 0 10096 bias 2 Aux Reference Aux Terminal Function Selec
233. efficient when operating near rated slip conditions E 68 01 Energy Savings Selection 3 Disabled factory default When the Energy Savings function is enabled b8 01 1 Enabled the Drive reduces the output voltage to the motor below the voltage value specified by the programmed V f pattern whenever the motor load is light Since torque is reduced during this voltage reduction the voltage has to return to normal levels when the load returns The energy savings is realized through improved motor efficiency The reduced output voltage causes increased rotor slipping even with a light load A motor is most efficient when operating fully loaded i e operating at rated slip B b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Setting Range 0 0 to 655 0 Factory Default Model Dependent Parameter b8 04 is used in maximizing motor efficiency The factory setting will be Drive capacity dependent but can be adjusted in small amounts while viewing the kW monitor U1 08 and running the Drive to minimize the output kW A larger value typically results in less voltage to the motor and less energy consumption Too large a value will cause the motor to stall Programming 5 37 C1 Accel Decel B C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 C1 03 Acceleration Time 2 C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Seconds Factory Default 30 0 Seconds C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 sets the time to accelerate from zero
234. en chassis type IP00 CIMR E7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 Ambient operating 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C NEMA 1 type temperature 14 F to 113 F 10 C to 45 C Open chassis type Ambient operating humidity 95 max with no condensation 5 Storage temperature 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 60 C short term temperature during transportation B Application site Indoor no corrosive gas dust etc m Altitude Vibration Appraisal Agencies 3300 ft 1000 m higher altitudes by derate 10 to 20 Hz 32 ft sec 9 8 m s max 20 to 50 Hz 6 5 ft sec 2 m s max UL File E143427 Specifications C 4 Appendix D Communication This appendix details the specifications connections and programming of the Drive for Modbus communications This Drive also contains embedded APOGEE FLN and Metasys N2 communication protocols For details regarding AROGEE FLN please refer to the E7 APOGEE FLN Technical Manual TM E7 21 For details regarding Metasyse N2 please refer to the Technical Manual TM E7 22 These two documents can be found on the CD ROM included with this Drive and Bypass unit or at www drives com The H O A switch must be in the AUTO position if serial communication is to be used for E7 Drive run stop and speed control Using Modbus Communication esee 2 Modbus Communication Configuration 2 Communication Specifications 2
235. en reassemble the PCB A3 to the operator panel on the inside of the enclosure door using the 9 screws previously removed This procedure is also employed to replace the Selector Switch modules on the Bypass Operator Interface PCB A3 Replacing The Relay Controller PCB The Bypass controller relays are not individually replaceable the Bypass Relay Controller PCB A2 assembly must be replaced see appendix F for part numbers The Bypass Relay Controller PCB A2 is located on the left hand side of the wall mount enclosure adjacent to the door hinge To remove PCB A2 disconnect the ribbon cable connectors at CN102 A CN102 B and CN103 Mark and disconnect the wires from TB CN102 C as well as marking and disconnecting all field wiring from terminal block TB1 Remove the 5 nuts securing the circuit board to the side wall of the enclosure lift out and replace the Bypass Relay Controller PCB A2 assembly with a new one see appendix F for part numbers Maintenance 7 5 Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement B Drive Models CIMR __ _20P4 thru 2018 25 HP 208V 240V and 40P4 thru 4018 30 HP 480V If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure as it is in Bypass units the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure See Removing and Replacing the Drive in this chapter IMPORTANT A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive If the Drive is
236. encies There are also settings for Custom V f patterns that will allow the programmer to manually set Customize the V f pattern using parameters E1 04 through E1 13 Using parameter E1 03 the programmer can select one of the preset V f patterns or chose between a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit E1 03 F Custom V F and a custom V f pattern without a voltage limit E1 03 FF Custom w o limit Programming 5 44 Table 5 8 Preset V f Patterns Specifications E1 03 V fPattern 1 Specifications 1 03 V tPattern 1 High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque 2 High Starting Torque 1 60Hz Saturation High Starting Torque 2 E High 50Hz Saturation 7 Starting Torque 2 General purpose Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque 2 High Speed Operation Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque Variable Torque 2 If one of the custom V f patterns is selected then parameters E1 04 through E1 13 will determine the V F pattern When a factory Initialization is performed the setting of E1 03 is unaffected but the settings of E1 04 through IMPORTANT E1 13 are returned to their factory default settings B 1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 120 0 Hz Factory Default 60 0 Hz Programming 5 45 B 1 05 Maximum Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0
237. ency to zero when 30 0sec s ENS Programming Decel Time 2 selected via a multi function input 0 0 Fast Stop Time Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for to 10 0s Piori Fast Stop Time the Fast Stop function 6000 0 17705 se a ae Accel Decel Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel decel times 5 Fout lt 11 Accel Decel Time 2 s Switch Frequency 0 0Hz Programming Acc Dec SW Fre Fout gt C1 11 Accel Decel Time 1 4 Multi function input Multi Acc Dec 1 has priority over C1 11 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Menu location is Programming when PI is disabled and Quick Setting when PI is enabled 7 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Description Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display P Range Setting Location S Curve Acc Dec S curve is used to further soften the starting ramp The longer the S curve time the softer the starting ramp S Curve Characteristic at C2 01 Accel Start SCrv Acc Start Run command OFF Output frequency C2 02 S Curve Characteristic at C2 02 Accel End i 0 00 to 2 50 SCrv Acc End pe Torque Comp m This parameter helps to produce better starting torque It Cr Ol Torque Compensation Gain determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon 0 00 to 2 50 Torq Comp Gain 2 4 p motor current and motor
238. eplace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Cycle power off and on to the Soft Charge Circuit Fault Contacts on the soft charge Dave UV3 contactor are dirty and the soft The pre charge contactor opened while the h t MC Answerback Drive was runnin Chat se COMACLOL 0068 Check the condition of the soft g 5 function mechanically charge contactor Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 13 Operator Programming Errors OPE An Operator Programming Error OPE occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inap propriate The Drive does not operate until the parameter is set correctly Alarm output and fault contact do not operate If an OPE occurs change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 OPE Error and Fault Displays Digital Operator Display The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter is set incorrectly OPEO1 kVA Selection t Drive kVA setting error Corrective Action Enter the correct kVA setting 02 04 by referring to the Drive model number in Appendix B 2 Parameter set above the allowable Constant data out of range Verify the program settings Duplicate functions are selected up down commands or trim control increase decrease are not set simultaneously Speed search from maximum frequency and set frequency are set simultaneously Emergency override FWD H1 0X 81 and Emergency Overr
239. epresentative examples Motor Connections Motor Connections Overload Relay Fig 2 3 Typical Output Power Connection Wall Mount Units Electrical Installation 2 2 Field Wiring Pressure Wire Connector Wire Type Range and Tightnening Torque Specifications CUSTOMER A C LINE WIRING CUSTOMER EARTH GROUND WIRING BYPASS MODEL NO CIRCUIT BREAKER BYPASS MODEL NO GROUND LUG BASENUMBER MFG CURRENT WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING BASE NUMBER WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING PART RATING RANGE TORQUE eee RANGE TORQUE 208v 240v 480v NUMBER AMPS AWG LB IN 208v 240v 480 AWG LB IN 002 B001 FAL36003 3 14 4 35 0002 A002 8001 14 10 35 0002 Aoo3 8002 FAL36007 7 14 4 35 0003 003 8002 0003 004 8003 0004 004 8003 D004 B004 0007 006 8004 0007 006 8007 FAL36015 15 14 4 35 010 009 8007 0010 009 Bot 0016 015 0016 015 014 FAL36030 30 12 4 35 0024 A022 014 0024 022 8021 136050 50 12 10 80 0030 A028 B021 0030 Ao28 027 B027 B034 B034 0046 A042 8040 FAL36100 100 12 10 80 0046 A042 8 40 0059 A054 8052 0059 054 8052 A068 8065 A068 B065 B0
240. equency reference Output frequency b3 02 speed search operating current Ee Ea Output current 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency ae immediately before baseblock Minimum baseblock time L2 03 4 2 After AC power supply recovery motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 2 Fig 5 11 Speed Search Current Detection Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time eceleration lime set in b3 03 reference AC power supply ON OFF Output fi bef p requency before power loss Set frequency Output frequency b3 02 Speed search operating time uh iets EO Output current gt Speed search wait time 63 05 Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Fig 5 12 Speed Search Current Detection Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblock time Setting of Automatic Speed Search for Speed Search Method b3 01 all RUN commands and Used for Multi function momentary power loss inputs Speed Estimation Programming 5 20 B b3 02 Speed Search Deactivation Current Setting Range 0 to 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 120 of Drive rated output current When using the current detection method of Speed Search parameter b3 02 sets the current level that will determine when the search is complet
241. er Parameter Name Description Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display P Setting Location EE Digital inputs 0 3 wire control FWD REV selection for 3 wire sequence 1 Local Remote Sel Hand Auto Selection Closed Hand Open Auto 2 Option Inv Sel Selects source of speed command and sequence Closed b1 01 amp b1 02 Open Option Card 3 Multi Step Ref 1 Closed speed command from d1 02 or Aux Terminal Terminal S3 Function Open speed command determined by b1 01 Selection 4 Multi Step Ref 2 Terminal S3 Sel Closed speed command from d1 03 or d1 04 0 to 6E Open speed command determined by b1 01 6 Jog Freq Ref Closed speed command from d1 17 Open speed command determined by b1 01 7 Multi Acc Dec 1 Closed Accel amp Decel Ramps determined by C1 03 amp C1 04 Open Accel amp Decel Ramps determined by C1 01 amp C1 02 8 Ext BaseBlk N O Closed Output transistors forced off Open Normal operation 9 Ext BaseBlk N C Closed Normal Operation Open Output transistors forced off A Acc Dec RampHold Closed Acceleration suspended and speed held Open Normal Operation C Term A2 Enable Closed Terminal A2 is active Open Terminal A2 is disabled F Term Not Used Terminal has no effect 10 MOP Increase Closed Speed Command Increases Open Speed Command Terminal S4 Function Held Selection Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1 02 must Termi be set to 1 0 to 6E erminal
242. er b5 21 selects the sleep function characteristic action When b5 21 0 SFS Input the sleep function start level b5 15 is compared to the Drive s output Speed Command after PI block This is the setting that should be used for open loop or closed loop control It is also possible to have the sleep function start level b5 15 compared to the Drive input or setpoint For this special application set b5 21 1 PI Setpoint When b5 21 2 Snooze a variation of the sleep function called Snooze is enabled see parameter b5 22 to b5 27 IMPORTANT The sleep function can be used even if the PI function is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled Programming 5 34 B b5 22 PI Snooze Level Setting Range to 100 Factory Default 096 E b5 23 PI Snooze Delay Time Setting Range 0 to 3600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds B b5 24 PI Snooze Deactivation Level Setting Range to 100 Factory Default 0 The Snooze Function is a variation on the Sleep Function The Snooze function must be selected by setting parameter b5 21 2 Snooze Once the Snooze Function is selected the Drive monitors the output frequency If the output frequency drops below the PI Snooze Level b5 22 and stays below that level for at least the PI Snooze Delay Time b5 23 the Drive output shuts off This is different from the Sleep Function because it is the feedback that must drop below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level b5 24 be
243. erating to a stop B Drive Stop Indicator The status of the STOP indicator is shown in Table 3 5 when the Drive is either in the or Auto mode Table 3 5 STOP Indicator Control Panel Indicator Lights B Control Power Indicator Table 3 6 Control Power Indicator 3 Phase Power is applied to the Bypass unit and the control power transformer is functioning 3 Phase Power is disconnected from the Bypass unit or a control power transformer fuse has cleared B Drive Run Indicator Table 3 7 Drive Run Indicator The Drive has been given a run command in hand or auto mode and the Bypass circuit is de energized Off The Drive has no run command in either the hand or auto modes The unit may be operating in Bypass mode Control Panel 3 5 B Bypass Run Indicator Table 3 8 Bypass Run Indicator The Bypass has no run command in either the HAND or AUTO modes The unit may be operating in Drive mode The Bypass has been given a run command in the HAND or AUTO mode Or the operation has been remotely transferred to Bypass using the switch selectable Remote Transfer to Bypass feature S104 via a BAS contact closure at terminals TB1 25 and TB1 26 Or the operation has been automatically transferred to Bypass after a On Drive fault condition via the switch selectable Auto Transfer to Bypass feature S103 Or the operation has been transferred to Bypass using the switch sel
244. ernes 5 35 A 6 Display 5 33 A 6 Selection neen en 5 23 5 33 A 6 deuten RO 5 33 A 6 Sleep Delay Time aee 5 32 6 FUnCCOD 5 32 Function Start Level 5 32 A 6 Input Source ien inte 5 34 A 6 Snooze Deactivation 5 35 A 6 Delay Time 5 35 A 6 Feedback Level 5 36 A 6 BUMCEI OM ERE EXER 5 35 levels 5 36 A 6 Square Root 5 37 A 6 PLMode Urt 5 22 A 5 PI Monitors Feedback U1 24 sss 5 33 A 27 Output 01 37 5 32 27 Setpolnt a 01 38 5 33 27 PLC Programmable Logic Controller D 2 Plenum 1 24 Pneumatic Input 1 9 2 10 2 16 5 4 5 62 Potentiometer 2 12 2 20 Power Connection 02020000 00000 1 13 2 2 2 6 Energy 22222 422 5 37 7 Output 15 2 12 2 15 2 18 Loss 2 2 00 220 5 64 19 4 iugi A E 7 2 Supply Specifications sess 2 C 3 Power Factor Correction Capacitors 6 8 Pre Operation Considerations i to iv 1 1 2 1
245. es in L6 02 and 13 Loss of Load Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Drive output current L6 02 for more than Motor is underloaded Loss of Load Det 1 the time set in L6 03 Check application machine status to eliminate fault has exceeded 5 imbalance capacity Remove the motor and run the Shorted Drive output phase Drive without the motor hase shorted motor locked P d Check the motor for a phase to rotor load too heavy accel Overcurrent phase short OC Dri ded th decel time too short contactor MEER MR on the Drive output is opened Check the Drive for a phase to Over Current overcurrent detection level approximately and closed a special motor or phase short at the output 180 of Drive rated output current a motor with a FLA rating Verify C1 01 and 1 02 are set larger than Drive rated output correctly current Check load conditions OH1 exceeded the temperature programmed in working high ambient Reduce the ambient temperature Heatsnk MAX Temp Parameter L8 02 and L8 03 0 2 temperature a heat source is around the Drive t 1 to the Drive Remove the heating unit Replace Drive Internal Cooling Fan the cooling fan Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Bete onl Recheck the accel decel time otor Overheating Alarm OH3 i Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load
246. est position powers the Drive for programming or other tests while keeping it isolated from the motor B MCP Motor Circuit Protector Circuit Breaker Disconnect Electrically located on the input power side of the Bypass unit the MCP adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker provides protection from short circuits for the motor power cables The Bypass three phase input power connection is made to the input terminals of the MCP The door mounted rotary operating mechanism is a convenient means of disconnecting the Bypass unit from line power for equipment maintenance The MCP must be in the OFF position in order to open the enclosure door Service and troubleshooting personnel are provided with a means to defeat this door interlock The rotary handle provides trip indication and can be padlocked in the OFF position CAUTION cO Only qualified service personnel should use the defeater feature A Defeater Fig 1 5 MCP Handle Positions RESET LOCK OFF TRIP ON Shown in the ON position Physical Installation 1 12 Fig 1 6 MCP Handle Positions Shown OFF With Padlock B Internal Bypass Panel Line Customer Wiring Connections Terminal Strip 1 PCB A2 rive Digital Operator Load Connections Overload Ja Relay PCB A3 Control Power e d Transformer ontactor ypass K1 Contactor Contactor K3 K2 Fig 1 7 Internal Bypass Panel Physical Installation 1
247. etection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault LL At RUN Fit Undertorque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault Torque Detection Level 1 Sets the overtorque undertorque detection level as a 15 02 Load Det Lvl percentage of Drive rated current 016 300 6 Programming Torque Detection Time 1 Sets the length of time an overtorque undertorque L6 03 d condition must exist before being recognized by the 0 0 to 10 0 10 0sec Programming Loss Det Time A Drive OL3 is then displayed Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Description Parameters A 21 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Setting Factory Menu Range Setting Location Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Description Hdwe Protection Internal Dynamic Braking Resis 0 Not Provided L8 01 tor Protection Selection 1 Provided 1 0 Programming DB Resistor Prot When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set Overheat Pre Alarm Level MP 5 5 Dara 2 2 ala 50 to 130 9 18 02 OH Pre Alarm Lvl parameter an overheat pre alarm OH will 95 C Drive Operation upon OH Pre Alarm Detection 0 Ramp to Stop Decel Time C1 02 1 Coast to Stop Overheat Pre Alarm Operation 2 Fast Stop Decel Time 1 09 2 3 Alarm Only L8 03 Selection P s 0to4 4 Programming OH Pre Alarm Sel 0 to 2 is recognized as fault detection a
248. ether require an increase in the size of the E7 Bypass Enclosure Contact the factory if all three options are required Options D 2 Motor OR or A 2 Motor AND for 75 Hp and 100 Hp or for 200 Hp and 250 Hp require the next size enclosure Note 8 Heat sink mounted externally varies the depth dimension depending on the drive size Depth will not exceed dimension shown Note 9 All options are available in this size enclosure except options D 2 Motor or A 2 Motor AND for 200 Hp and 250 Hp require the next size enclosure Physical Installation 1 6 Confirmations upon Delivery Receiving Checks Check the following items as soon as the Drive and Bypass unit is delivered Table 1 5 Checks Item Method Has the correct model of Bypass unit been Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Bypass unit delivered Reconcile with packing slip and or order information Inspect the entire exterior of the Bypass unit to see if there are any dents i i 9 IS the scratches other damage resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components loose Use a screwdriver or the appropriate tool to check for tightness If you find any irregularities in the above items contact the shipping company the distributor or representative you purchased the Bypass unit from or your Yaskawa office immediately The Bypass unit is thoroughly tested at the factory
249. f the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped If the motor rotates even when the Drive is stopped the DC injection braking may be insufficient If the motor continues operating at low speed without completely stopping after a stop has been executed it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating the motor enough Adjust the DC injection braking as follows Increase the parameter b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop setting ncrease the parameter b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current setting If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started or Stalls Generation of OV main circuit voltage and stalling can occur if a motor is turning when it is started and the DC injection brak ing is insufficient This can be prevented by slowing motor rotation by DC injection braking before starting Increase parameter b2 03 DC injection braking time at start setting If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User Speed Command Input B The Speed Command is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function is used the output frequency cannot be set within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency parameters d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width parameter d3 04 settings are suitable B The frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula Freq Ref Upper Lim
250. f there are not any parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings then the display will state None Modified Otherwise use the increase and decrease keys to scroll through the Modified Constants Parameters list Auto Tuning Menu For E7 Bypass units Auto Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software Part Number DWST616 C2 A free download from www drives com This menu is used to auto tune the Drive in order to utilize the bi directional speed search feature Follow the key operations below to access the Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE A TUNE Mtr Rated Power MENU Main Menu gt gt 4 Auto Tuning 0 00 650 00 x5 Use and keys to scroll through the Auto Tuning parameter list Auto Tuning Parameters T1 02 Mtr Rated Power T1 04 Rated Current Control Panel 3 15 Example of Changing a Parameter Table 3 13 provides an example of how to change parameter C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 from 30 sec to 40 sec Table 3 13 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu Digital Operator Display Description DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref na ui g The Drive is first powered up 01 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 00A Main Menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Operation Main Menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Quick Setting menu Main Menu Press the MENU key to s
251. fer the motor operation from Drive to Bypass in the event of a Drive fault When the Drive fault condition has cleared this function is reset by moving the circuit breaker to the OFF position waiting for the keypad to go blank then switching back to the DRIVE position Before selecting this function in fan applications care must be taken to ensure that the duct work is IMPORTANT designed to handle the pressure resulting from full speed operation with the VAV terminal unit dampers at minimum position or closed Remote Transfer to Bypass When selected switch 104 this function allows a contact closure from a BAS between terminals 25 and 26 of TBI to transfer motor operation from Drive mode to Bypass mode This remote tranfer to Bypass function overrides the DRIVE BYPASS manual switch Slide Switches CNT OPE S101 1 PCB Jumpers Fig 1 9 Printed Circuit Board A2 Physical Installation 1 16 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Bypass Unit 30 HP and Below 480 VAC 15 HP and Below 208V 240V
252. figuration The E7 User s Manual and the E7 MODBUS Technical Manual provide a reference to E7 Drive parameters and their respective Drive addresses Communications D 25 Note Communications D 26 Appendix E Peripheral Devices This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and peripheral devices Drive Input Fuse Selection for 121 2 General Peripheral Devices 4 Magnetic Contactor acide 4 eei ou hated to 4 NOISE TIEN e b CM e inset 4 Peripheral Devices E 1 Drive Input Fuse Selection for 121 Protection AII E7 Drive models have UL and CSA evaluated motor overload protection built in Motor overload protection is also provided in accordance with the NEC and CEC Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required In order to provide adequate Drive rt protection and comply with UL CSA NEC and CEC branch circuit short circuit protection requirements select one of the fuses listed below Table E 1 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection 200V Series Drive Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2 ModelNo CIMR E7 Model No Rating Model No Model No Ferraz A60Q12 2 600V 12A Ferraz A070GRBO006T13 700V 6A Bussmann FWH 20A14F 500V 20A Ferraz A60Q1
253. figured as a Zero Speed signal 2 0 1 Zero Speed DC injection E Output Frequency Fig 5 6 DC Injection Braking During Stopping B b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 5096 The level of DC Injection Braking Current affects the strength of the magnetic field attempting to lock the motor shaft Increasing the level of current will increase the amount of heat generated by the motor windings and should only be increased to the level necessary to hold the motor shaft DC Injection current is set in percentage of Drive rated output current Drive rated out put current is stated on the Drive nameplate Programming 5 16 B b2 03 DC Injection Braking Time at Start b2 04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop Setting Range 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Factory Default b2 03 5 00 Seconds b2 04 0 00 Seconds b2 03 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 The Drive can be programmed to automatically DC Inject for a predetermined amount of time prior to accelerating to speed b2 03 and or at the end of a Ramp to stop b2 04 Parameter b2 03 can be used to stop a rotating motor prior to attempting acceleration i e a wind milling fan If DC Injection braking at start or Speed Search is not enabled attempting to Drive a spinning motor may cause nuisance tripping Parameter b2 04 can be used to resist any residual motion of the load af
254. for reverse operation Setting parameter b1 04 to either 2 or 3 will change the motor shaft rotation when a Forward Run command is given by exchanging the order of the output phasing The factory default setting of parameter b1 04 is 1 Disabled When b1 04 1 Disabled reverse operation is prohibited and no exchanging of output phasing occurs Drive terminal S2 is a dedicated input for reverse Run Stop B b1 07 Local Remote Run Selection 0 Sake Bern Kus Accept Extrn Run factory default When the Drive is switched between the Local Hand mode the digital operator to the Remote Auto mode by the Hand Off Auto selector switch there is the possibility that a Run command is already present i e a contact closure between terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Parameter b1 07 determines whether the Drive will Ignore the external Run command until it is removed and re instated b1 07 0 Cycle Extern Run OR Accept the already present Run command and immediately begin acceleration to the commanded speed b1 07z 1 Accept Extrn Run When switching from local mode to Auto mode when b1 07 1 Accept Extrn Run the Drive may start IMPORTANT unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery and electrical connections prior to switching between local mode and Auto mode B b1 08 Run Command Selection During Programming o pa Enabled factory default
255. fore normal Drive output will begin again See Figure 5 19 on the following page B 05 25 PI Setpoint Boost Setting Setting Range to 100 Factory Default 0 Just before the Snooze Function is activated the PI Setpoint can be temporarily increased to create an overshoot of the intended PI Setpoint The temporary boost is determined by the PI Setpoint Boost Setting b5 25 Once the temporary boost level is reached or the PI Maximum Boost Time b5 26 is exceeded the Drive output shuts off snoozes and the intended PI Setpoint returns From this point on the Snooze Function operates normally and the Drive output returns when the feedback level drops below b5 24 See Figure 5 19 on the following page Programming 5 35 B b5 26 PI Maximum Boost Time Setting Range 0 to 3600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds Associated with the Snooze Function In cases where the temporary PI Setpoint intended PI setpoint PI Setpoint Boost cannot be reached within the PI Maximum Boost Time b5 26 the Setpoint Boost is interrupted and the Drive output is turned off PI Output b5 22 PI Setpoint PI Feedback b5 24 Snooze Function Either Feedback reaches the new boosted setpoint value or the maximum boost time b5 26 is reached Fig 5 19 Snooze Function Operation B b5 27 PI Snooze Feedback Level Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 60 This is a second method of initiating the Snooze Fu
256. function is enabled when L3 01 is 1 or 2 Drive rated current is 100 Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting 0 Disabled The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate C1 02 or C1 04 If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short an OV fault may occur General Purpose The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate C1 02 or C1 04 but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level the output frequency will clamp Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level Intelligent The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w o hitting OV fault level Disabled Drive runs a set frequency A heavy load may cause the Drive to trip on an OC fault Decel Time 1 In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading the Drive will start to decelerate at Decel time 1 C1 02 if the output current exceeds the level set by L3 06 Once the current level drops below the L3 06 level the Drive will accelerate back to its set frequency at the active acceleration rate Decel Time 2 Same as setting 1 except the Drive decelerates at Decel Time 2 C1 04 For 6Hz or less frequency stall prevention function during run is disabled regardless of L3 05 set This function is enabled when L3 05 is 1 or 2 Drive rated current is set as 100 Normally changing the sett
257. g for a Bypass unit is different from that of a Drive installation without the Bypass option Several Drive parameters have been programmed at the factory to meet the needs of the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 below the highlighted parameters are required by the Bypass logic circuit Only those parameters that are changed from the Drive default are listed Table 5 1 Bypass Parameter Settings NEL INE om g b1 01 TABLE Frequency Reference Selection Selects the speed Reference Source command input source Terminals Run Command Selection During Programming RUN CMD at PRG Selects if run command is accepted in DRIVE Opera Enabled tion menu only or in all menus DC Injection Braking Time At Start Sets the Dcinj Time G Start braking time at Drive start to stop a coasting motor 0 10 before starting Frequency Reference 1 Hand Mode Speed Refer Reference 1 0 60 ence used with serial communication see Table 5 2 and H1 03 Frequency Reference 2 Hand Mode Speed Refer Reference 2 0 60 ence used without serial communication see Table 5 2 and H1 03 Frequency Reference 4 Speed Reference used with Reference 4 0 60 d1 02 serial communication loss and H5 04 4 Run at d1 04 41 04 1 01 208 240 240 VOLTS Input Voltage Setting Set to the nominal Voltage Set Input Voltage range or 480 480 ting for the incoming line F6 01 O
258. gister are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following table shows message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Drive Command Message Response Message Response Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Start Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H Address Lower 20H Ist storage Higher 00H CRC 16 Higher FIH Quantity Higher 00H register Lower 65H Lower 31H Lower 04H Next storage Higher 00H Higher 45H register Lower 00H CRC 16 Lower FOH Next storage Higher 00H register Lower 00H Nextstorage Higher 01H register Lower FAH Higher AFH CRC 16 Lower 82H Fig D 6 Function Code 03H Message Example Write In Single Holding Register 06H Command Message Response Message Response Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 06H Function Code 06H 80H Function Code 86H Register Upper 00H Register Upper 00H Error code 21H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H 16 Upper 82H Setting Upper 00H Setting Upper 00H Lower 78H Data Lower 03H Data Lower 03H CRC 16 Upper 98H CRC 16 Upper 98H Lower OBH Lower OBH
259. grammed to fault e g transducer sensor signal b5 12 2 and the building automation signal is PI Feedback lt PI Feedback Loss Detection not installed correctly or is not Check to ensure the PI Feedback Level b5 13 for the PI Feedback Loss working source is installed and working Detection Time b5 14 properly Remove the motor and run the Drive without the motor Output Ground Fault Check the motor for a phase to GF Drive output grounding current has Motor lead is shorted to round short Ground Fault exceeded 5096 of the Drive rated output ground DCCT defective 6 current Check the output current with a clamp on meter to verify the DCCT reading Feedback Loss Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 6 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display There is a broken wire in the output cable Check the wiring to the motor There is a broken wire in the Check the motor for phase to motor winding ground short tput ph The output terminals were loose LF An open phase occurred at the Drive output Output Phase Loss This fault is detected when output current The motor being used has a Check the motor and Drive capacity less than 5 of the Drive s maximum motor capacity Low impedance motor was used Add additional impedance Parameter E2 03 set incorrectly Adjust E2 03 to a lower value Ensure the valu
260. gramming Manual H1 02 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A terminal S4 input contact closure selects A2 as preset speed 2 speed input S4 must be jumpered to SN The S4 input is jumpered to SN therefore it is always closed H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1 01 to select 41 keypad as a preset speed An open contact selects serial com for the run stop command the serial com speed command is overridden by the preset speed above This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 4 Multi Step Ref 2 default A terminal S6 input contact closure selects d1 04 keypad as a speed input S6 must be jumpered to S5 When open the speed command is determined by preset speed 2 This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H5 08 z 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Drive communicates via protocol selected Programming 5 7 B Options J L and P Serial Communications and Pneumatic Pressure Transducer Bypass with serial communication for run stop control and speed monitoring with pneumatic input for speed control Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal from the pneumatic transducer or 4 20 mA applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator
261. he OFF position and waiting for the keypad to go blank CAUTION Before selecting this function in fan applications care must be taken to ensure that the ductwork is designed to handle the pressure resulting from full speed operation with the VAV terminal unit dampers at minimum position or closed Remote Transfer to Bypass When enabled switch S104 this function allows a contact closure from a BAS between terminals TB1 25 and TB1 26 to transfer motor operation from Drive mode to Bypass mode This remote transfer to Bypass function overrides the DRIVE BYPASS manual switch An open contact causes operation in Drive mode and a closed contact results in Bypass mode Contact Closure Inputs and Outputs Customer Safety Interlocks Input Terminals TB1 1 and TB1 2 are used as a Drive or Bypass override from the NC contacts of the customer s safety device series circuit Anytime all the safety device contacts are closed the Drive or Bypass will oper ate When any one of these contacts open the Drive or Bypass will immediately stop operating This input is momentary when a customer safety device contact re closes the Drive or Bypass will return to operation Auto Mode Run Stop Contact Input TB1 3 and TB1 4 are input terminals used for the Run Stop command when in the AUTO mode When these input contacts close the unit will begin running When the contacts reopen the unit will cease running BAS Interlock or Drive Enable Input An open con
262. he difference between the setpoint and the feedback b5 07 Offset Adjustment Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 0 The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses Parameter b5 07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop Parameter b5 07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the PI function in a non differential PI loop Every time the PI output is updated the offset 65 07 is summed with the PI output This can be used to artificially kick start a slow starting PI loop If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation H3 09 16 PI Differential then this parameter is the target set point for the differential to be maintained between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog input 2 Programming 5 30 b5 08 PI Primary Delay Time Constant Setting Range 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Factory Default 0 00 Seconds Acts as a time based filter that lowers the responsiveness of the PI function but also makes the function more stable when the setpoint varies rapidly or when the feedback is noisy E b5 09 Output Level Selection Normal Output direct acting factory default Reverse Output reverse acting Normally the output of the PI function causes an increase in motor speed whenever the measured feedback is below the setpoint This is referred to as direct act
263. he function code specifies commands There are four function codes as shown below Table D 3 Modbus Function Codes Command Message Response Message nee Function Min Max Min Max Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 03H Reading Holding Register Contents 06H Write In Single Holding Register 08H Loopback Test 10H Write In Several Holding Registers Minimum bytes for a normal Response Message error response message is always 5 bytes Data Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address test code for a loopback address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Communications D 5 Error Check Errors are detected during communication using CRC 16 Perform calculations using the following method 1 The factory setting for CRC 16 communication is typically zero but when using the Modbus system set the factory setting to one e g set all 16 bits to 1 2 Calculate CRC 16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data 3 Calculate CRC 16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC 16 in the response messages Communications D 6 Modbus Function Code Details Reading Holding Register Contents 03H Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities The addresses must be consecutive starting from a specified address The data content of the storage re
264. he positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Input Diodes D1 D12 or Q1 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 23 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure Continued 11 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is OL displayed Input Diodes 12 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 D1 D12 or Q1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is OL displayed 13 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is OL displayed The soft charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge the DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive 1 Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage 2 Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale 3 If the resistor is damaged the measured value will be infinite ohms Soft Charge Resistor Check R1 R2 6PCB The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus voltage has reached its normal operating level Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that each contact resistance
265. hen b1 03 0 this parameter determines the amount of time DC Injection is applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp This should be set to a min imum of 0 50 seconds when using HSB This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely Setting Range Factory Setting Menu Location Quick Setting Quick Setting Quick Setting Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming 0 0 to 10 0 to 100 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 to 10 00 0 5Hz 5096 0 00sec f b1 13 1 this parameter instead selects whether the AUTO reference is retained as the new HAND reference setting 0 or the drive will ramp from the AUTO reference to the existing HAND reference setting 1 Parameters A 4 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display P Range Setting Location Motor Pre heat current in of Drive rated current This is used to Motor Pre Heat Current b2 09 keep the motor warm to prevent condensation and is used in 0 to100 096 Programming Preheat Current A i PES conjunction with a digital input data 60 2 10 Motor Pre Heat Current 2 Sets the DC preheat current for multi function output setting 80 0 to 10 5 Prosramimi Preheat Current2 Motor Preheat 2 as a percentage of Motor Rated Current E2 01 d 5
266. hose parameters that are required for Bypass operations and PI control B Function Multi step Ref 1 Setting 3 B Function Multi step Ref 2 Setting 4 The Drive can be programmed to step through four preset speeds and a jog It is also possible to mix in the analog inputs as speed references that can be chosen in place of the first and second preset frequency references The selection of which preset speed will be the active speed command is determined by the status of the digital inputs set for Multi step Ref 1 1 0 3 and Multi step Ref 2 H1 0x 4 Changing the active speed command via the Multi step References can be done while the Drive is running Programming 5 53 The following table details which reference is active based on the status of the Multi step Ref 1 and Multi step Ref 2 inputs Table 5 13 Digital Input Functions Terminal Terminal Terminal Preset Speed Programmed Programmed Programmed as Details as Multi step as Multi step Jog Reference Reference 1 Reference 2 Frequency Reference 1 d1 01 or analog input Al Determined by b1 01 Frequency Reference 3 d1 03 Frequency Reference 4 d1 04 Jog Frequency d1 17 Determined by H3 09 R p ue Ee The Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi step speeds The determination of whether the Preset Speed 1 will be the Frequency Reference 1 d1 01 or the analog input A1 is determined by the status of b1 01 If b1 01 1 Termin
267. hree phases are present and that the input voltage is correct for the system being set up The CONTROL POWER ON STOP and AUTO SEQ and REF LEDs on the control panel should be ON and the display will be in the DRIVE Operation menu showing the active speed command Note If the MOTOR OL SAFETIES FAULT light is ON press the reset button on the motor OLR S10 and check the safety device circuit between terminals TB1 1 and TB1 2 Start Up and Operation 4 4 3 5 6 Various menus are directly available by pressing the MENU key see Chapter 3 When in the DRIVE Operation menu the Drive can accept a run command from local Hand mode or remote Auto mode sources Press the MENU key until the ADV Programming menu is displayed From here any of the parameters can be accessed and changed using the and DATA ENTER keys See Appendix A for a list of programmable features The VERIFY Modified Consts menu can be used to review or modify only those parameters that have been changed from the Drive s default values Using the and DATA ENTER keys as needed verify that the parameters are correct for the Drive and installation conditions See the Factory Parameter Settings printed in Table 1 and Table 2 on page 2 of the Schematic Diagram that was shipped with the unit Consider any additional parameter settings that may be needed by this specific application The Factory Parameter Settings table documents Dri
268. ibration Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration B The application is making unusual sounds The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s natural frequency and the carrier frequency This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation but the machinery vibrates with a high pitched whine To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between an applications characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Drive To prevent this from occurring use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or have the driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration B Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V f control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to a more effective level by raising the value of C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter and then lowering the setting of n1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain B Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I parameters Disable integral T control Reduce the proportional gain P until hunting stops Reintroduce the integral function starting with long integral time values to eliminate the P offset Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 21 I
269. ide REV H1 0X 82 are set simultaneously 5 Multi function input selection fault Terminal P Serial communication option board is not installed option board is installed incorrectly The run com mand selection parameter 1 02 is set to 3 and option board is not installed Run command is selected through serial communication at 2CN but 05 Sequence Select q option board is not installed V f parameter settings are not set correctly OPE10 V f Ptrn Setting V f data setting fault Carrier frequency data setting fault Carrier frequency proportional gain C6 05 gt 6 and C6 04 gt C6 03 Upper lower limit error of C6 03 to 5 0kHz OPE11 CarrFrq On Delay Parameter setting incorrect Verify program settings H1 01 H1 05 Verify that the board is installed Remove power to the Drive and connect the option board once more Check parameters E1 04 1 11 A minimum frequency voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency voltage Check the program settings and correct the errors ERR Power supply is turned OFF Cycle power off and on to Drive EEPROM R W Err EEPROM Wite Parameter is reset repeatedly Do a factory initialization A1 03 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 14 Auto Tuning Faults Auto tuning faults are shown below When the following faults are detected the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor co
270. ied to the square root of the feedback 0 00 to 2 00 1 00 Programming PI Fb SqRt Gain n Output Square Root T b5 30 Monitor Selection Y Disave 1 0 Programming PI Out Moni SqRt Sets units for b5 19 U1 24 01 38 WC InchOfWater PSEIb SqrInch GPM Gallons Min F DegFahrenheit CFM Cubic ft Min CMH Cubic M Hr Oto 1l 0 pane LPH Liters Hr LPS Liters Sec Bar Bar Pa Pascals 10 C DegCelsius 11 Mtr Meters Energy Saving Sa Energy Saving Control Energy Savings function enable disable selection Selection 0 Disabled 1 0 Quick Setting Energy Save Sel 1 Enabled Energy Saving Coefficient 0 010 kVA b8 04 Value 655 00 Dependent Programming Energy Save COEF Power Detection Filter Time b8 05 kW Filter Time Used to fine tune the energy savings function 0 to 2000 Search Operation Voltage b8 06 Limit 0 to 100 096 Programming Search V Limit Accel Decel ITE 01 Acceleration Time 1 30 0sec Accel Time 1 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency Quick Setting m Deceleration d Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero 0 0 30 0 Quick Setting Decel Time 1 to 1 03 Acceleration Time 2 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when 6000 0 30 0sec Prost Accel Time 2 selected via a multi function input 1 04 Deceleration Time 2 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequ
271. ing for technical support please have the following materials available e The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this Complete nameplate information from the Drive and the motor Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is equal to or greater than Motor Nameplate amps Alist with your parameter settings sketch of the electrical power train from AC line to motor including filters and disconnects Field Service Start Up Assistance Factory Repair Replacement Parts and Other Support Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs Technical Training Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers at customer sites and via the internet For information visit www drives com or call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the phone menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 4 for Product Training Support in Other Countries Yaskawa is a multi national company with offices and service representation around the world To obtain support always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 3 Fault Detection When the Drive detects a fault the fault information is displayed on the digital operator the fault contact closes and the motor coasts to stop However a fault with selectable stopping method will operate according to the st
272. ing is not required Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting Parameters A 20 Setting Range Programming 30 to 200 12096 Location Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Setting Factory Menu Range Setting Location Ref Detection ay Speed Agreement Detection Level 14 01 Spd Level L4 01 and L4 02 are used in conjunction with the 0 0 to 200 0 Sasa A TD multi function outputs H2 01and H2 02 as a setpoint PECCA eT Cee aca CLONE VI and hysteresis for a contact closure amini Determines how the Drive will react when the fre quency reference is lost Frequency Reference Loss 0 Stop Disabled Drive will not run at the frequency Detection Selection reference 1 1 Programming Ref Loss Sel 1 Enabled of PrevRef Drive will run at a percentage L4 06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost If Frequency Reference loss function is enabled Frequency Reference Level at T L4 05 1 and Frequency Reference is lost then the Loss Frequency 5 0 to 100 0 80 0 Programming Fref at Floss Drive will run at reduced frequency reference deter mined by L4 06 New Fref Fref at time of loss x L4 06 Fault Restart a Number of Auto Restart Attempts Determines the number of times the Drive will perform 5 a Num of Restarts an automatic restart 010 10 Quick Setting Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt Auto Restart O
273. ing response However if b5 09 1 Reverse Output the output of the PI function causes the motor to slow down when the feedback is below the setpoint This is referred to as reverse acting response B b5 10 PI Output Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 25 0 Factory Default 1 0 Applies a multiplier to the output of the PI function Using the gain can be helpful when the PI function is used to trim the Speed Command Increasing b5 10 causes the PI function to have a greater regulating affect on the speed command B b5 11 PI Reverse Selection Seg Ud c 0 Limit factory default Parameter 65 11 determines whether reverse operation is allowed while using PI control b5 0140 The factory default setting will not allow the Drive to run in reverse This parameter does not need to be changed from factory default for a majority of HVAC applications Refer also to b5 09 B b5 12 Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Seting aa Disabled factory default Loss of feedback can cause problems to a PI application The Drive can be programmed to turn on a digital output whenever a loss of feedback occurs Feedback Loss Detection is turned on by b5 12 When b5 12 1 Alarm the Drive acknowledges the loss of feedback without stopping or turning on the fault output If b5 12 2 Fault the Drive coasts to a stop and turns on the fault output if the feedback is determined to be lost Programming 5 31
274. input of the Check the input voltage Drive screws at Tighten the terminal screws R L1 S L2 or T L3 E T Momentary power Check the input voltage occurred ue voltage fluctuation too Check the input voltage Input Phase Loss Verify parameter L8 06 is set Drive input power supply has an open phase correctly per the KVA tables on or has a large imbalance of input voltage pages B 4 and B 5 Adjust L8 06 according to your application The higher the value the less sensitive it becomes CAUTION Changing this parameter from the factory default setting may cause Drive failure and void the product warranty Consult the factory for application assistance Remove power from the Drive PF Input Pha Loss Parameter L8 06 value is set incorrectly i Perform the checks without PUF DC Bus Fuse Shorted output transistor s or power in Table 6 6 DC Bus Fuse Open Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened terminals Replace the shorted component s Verify dynamic braking duty Dynamic Braking Resistor Overhauling load extended cycle Replace the defective fuse RH dynamic braking duty cycle DynBrk Resistor The protection of the dynamic braking defective dynamic braking Montor D puxvolaem resistor based on setting of L8 01 resistor Replace dynamic braking resistor Cycle power off and on to the Shorted dynamic braking Drive RR Dynamic Braking Transistor transistor high DC bus 7 3 3 5 5 Replac
275. installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive heatsink the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel B Removing the Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan 2 Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 3 Pullout the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector See Figure 7 3 4 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in the direction of arrows 3 and remove the fan cover from the fan Power MM Connector Fig 7 3 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure B Installing the Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Drive 2 Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the Drive Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive Maintenance 7 6 B Drive Models CIMR __ 2022 thru 2110 30 HP and above 208V 240V and 4024 thru 4300 40 HP and above 480V A cooling fan assembly is attached to the top inside the Drive The cooling fan assembly includes the heat sink cooling fans and the internal cooling fan The cooling fan s can be
276. ipated by the drive at full load with all standard options available inside the enclosure Drive heat sink losses are All standard options are available in this size enclosure except options E RFI Filter and K 5 Output Reactor Options E and K require the add on All options are available in this size enclosure except E RFI Filter R 3 Line Reactor and K 5 Output Reactor Only option E combined with either option R or option K can be installed in the add on enclosure Options R and K together require an increase in the size of the E7 Bypass Enclosure Contact the factory if all three options are required Options D 2 Motor or A 2 Motor AND for 30 Hp and 40 Hp or for 75 Hp and 100 Hp require the next size enclosure size enclosure Heat sink mounted externally varies the depth dimension depending on the drive size Depth will not exceed dimension shown All options are available in this size enclosure except options D 2 Motor OR or 2 Motor AND for 75 Hp and 100 Hp require the next Physical Installation 1 4 Table 1 3 240 230V Enclosure Data i i Enclosure Dimensions w Add on Weight of Input Drive Bypass NEC Heat Enclosure Dimensions Weight NEM NERA ce Electrical Volts Model Model ETA 110 Loss NEMA 1 amp NEMA 12 FVFF of
277. irection in Bypass mode Run the motor in Bypass by placing the HAND OFF AUTO switch in HAND Record all the phase voltages and currents at this time Select the OFF position ofthe HAND OFF AUTO switch and place the BYPASS DRIVE switch in DRIVE Turn to the HAND position and scroll the Speed Command to 60 HZ operation Monitor the voltages and currents in each of the output phases at full speed to make sure the voltages are balanced and the currents are within the motor nameplate rating during accel stable speed and decel If this application requires the Drive to operate in PI mode see Chapter 5 For fan applications with the HAND OFF AUTO switch set to AUTO have the building automation system give the Drive a run command and a speed command Put the BYPASS DRIVE switch into BYPASS and let the load speed up and stabilize Then move the switch to DRIVE Observe if the DC braking is enough to stop the fan in the time period set in parameter b2 03 5 sec factory setting If not set this parameter to its maximum setting which is 10 0 seconds If this is not enough slowly increase the braking current setting parameter b2 02 but do not go above 90 to protect the Drive output devices For serial communication refer to TM E7 21 APOGEE FLN and TM E7 22 Metasys N2 Start Up and Operation 4 7 Bypass Operation Description For manual switch positions control inputs and switch selectable functions The Bypass has two modes of
278. isplay Scaling 5 77 A 23 Drive Operation when Disconnected 5 80 A 24 Faults Errors eene 6 4 6 8 6 15 KEYS ists eat ARI ente retis 3 3 LCD Brightness Adjustment 222222 A 24 cia dees 3 2 3 4 3 6 Mode Indicators ne orders 3 4 Mode Selection esee 1 12 Monitor Selection At 5 76 Preventive Maintenance eese 7 3 Replacement Part 5 eee tenis F 6 Write protected 5 82 6 15 A 25 Digital Outputs Connection Diagram sese 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals esses 2 15 Pararetersz Xa ehem ena 5 57 A 15 Dimensions Enclosure S12e esee RE REP tees 1 4 Mounting etre 1 17 to 1 23 Diode Module 7 2 Resistance Test eec 6 22 6 23 DIP Switchi S oit rrt tmt 2 16 5 60 D 3 Displaying Faults 1 11 3 6 3 7 3 11 3 12 A 28 A 29 1 11 1 12 2 2 Down Arrow Key 3 3 6 16 DRIVE BYPASS Selector Switch 1 12 4 4 amp 3 8 3 10 Drive Delay Time etes 5 16 A 4 Drive Mode Troubleshooting sess 6 16 Diye REMOVING ete eee rete 7 9 Drive Replacing eese 7 1
279. ist Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Frequency reference speed command monitor when in auto Frequency Reference 01 mode frequency reference speed command setting location Frequency Ref Description when in hand mode Units changeable via 01 03 put Frequency Output frequency speed monitor Units changeable Freq via 01 03 Output Current mum Displays Drive input terminal status 0 0 0 0 0 0 010 1 FWD run Terminal S1 is ON 1 REV run Terminal S2 is ON 1 Multi function input 1 Input Terminal Status Termina S3 18 ON Input Term Sts 1 Multi function input 2 Terminal S4 is ON Multi function input 3 Terminal S5 is ON Multi function input 4 Terminal S6 is ON Multi function input 5 Terminal S7 is ON Output terminal ON OFF Check 0100101001010 Multi function Contact 1 output 1 Terminal 1 2 is ON Multi function Contact 2 Output Terminal Status output 1 Terminal P1 is U1 11 ON Output Term Sts Multi function contact out put 3 Terminal P2 is ON Not used __________________ Fault output Terminal Ma AB MC is ON During running During zero speed During reverse During reset signal input Drive Operation Status 01 12 Int Ctl Sts 1 During spe
280. it Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 x Frequency Reference Upper Limit d2 01 100 Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 22 Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Before attempting any troubleshooting checks make sure that the three phase power is disconnected and locked out With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus volt age is below 10Vdc To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltme ter set to the highest scale Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure Set the digital multi meter to its highest VDC scale Measure between 1 and for the following check Place the positive red meter lead on 1 Place the negative black meter lead on If the measured voltag
281. ither the Gate Drive Board 3PCB or the Tap Change Board 8PCB If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open then the 230 240VAC cooling fans may be defective 1 Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Cooling Fan Fuse 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse If the fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 26 Drive Date Stamp Information This information is used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it is within its warranty period The date stamp is located on the lower right side of the Drive Fig 6 1 Date Stamp Location PRON 00 722 4 Manufacture Date Er T Inspector Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 27 Notes Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 28 Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive and Bypass unit Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper maintenance to maintain overall performance ee 2 Periodic Inspection aee p cito od octets di se desee 2 Preventive Maintenance 3 Replacing Control Panel indicating lights or selector switches 4 Replacing The Relay Controller
282. l 0 Disabled RTS is always on 1 Enabled RTS turns on only when sending Selects the communication protocol 0 Memobus Modbus 1 N2 Metasys 2 FLN APOGEE Determines how long communications must be lost before a fault is annunciated Works in conjunction with parameters H5 05 and H5 04 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running After these parameters are changed Drive power mus t be cycled before the changes will take effect Parameters A 18 Parameter No L2 01 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L2 05 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Motor Overload Protection Selection MOL Fault Select Motor Overload Protection Time MOL Time Const Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection Mtr OH Alarm Sel Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection Mtr OH Fault Sel Motor Temperature Input Filter Time Mtr Temp Filter Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection PwrL Selection Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time PwrL Ridethru t Momentary Power Loss Mini mum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblock t Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V F Ramp t Undervoltage Detection Level PUV Det Level Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Motor Overload Enables or disables the motor thermal overload protection 0 Disabled 1 Std Fan Cooled Enabled 2 Std Blower Cooled 3 Vector Motor Determines how much time will elapse prior to a motor ove
283. l error 1 Fault set using H1 01 Bit 5 Error Fault 1 Reset command set using H1 02 Bits 6 toB Not used Bit C Multi function digital input terminal 55 input Bit D Multi function digital input terminal S6 input BitE Multi function digital input terminal 57 input Bit F Not used 0002H Frequency reference 30000 100 Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously B Enter Command When writing parameters to the Drive from the PLC using Modbus communication the parameters are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Drive To enable these parameters in the parameter data area use the Enter command There are two types of Enter commands Enter commands that enable parameter data in RAM 2 Enter commands that write data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Drive at the same time as enabling data in RAM The following table shows the Enter command data Enter command data can only be written The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H Table D 7 Enter Command 0900H Contents Write parameter data to EEPROM 0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100 000 Do not frequently IMPORTANT execute Enter commands 0900H written to EEPROM The Enter comma
284. le customer interface to control both Drive and Bypass circuits Some of these terminals are therefore not available for other field use Physical Installation 1 14 Drive Multi function input terminals Terminal receives the Drive run command from the 120 VAC relay logic circuit Terminal S3 receives the Drive run enable signal from the 120 VAC relay logic circuit Terminal S receives the Drive local remote command from the 120 VAC relay logic circuit via the HAND OFE AUTO and NORMAL TEST selector switch Drive Multi function output terminals Terminals M and are a normally open Drive run relay contact used to communicate the Drive operational mode to the 120 VAC relay logic circuit Terminals and M are a normally open serial com run status relay contact used to communicate the Drive operational state to the 120 VAC relay logic circuit Terminals and M are a normally open Drive fault relay contact used to communicate the Drive fault status to the 120 VAC relay logic circuit B PCB Jumpers explained The S101 Berg pin jumper on the control relay logic PCB A2 is not for field use It is employed only in the factory to enable the 2 motor OR configured option It is removed when this option is present and must be in place when this option is not part of the unit specification See Figure 1 9 The S102 Berg pin jumper on the control relay logic PCB A2 is not for field use It is employed only in the factory to enabl
285. lect 02 06 0 Disabled then remove the digital operator keypad and attach the DriveWizard cable in its place Programming 5 84 T1 Auto Tuning Auto Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software Part Number DWST616 C2 Available by download from www drives com B T1 02 Motor Rated Power Setting Range 0 00 to 650 00 kW Factory Default Model Dependent B T1 04 Motor Rated Current Setting Range Model Dependent Factory Default Model Dependent Auto tuning is recommended to achieve optimum performance In addition the Drive requires Line To Line Resistance auto tuning before it can properly perform the Estimated Speed Search method This method of speed search allows for bi directional speed search The T1 parameters are found under the Auto Tuning menu B Auto Tuning Using DriveWizard DriveWizard is a PC software program designed to provide the tools necessary to handle Drive installation as well as parameter record keeping and maintenance As such it provides an Auto Tuning method for Drives in Bypass units The Auto Tuning function tunes the Drive setup to the characteristics of the specific motor to which it is applied Auto Tuning is essential if bi directional Speed Search is required and enabled for the application DriveWizard can be obtained either through CD or www Drives com Follow the installation procedures provided with the software With the DriveWizard software loaded onto a
286. led closed Drive enabled are to be used such as a damper end switch or occupied cycle timer this jumper is removed and the enabling contacts wired between terminals 5 and 6 Fig 2 6 TB1 Control Terminal Locations All Models Electrical Installation 2 8 Annunciation Contacts Contacts for customer use are provided and wired to TB1 as follows for use as annunciators of Bypass unit operation All are amp at 120 VAC contacts Table 2 4 Annunciation Contacts Motor OL Safeties Fault 14 15 16 Bypass Run 9 10 Drive Run 7 8 Drive Fault 11 12 13 The Motor OL Safeties Fault and Drive Fault annunciation contacts sequence of operation is shown below Motor OL Customer Drive Fault Safeties Fault 13 16 12 15 Power Off 11 14 15 Power on no drive fault p and MOL CS fault 11 14 amp d 13 16 Q Q OS 12 15 ower on drive fault Ame O and MOL CS fault 11 14 Electrical Installation 2 9 Damper Control Circuit terminals 19 and 20 are provided to power a customer supplied 120 VAC relay electric actuator electro pneumatic solenoid air valve employed to control a pneumatic damper actuator typically for outdoor air intake damper interlock The power rating of the connected device should be no more than 40 VA continuous and 70 VA inrush An off command from the H O A switch or a safety device trip out will immedia
287. liar to the operator locating the parameter to change the operator language can be done by performing the following 1 Press MENU key until the ADV MENU is shown in the upper left corner of the digital operator 2 Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the programming menu The first parameter shown is A1 00 Select Language 3 Press the DATA ENTER key again and use the INCREASE and DECREASE arrow keys to choose the preferred language from the list below English Japanese Deutsch German Francais French Italiano Italian Espa ol Spanish amp Portugu s Portuguese B A1 01 Access Level Selection Seting Advanced Level factory default A1 01 can be used to allow access to and permission to change all Drive parameters If the Drive is programmed for Operation Only 1 01 0 Operation Only then only the OPERATION and the PROGRAMMING menus are accessible Within the PROGRAMMING menu only parameters 1 01 and 1 04 are adjustable Programming 5 9 If A1 01 is configured for Advanced Access A1 01 2 Advanced Level then all menus and all parameters are shown If the Access Level Selection is set to Advanced all parameters should be adjustable unless 1 The Drive parameters are password protected A1 04 which will prevent access to A1 00 through A1 03 and all A2 parameters 2 A digital input has been configured as a Program Lockout H1 0X 1B is active
288. load e OL3 Overtorque OL2 Drive Overload e OV DC Bus Overvoltage e Ground Fault e UVI DC Bus Undervoltage e OHI Overheat In order for auto restart after a UV1 fault Momentary Power Loss Ride thru must be enabled L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru or 2 CPU Power Active Setting H2 01 or H2 02 equal to configures a digital output as Restart Enabled to signal if an impending auto restart is possible Programming 5 70 L6 Torque Detection B L6 01 Torque Detection Selection 1 9 1 OLespAme Am 3 OLesMAme Wt 3 ULeSpAse Am 6 UtsRm Am 16 02 Torque Detection Level 1 Setting Range 0 to 300 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 15 of Drive rated output current 16 03 Torque Detection Time 1 Setting Range 0 0 to 10 0 Seconds Factory Default 10 0 Seconds The Drive can be programmed to indicate when either an overtorque or an undertorque conditions exist A digital output must be programmed for Torque Detection H2 01 H2 02 B Trq Det 1 N O or 17 Det 1 N C A warning of an overtorque condition can indicate a jam and an undertorque condition can indicate a broken belt no water in a pump or other loss of load To configure Torque Detection requires the following decisions 1 Do you wish to check for an overtorque condition or an undertorque condition 2 Do yo
289. loaded Designed to protect the Drive The voltage of the V F pattern Review the V F pattern is high parameters 1 01 thru 1 13 The size of the Drive is small Change to a larger size Drive Ensure the values in L6 02 and OL3 Overtorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Drive output current gt L6 02 for more than Motor is overloaded Overtorque Det 1 the time in L6 03 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Digital Operator Connection Fault S Attach the digital operator M The digital operator is not mn OPR The Drive will stop if the digital operator is o Check the digital operator AA attached or the digital opera Oper Disconnect removed when the Drive is commanded to connector h tor connector is broken a TOET E as ta Verify the setting of 02 06 Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications DC Bus Overvoltage coo OV D The deceleration time is set Extend the time in C1 02 DC Bus Overvolt 208 240 Trip point is gt 400Vdc xtend the time in 1 02 480VAC Trip point is 2 800Vdc Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input to the Drive High input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 Remove the power factor correction capacitors Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 8 Table 61 Fault Displays and Processing Digital S one Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display Open phase on the
290. ltage For 480V class units the value is twice that of 240V class units Programming 5 49 Table 5 11 V f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 50 to 150 HP for 230V Continued Parameter No E1 03 V f Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Hz Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A Min Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Mid Output Frequency B Mid Output Voltage B Base Voltage For 480V class units the value is twice that of 240V class units E2 Motor Setup B E2 01 Motor Rated Current Setting Range Model Dependent see appendix B Factory Default Model Dependent The Motor Rated Current parameter E2 01 is necessary information for the Drive motor protection function The motor overload protection parameter L1 01 is enabled by default In addition motor rated current is used by the torque compensation function to insure optimum torque production Set E2 01 to the full load amps FLA value stamped on the motor s nameplate During Auto tuning it is required for the operator to enter the motor rated current in parameter T1 04 on the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 04 will be also written into E2 01 For applications employing a Drive that is oversized for the motor E2 01 may be set as low as 10
291. meter to the R x 1 scale 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse If the fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Soft Charge Contactor DC Bus Fuse F1 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 24 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure Continued The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the motor 1 Seta digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting 2 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 01 012 Expected reading is OL displayed
292. ming 5 38 di Preset References B 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 d1 03 Frequency Reference 3 d1 04 Frequency Reference 4 Setting Range 0 00 to E1 04 Value Factory Default d1 01 10 00 Hz d1 02 6 00 Hz d1 03 0 00 Hz d1 04 40 00 Hz d1 01 d1 02 and d1 04 are special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 A d1 04 41 03 Output d1 02 Spesd d1 01 gt t Closed RUN __ Open d Closed Multi step Reference 1 Input E B i H i Closed Multi step Reference 2 Input 5 Closed Jog Input i i Fig 5 20 Preset Reference Timing Diagram example B 41 17 Jog Frequency Reference Setting Range 0 00 to 1 04 Value Factory Default 6 00 Hz The Drive can be programmed to utilize digital inputs to change between four presets speeds and a jog speed It is a two step process to set the Drive up for preset speeds First d1 01 through d1 04 and d1 17 must be programmed with the desired preset speeds and the desired jog speed respectively Next up to three of the Drive s digital inputs Terminals S3 through 57 need to be programmed via parameters H1 01 to H1 05 and wired to normally open contacts as Multi step Speed Reference 1 Multi step Speed Reference 2 and Jog Frequency Table 5 7 Preset Speed Truth Table
293. monitoring values such as output frequency and output current It is also used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces The Drive may be limited to this menu in order to accept a run command see parameter b1 08 in Chapter 5 and Table 5 1 B U1 Monitor Parameter List Follow the key operations below to access the Operation Menu DRIVE DRIVE Rdy MA xd Frequency Ref Main Menu 0 00 2 Operation U1 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 00A Use and keys to scroll through the U1 Monitor parameter list Control Panel 3 10 B U2 Fault Trace Parameter List After viewing the Monitor parameter list in order to view the Fault Trace parameter list follow the example below DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Monitor Fault Trace Current Fault ESC o1 20 U1 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 004 U2 03 0 00Hz U2 03 0 00Hz Use and keys to scroll through the U2 Fault Trace parameter list 08 U2 14 Elapsed Time 72 U2 DC Bus Voltage Control Panel 3 11 B U3 Fault History Parameter List After viewing the Fault Trace parameter list in order to view the Fault History parameter list follow the example below DRIVE DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Fault Trace Fault History Last Fault ESC mo m None gt U2 03 03 None U3 03 None Use and keys to scroll through the U3 Fault History parameter list U3 15 Elapsed Time 5 Control Panel 3 12
294. motor is stopped the output voltage is removed in order to close the dampers Whenever the Drive or Bypass is running the terminals output 120VAC to power 40VA damper actuator circuit 120VAC Control Power Output Output terminals TB1 21 and TB1 22 are provided to energize additional customer defined control logic circuits A maximum of 100VA control power is available the user must provide the short circuit protection Optional Two Motor OR Selection Input Terminals TB1 23 and 1 24 are used only when the Two Motor OR option is part of the unit These input terminals are used for choosing between motor 1 or motor 2 when the optional MOTOR 1 AUTO MOTOR 2 selector switch is in the AUTO position Start Up and Operation 4 11 Notes Start Up and Operation 4 12 Chapter 5 Programming This Manual contains descriptions of all parameters in the Drive that may be useful in Bypass applications Parameters are listed in alpha numerical order Parameter number and name along with a detailed description and its settings are described on the following pages Bypass Basic Programming Parameters 2 Discussion of Table 5 2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings cedere etc eda Per bine oe o pede pri 5 1 2 9 log Biz Ie e 115 veins 11 D2 DC Braking adn 16 b3 Speed Search ioa ter epi
295. nal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 13 1 Main Fref TA2 Main speed command source Terminal A2 and the Aux speed command source Terminal Al H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Transducer output is 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 2 Aux Reference default Aux Terminal A1 function is set to be a speed command input H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A terminal 55 input contact closure selects Aux Terminal A1 as a preset speed default This input contact is closed when H O A Hand B Options S Speed Pot Bypass with speed potentiometer for speed control Hand mode speed command from speed potentiometer Auto mode speed command input signal 4 20 mA applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant b Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 13 1 Main Fref TA2 Main speed command source Terminal A2 and the Aux speed command source Terminal Al H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 2 Aux Reference default
296. nal block B 61 03 Stopping Method There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the Run command is removed ___ Ramp to Stop factory default DC Injection to Stop 0 Ramp to stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will decelerate the motor to 0 rpm The rate of deceleration is determined by the active deceleration time The factory default Decel Time is in parameter C1 02 Programming 5 12 When the output frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency in b2 01 Default 0 5HZ DC current will be injected in the motor at a level determined by b2 02 50 Default The DC Injection condition will occur for the time specified by b2 04 0 0 Default to establish the end point of the ramp DC injection can be used to insure the motor is at zero rpm prior to the Drive shutting off ON CLOSED Run Command OFF OPEN 100 b2 01 Output Frequency Deceleration Time C1 02 0 48 b2 04 p Fig 5 2 Deceleration to Stop The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula Output Freq at time of stop command Time to Stop x Setting of active Decel Time C1 02 or C1 04 Maximum Frequency El 04 If S Curve characteristics are specified by the Drive programming they will add to the total time to stop 1 Coast to stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast
297. nal fault Normally Closed Always Detected Alarm Only 2E External fault Normally Open During Run Alarm Only 2F External fault Normally Closed During Run Alarm Only 34 PI SFS Cancel 36 Option Inv Sel 2 Selects source of speed command and sequence Closed Option Card Open b1 01 amp b1 02 Motor Preheat Applies current to create heat to avoid condensation Closed Apply amount of current as set in parameter b2 09 Speed Search 1 When closed as a run command is given Drive does a speed search starting at maximum frequency E1 04 Current detection 62 Speed Search 2 When closed as a run command is given Drive does a speed search starting at speed command Current detection 64 Speed Search 3 67 Com Test Mode Used to test RS 485 422 interface 68 High Slip Braking Closed Drive stops using High Slip Braking regardless of run command status 69 Jog2 Closed Drive runs at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 Direction determined by fwd rev input 3 wire control Only 6A Drive Enable Closed Drive will accept run command Open Drive will not run If running Drive will stop per b1 03 Termina 6B Com Inv Sel Selects source of speed command and sequence erminal 57 Function 25 1 05 Selection Closed Serial Communication R R S S Open b1 01 0 to 6E amp b1 02 Terminal 57 Sel 6C Com Inv Sel 2 6D Auto Mode Sel Hand Auto Selection Closed Auto
298. nant loading Table 1 7 Installation Site Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity Plenum Rated NEMA Type 1 amp 12 14 to 104 F 10 to 40 C 95 RH or less no condensation Observe the following precautions when mounting the Bypass unit e Install the Bypass unit in a clean location that is free from oil mist and dust e Install the Bypass unit in an environment where metal shavings oil water or other foreign matter will not get into the Bypass enclosure Install the Bypass unit in a location free from radioactive materials e Install the Bypass unit in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids e Install the Bypass unit in a location without excessive vibration e Install the Bypass unit in a location free from chlorides e Install the Bypass unit in a location not in direct sunlight e Install the Bypass unit on a non combustible surface Physical Installation 1 24 Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Bypass unit should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variations Do not store this Technical Manual or any other documents on the top surface of the Bypass unit they may cover the heat sink cooling air discharge opening and cause the unit to overheat If the Bypass unit is installed in an enclosure such as an electrical control box in an air handling unit use a cooling fan or air conditio
299. nclosure type NEMA1 B NEMA12 FVFF FOR 0 TO 100 AMPS USE 60 75 C COPPER WIRE AND ABOVE 100 AMPS USE 75 C COPPER WIRE Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 296 of the rated voltage Line voltage drop is calculated as follows IMPORTANT 3 Line voltage drop V V3 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 10 Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Electrical Installation 2 3 Cable Length between Drive and Motor The Bypass unit should be installed as close as possible to the motor to minimize the length of load side power cable needed between the Drive and the motor If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase causing the Drive output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this reduce cable length or if necessary adjust the carrier frequency set in C6 02 as shown in Table 2 1
300. nction If the PI feedback level exceeds the PI Snooze Feedback Level b5 27 then the Drive output shuts off Once the PI feedback drops below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level b5 24 then normal Drive and PI operation return Snooze activates if both b5 22 and b5 27 conditions are met There is no time delay for wake up B b5 28 PI Feedback Square Root Function Activation 0 e Disabled factory default If b5 28 1 Enabled the square root of the PI feedback is compared to the PI Setpoint in order to determine appropriate Drive output to properly regulate the system This is helpful in cases where the measured feedback is pressure but the PI loop needs to regulate flow Programming 5 36 B b5 29 PI Square Root Gain Setting Range 0 00 to 2 00 Factory Default 1 00 A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback B b5 30 Output Square Root Monitor Selection co Disabled factory default If the PI Function is regulating the flow of a closed loop system by using a pressure feedback it may be convenient to view the square root of the PI output using monitor U1 37 b8 Energy Savings The energy savings function improves overall system operating efficiency by operating the motor at its highest efficiency This is accomplished by continuously monitoring the motor load and adjusting the motor terminal voltage so that the motor always operates near its rated slip frequency A motor is most
301. nd 3 is recognized as alarm For the fault detection the fault contact operates 4 OH Alarm amp Reduce Continue operation and reduce output frequency by L8 19 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Monitors the DC Bus current ripple and activates when Ph Loss Lvl one of the input phases is lost PF 00050 27 Programming Output Ground Fault Detection Enables and disables Drive output ground fault L8 09 Selection E d 1 Programming Ground Fault Sel 1 Enabled Controls the Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation als eT 0 Fan On Run Mode Fan will operate only when Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Drive is running and for L8 11 seconds after RUN is L8 10 Selection removed 1 Programming Fan set 1 Fan Always On Cooling fan operates whenever Drive is powered up Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation When L8 10 0 this parameter sets a delay time for Delay Time Cooling Fan de energization after the run command is 0 to 300 300sec Programming Fan Delay Time removed Ambient Temperature Settin When the Drive is installed in an ambient temperature Ambient ra 8 exceeding its rating Drive overload OL2 protection 45 to 60 C 45 C Programming p level is reduced This parameter assists in protecting the output transistor OL2 Characteristic Selection at junctions from overheating when output current is high Low Speeds and output frequency is low 1 Programming OL2 Sel L Spd 0 Disabled 1 Enabled L8 18 is active Soft CLA
302. nd registers are write only Consequently if reading these registers the register address will become invalid Error code 02H Communications D 12 B Error Codes The following table shows Modbus communication error codes Table D 8 Error Codes Contents Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0000H 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16 n write mode the number of data packets in the message is not No of packets x 2 Data setting error Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run Attempting to write via Enter commands during run Attempting to write parameters other than A1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when a CPF03 defective EEPROM fault has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during main circuit undervoltage UV fault Writing parameters to the Drive during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing via Enter commands during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing erro
303. ndicating lights or selector switches Control panel pilot lights are modular replaceable LEDs with a MTBF of 100 000 hours LED type indicating lights are pro vided to improve the reliability well beyond that of incandescent bulbs To remove and replace the LEDs remove 9 screws from the Bypass Operator Interface PCB A3 located on the inside of the enclosure door mounted Operator Panel PCB Mounting Screws 9 places Fig 7 1 Removing PCB A3 PCB A3 will then lift off exposing the LEDs and selector switch assemblies Remove the ribbon cable connection from CN203 as well as marking and disconnecting the terminations from CN204 CN205 CN206 and CN207 if required to gain access to the LED side of the circuit board A3 To replace an individual LED slide a small blade screwdriver beside the LED module and the retaining tabs on the socket that is soldered to the circuit board see Figure 7 2 Maintenance 7 4 Twist the screwdriver just sufficiently to release the retainers while rocking the LED module in the socket Care must be exercised to avoid breaking off the delicate retaining tabs If retaining tabs break off then the complete PCB A3 should be replaced see appendix F for part numbers LED Module LED Socket LED Module Retaining Tabs Fig 7 2 Removing an LED The new LED module see appendix F for part numbers is simply pushed firmly into the same location on the socket until the retainers snap into place Th
304. nect the cable from the Drive to the front panel mounted Digital Operator at the Drive end of the cable If a LonWorks option card is present leave all the wires connected to the option card disconnect the option card ground wire at the Drive end and remove the option card from the Drive Leave the field control wiring connected to the removable control terminal card and remove the control terminal card from the Drive Two captive screws on either side of the terminal card must be loosened the ground wire removed from terminal FE and the terminal card must be separated from the control circuit board by sliding the terminal card off its Connector CN8 Do this carefully by pulling down evenly on both sides of the terminal card See also page 7 9 for detailed instructions i Connector CN8 Se ORE SMU S FE Captive Mounting Captive Screw lounting Fig 7 7 Removable Control Terminal Card The power terminal block for the three phase input and output power connections is not removable All connections to the power terminal block must be removed Do not overlook the Drive ground wire It is behind other wiring and will probably be removed last Observe the wire and terminal markings for all power wires to ensure correct re wiring to the new Drive The wires are labeled from the factory but re label any wires where labels may no longer be legible Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation and the schematic diagram that was
305. ner to maintain the Bypass unit internal air temperature below 113 F 45 C Protecting the Bypass Unit from Foreign Matter During Bypass unit installation and project construction it is possible to have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the Bypass unit To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Bypass unit place a temporary cover over the unit Always remove the temporary cover from the Bypass unit before start up Otherwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Bypass unit to overheat Physical Installation 1 25 Installation Orientation and Enclosure Considerations Install the Bypass unit vertically so as not to reduce the cooling efficiency When installing the Bypass unit always provide the recommended installation clearances to allow normal heat dissipation When preparing to mount the unit lift it by the base or lifting rings when provided never by the enclosure door For effective cooling and proper maintenance the wall mounted units must be installed on a flat non flammable vertical surface using four mounting screws To mount units employing the add on box a hex head mounting screw and socket wrench will be required for the lower left mounting hole location See Figure 1 15 For all units the MCP handle should be in the OFF position to open the enclosure door The wall mount units have two full turn fasteners CCW to open that require a flat blade screwdriver
306. nload these values to the Drive Information and instructions for DriveWizard are available at www drives com 3 Page 2 of the Bypass Schematic has a table of Drive Factory Parameter Settings for Bypass applications of drives The Bypass schematic was delivered as part of the original Bypass assembly and is re produced in Chapter 2 of this manual These settings can be manually entered into the new Drive after setting the access level in parameter 1 01 to advanced 2 Advanced Level Using one of these methods load the Drive with the Bypass factory default settings and verify correct Bypass operation Maintenance 7 12 Appendix A Parameters This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names along with a description of each Also below the parameter name in bold type is the abbreviated name as it appears on the digital operator display keypad Parameter ori dee e 2 Monitor LIS TEES 26 Fault Trace e i br ead a a ra rE 28 Fault Histon EST 29 NOTE Factory settings listed in this appendix are for the Drive only See Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 for Bypass unit factory settings Parameters 1 Parameter List Table A 1 Parameter List Parameter Parameter Name Description Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display P Setting Location initialization Language selection for digital operator display 0 English 2 Deutsch 1 00 Lang
307. ns Notes For project specific PI control tuning see the PI Control b5 XX parameters in this chapter Tables 5 3 and 5 4 provide the basic configuration for PI Control from a Drive in an E7 Bypass unit The b5 XX parameters are defaulted to a good starting point for most HVAC applications Final adjustment to some of the b5 XX parameters for the project at hand may be required Hand mode run stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND OFF AUTO switch Options None Bypass with PI Control and no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Setpoint from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Feedback input signal 4 20 mA applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant 2 z Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Keypad Operator 01 01 b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 B PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control Options None Bypass with PI Control and no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode
308. nstallatlon Site so rogue ba dE ta pere 24 Controlling the Ambient Temperature 25 Protecting the Bypass Unit from Foreign Matter 25 Installation Orientation and Enclosure Considerations 26 Physical Installation 1 1 Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style The Bypass covers two voltage ranges 208 240 VAC and 480 VAC Ratings applicable are from 1 2 to 500 HP Table 1 1 Bypass Bypass Bypass Base Model Number Continuous Uses Voltage HP Output Basic Drive NEMA 1 Current Model Number Amps E7BVD002 E7BBD002 0 5 2 4 CIMR E7U22P2 E7BVD003 E7BBD003 0 75 3 5 CIMR E7U22P2 E7BVD004 E7BBD004 1 4 6 CIMR E7U22P2 E7BVD007 E7BBD007 2 7 5 CIMR E7U22P2 E7BVDO10 E7BBD010 3 10 6 CIMR E7U22P2 E7BVDO16 E7BBD016 5 16 7 CIMR E7U23P7 E7BVD024 E7BBD024 7 5 24 2 CIMR E7U27P5 E7BVD030 E7BBD030 10 30 8 CIMR E7U27P5 E7BVD046 E7BBD046 15 46 2 CIMR E7U2011 208 VAC E7BVD059 E7BBD059 20 59 4 CIMR E7U2015 E7BVD074 E7BBD074 25 74 8 CIMR E7U2018 E7BVD088 E7BBD088 30 88 CIMR E7U2022 E7BVD114 E7BBD114 40 114 CIMR E7U2030 E7BVD143 E7BBD143 50 143 CIMR E7U2037 E7BVD169 E7BBD169 60 169 CIMR E7U2045 E7BVD211 E7BBD211 75 211 CIMR E7U2055 E7BVD273 E7BBD273 100 273 7 02075 E7BVD343 E7BBD343 125 343 CIMR E7U2090 E7BVD396 E7BBD396 150 396 CIMR E7U211
309. o 5 28 5 51 18 D 1 Base Block After Power 1058 19 Minimum Time 5 13 A 19 B 4 Basic 5 1 to 5 85 Baud atte 6 10 A 18 D 2 D 4 DriveWizard Deme Swiss 5 85 Bias Adjustments 4 6 5 58 5 62 A 16 A 17 Bottom Bracket sese 7 11 Braking At States RD B EAS 4 5 5 2 DC 00 40 11 5 12 5 16 6 21 A 4 HighzSlip tert ro A 23 When Switching to 2224 4 2 4 4 7 Broken ehe 5 71 Building Automation System iii 1 9 1 12 2 10 2 15 4 10 Bypass 2 200222 1 13 1 14 4 4 Bypass 6 2 Cable DtiveWiZard eere 5 85 Keypad tb Acad eee Aet 5 82 Serial Goim nae Eds D 3 Twisted 26 eb UNUS EA 2 14 Cable Length 2 4 6 19 Speed Search Consideration 5 18 Capacitor Warning ient terrre 1 Capacity Rated 2 0012 C 2 Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Carrier Frequency And Cable Length sees 2 4 6 19 And Drive 2 2 0 00021 B 3 B 4 E 6 13 Parameters nite ei A RRB ARS
310. o ee ee eee Output Current Closed Open Normally Open Torque Detection Digital Output TIME When the output current rises above the Torque Detection Level by approximately 10 of the Drive s rated output current the digital output is reset Fig 5 37 Under Torque Detection Programming 5 72 L8 Hardware Protection M L8 01 Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection pap RENE Not Provided factory default This parameter is not applicable for Drive operation 18 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level Setting Range 5010 130 C Factory Default 95 C L8 03 Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection ___0 Ramp to Stop Decel Time 1 02 2 Fast Stop Decel Time C1 09 aan 4 OH Alarm Reduce factory default The Drive is capable of warning the operator of an impending heatsink over temperature fault via an OH pre alarm The level at which the pre alarm will activate is determined by the setting of parameter L8 02 Measurement of the heatsink temperature is done with several strategically mounted thermistors If any of the heatsink thermistors measure a temperature in excess of the setting of L8 02 the Drive will fault OH2 and either ramp to stop using the C1 02 deceleration rate L8 03 0 Ramp to Stop coast to stop L8 03 1 Coast to Stop ramp to stop using the C1 09 fast stop deceleration rate L8 03 2 Fast Stop ala
311. oard Fig 5 28 DIP Switch S1 Table 5 17 DIP Switch S1 Function Setting RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resis OFF No terminating resistance Factory default tance ON Terminating resistance of 110 Q OFF 0 to 10 V internal resistance 20 KQ ON 4 to 20 mA internal resistance 250 Q Factory default Input method for analog input A2 Programming 5 60 B H3 09 Terminal A2 Function Selection H3 09 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 2 The 2 analog input be programmed to perform different functions The setting of parameter 09 determines which of the following functions the A2 analog input will perform Function Aux Reference Setting 2 In order for the A2 analog input to be used as the master Speed Command parameter H3 09 must be set for Aux Reference H3 09 2 Aux Reference Once A2 is configured as an auxiliary reference it can be selected as the master Speed Command by setting H3 13 1 Main Fref TA2 If H3 09 2 terminal A2 analog input will become the speed command when a digital input programmed for Multi Step Ref 1 1 0 3 is selected by a contact closure Function PI Feedback Setting B Configuring the A2 analog input as PI Feedback H3 09 PI Feedback is a requirement of setting the Drive up for PI operation The A2 analog input is the only source for fee
312. ogic circuit See Table 5 2 Parameter H3 13 allows the programmer to select which analog input will serve as the Speed Command input when Termi nals are selected as the Auto Mode Speed source b1 01 1 Terminals or Terminal is selected as the reference source for the Hand mode b1 12 1 Terminals For the A2 analog input to be an effective selection for the H3 13 parameter param eter H3 09 must be configured as Aux Reference H3 09 2 Aux Reference If H3 0922 then the Al analog input will be used regardless of the setting of parameter b1 12 Programming 5 63 12 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Function When momentary power loss recovery is enabled L2 01 40 a speed search is executed to catch the potentially spinning motor shaft This speed search will occur regardless of the setting of b3 01 Speed Search Selection m 12 01 Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection Seting Pw Ride CPU Power Active factory default m L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default Model Dependent The Drive allows different responses to momentary power losses The setting of L2 01 determines whether the Drive attempts to restart after a short loss of incoming AC power and for what length of time this capability remains active If L2 01 0 Disabled the Drive detects a UV1 fault 15ms after power loss and automatic restarting is disabled The Drive
313. ol Cycle power off and on to the Internal A D Err AD Converter Fault circuit input terminals Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization CPF05 CPU External A D Converter Fault Noise or spike on the control Cycle power off and on to the External A D Err circuit input terminals Drive Replace the control board Cycle power off and on to the CPF07 ASIC Internal RAM Fault Drive Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Cycle power off and on to the CPF08 Watchdog Timer Fault Drive Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Cycle power off and on to the 9 CPU ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault Drive Control circuit damage Replace the Drive CPF10 ASIC Version Fault ASIC Err ASIC Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Option card connector Remove all inputs to the option connection fault board Perform a factory initialization Ted Cycle power off and on to the Option A D Error Option Card Fault Option card A D converter fault Replace the option board Replace the Control board Perform a factory initialization P Noise or spike on the commu Cycle power and on 1 da Fault of Communication nication line defective option board Replace the option board Replace the control board Remove any option boards Cycle power off and on to the Drive CPF22 Communication Option Card Code Number option board pd Option Type Err Fault
314. ol Circuit Terminals Continued Type 5 Signal Name Function Signal Level RES Differential input Communication input optical isolation RS 485 For 2 wire RS 485 short R to S P 422 and R to S m Drive Communication output Differential input optical isolation Signal common Control Damper Control Pneumatic Control Interface 40VA 120V Power i Output Customer Use Power Customer control Devices 100VA 120V DIP Switch S1 DIP Switch S1 is described in this section The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in Table 2 7 27 Terminating OFF ON Exp 1 BONY resistance 02 2 1 DIP Switch S1 1 located gt terminal board Fig 2 11 DIP Switch S1 Location Table 2 7 DIP Switch S1 Function eee OFF terminating resistance Factory default RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resistance ON Terminating resistance of 1100 OFF 0 10 VDC internal resistance 20 KQ ON 4 20 mA internal resistance 250 Q Factory default Input signal for analog input A2 Electrical Installation 2 16 Shunt Connector CN15 The shunt connector CN15 is described in this section Shunt connector along with parameters H4 07 and H4 08 select the signal range of the analog output terminals FM and AM Shunt connector CN15 is only available when the optional Terminal Card with the 4 20mA Analog Output Monitor is installed Model
315. ol and serial communication for run stop control and Setpoint input with hand mode speed potentiometer Hand mode speed command from speed potentiometer Auto mode PI Setpoint input signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Terminals b5 01 z 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 6C Com Inv Sel 2 S6 must A terminal S6 input contact opening H O A Auto selects serial com for both the be jumpered to S5 run stop command and speed command A terminal S6 input contact closure H O A Hand allows b1 01 to select Keypad Operator as the speed command source This input is jumpered to S5 therefore the contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B PI Feedback Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control 5 08 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Drive communicates via protocol selected Options L Serial Communications Bypass with PI Control and serial communication for run stop control
316. ommunication parameters H5 01 to H5 09 using the Digital Operator 4 Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared 5 Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again 6 Perform communication with the DDC Communications D 3 Related Parameters Table D 2 Serial Communication Related Parameters Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source b1 01 b1 02 H5 01 H5 02 H5 03 H5 04 H5 05 Drive Transmit Wait Time H506 Transmit WaitTIM H5 07 RTS Control Selection RTS Control Sel 5 08 5 09 Run Command Selection Run Source Drive Node Address Serial Com Adr Communication Speed Selection Serial Baud Rate Parameter No Communication Parity Selection Serial Com Sel Stopping Method after Communication Error Serial Fault Sel Communication Error Detection Selection Serial Dtct Communication Protocol Selection Protocol Select Communication Error Detection Time CE Detect Time Description Selects the speed command frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S4 and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects the run command input source 0 Operator Hand and Off keys on digital oper ator 1 Terminal
317. on Z YASKAWA MTE YASKAWA MTE SCHAFFNER YASKAWA BUSSMANN YASKAWA BUSSMANN YASKAWA PART NUMBER YASKAWA MTE YASKAWA MTE PART PART PART PART PARTNO PARTNO PARTNO PART NO PART BUSSMANN SHAWMUT REQ D PART NO PIN PART NO PIN NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER PARTNO NUMBER UFU000025 FWH SA14F UFU000062 70308 1 URxo00041 4RB002 5 620 0109 4RBoos 5P620 0017 RL 00401 URX000080 _____ 1000035 0010 4 5P17 0422 FWH 10A14F UFU000062 70908 1 5P620 0111 TURX000041 4RB002 5 620 0017 5P620 0132 7 1 1000055 __ 0010 4 5 17 0422 FWH 10A14F UFU000062 70 08 1 URX000046 12RB004 5P620 0111 9RB003 5 620 0024 5P620 0017 UFI000035 _ RF3 0010 4 UFU000028 FWH 15A14F UFU000062 70308 1 5P652 0213 12RB003 URX000046 12RB004 5P620 0024 5P620 0133 UF1000035 RF3 0010 4 UFU000028 FWH 15A14F UFU000062 7098 1 URx000048 18RB003 5652 0215 12RB003 5 620 0024 5P620 0133 UF1000035 RF3 0010 4 UFU000029 FWH 25A14F UFU000062 70308 1 URX000052 25RB003 5P652 0213 12RB003 5 620 0136 5P620 0134 UFI000036 0018 4 UFU000032 FWH 40B 5 19 0104 iBs 3 URX000053 25RB004 URX000052 25RB003 URX000083 5P620 0136 051000036 RF3 0018 4 URX000083 5P620 0139 1000037 RF3 0025 4 5P17 0363 FWH 70B_ 5 19 0104 185101 URX000059 URX000061 50RB003 5P620 0044 5P620 004
318. onday through Friday during the hours of 8 a m to 5 00 p m C S T Emergency After normal hours 7 days a week including weekends and holidays To contact Drives Technical Support please call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 5 for Technical Support Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com Support information such as technical manuals FAQs instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website www drives com When calling for technical support please have the following materials available appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this e Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is equal to or greater than Motor Nameplate amps Alist with your parameter settings Asketch of the electrical power train from AC line to motor including filters and disconnects Field Service Start Up Assistance Factory Repair Replacement Parts and Other Support Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs Technical Training Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers at customer sites and via the internet For information visit www drives com or call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the phone menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 4 for Product Training Support in Other Countries Yaskawa
319. operation Bypass and Drive When in the Bypass mode the connected motor is run directly from the incoming AC line whereas in Drive mode the motor is run from the Drive output The DRIVE BYPASS switch located on the front panel determines operating mode Within each operating mode are two methods of control HAND and AUTO The HAND OFF AUTO switch on the front panel determines this control method Table 4 1 provides a look at various combinations of the control panel selector switch positions control inputs to TB1 and the status of the switch selectable options Table 4 1 Bypass Inputs and Operating Mode Selector Switches Switch Selectable Functions Run Enable Safety Operating Mode N T TBI 3 amp 4 DRV Result E c c meum sme pog qoos ii oin peg H O A D B Z 2 xX ES EE ie Hd TA E E SEES Eanes 6 EREA E ee ESSO X ee Sa ia TATA EREA NES A Pp A A D T i alse eae a SA ES Note A blank cell indicates the input can be in any of the possible positions gt 2 Drive energized output contactor open Table 4 1 Definitions H O
320. opping method selected f a fault occurs take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause To restart reset the fault with any of the following procedures Turn ON the fault reset signal Set 14 Fault Reset to a multi function digital input H1 01 to H1 05 Press the RESET key of the digital operator Shut off the Drive input power once and then turn on again WARNING The Run Command Start Command needs to be removed prior to resetting a fault Resetting a fault by removing and reapplying power to the Drive while the Run Command is applied may cause the Drive to start unexpectedly Therefore make sure all personnel are clear from the Drive motor and machine prior to reset ting the Drive Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display BUS Option Com Err CE Memobus Com Err COM ERR OP amp INV CPFO1 COM ERR OP amp INV CPF02 BB Circuit Err CPF03 EEPROM Error Description Option Communication Error After initial communication was established the connection was lost Modbus Communication Error Control data was not received correctly for two seconds Operator Communication Fault 1 Transmission between the Drive and the digital operator cannot be established within 5 seconds after supplying power External RAM of CPU is defective Operator Communication Fault 2 After communication started with the digital operato
321. ors OPE 6 13 Operator MOD need 5 79 A 24 Options io EH ee ORARE RS 1 8 1 9 And Programming 0 5 4 5 24 AI 6 5 6 6 Communication Error Selection 5 51 11 LonWorks v 5 51 7 10 A 11 Peripheral Devices esee E 2 Option Dependent Parameters eese 5 4 Option Dependent PI Control Parameters 5 24 Orientation Drive c ccc cccceesccceeesssssececessseecececssaeeeeees 1 26 Oscillation Mechanical Vibration 1 210 0 0 1 24 4 6 5 41 5 42 5 47 6 20 9 4 with PI 0 0 6 20 with V f control 1 4 0 0 00 a 6 20 Output COont ctoE sc asia hele a Em 1 13 Connections 2 1 13 2 2 2 20 Current Monitor 01 03 2 15 A 17 A 26 Frequency See Frequency Output C 2 to C 4 Ground Fault Detection Selection 5 70 6 6 A 22 Monitors sss ror ER e ERES A 17 A 26 A 27 Power Monitor 17 1 08 0222 A 26 Power 1 2 1 3 C 2 to C 4 Terminal Status Monitor U1 11 A 26 Transistors IGBT 5 8 7 2 Iti 6 24
322. ory needs to know the FLA value of each motor controlled in order to select the correct motor overload devices and fuses Specifying different capacity motors results in longer non standard lead times Option D Two motor OR control A MTR 1 AUTO MTR 2 selector switch is provided to allow local or remote motor operation selection between two identical motors for control by either the Drive or the Bypass for example Pump 1 OR AUTO OR Pump 2 In the AUTO position a contact closure from a BAS at TB1 terminals 23 and 24 can switch between the two motors The two motors must be the same horsepower and current draw Option E RFI EMI Filter Filters to further attenuate possible VFD generated noise Radio frequency interference electro magnetic interference filters reduce conducted noise on the Drive input power leads and therefore radiated noise from those leads This option is installed on the input power side of the Drive between the input contactor and the Drive Option F Drive Input Fuses Fuses capable of protecting semiconductor devices rated at 200 kAIC are connected to the line side of the Drive between the input contactor and the Drive to protect the Drive semiconductors when motor or output conductor short circuit faults occur Option J Enable Embedded Serial Communications A no cost option The Drive in a Bypass unit is capable of network communication via one of 3 embedded protocols Specifying option J
323. ower is experienced the Drive output is turned off This results in a coasting motor When power returns the Drive can determine the speed of the coasting motor and start without requiring it to be brought to minimum speed Speed Search can be programmed to always be active by setting b3 01 or it can be commanded by remote contact closure by setting a digital input There are two forms of Speed Search in the Drive the speed estimation method and the current detection method When setting the Drive for remote Speed Search input via a contact closure the method of Speed Search is determined by the setting of b3 01 If b3 01 0 SpdsrchF Disable then the remote input will initiate speed estimation method and if b3 01 2 Spdsrchl Disable then the remote input will start the current detection method IMPORTANT Parameters L2 03 and L2 04 also affect the current detection method of Speed Search operation B 63 01 Speed Search Selection Seng ___ SpdsrchF Disable Spdsrchl Disable factory default Speed Estimation Method b3 01 0 or 1 The speed estimation method will calculate the speed using measurements of residual motor fields The speed estimation version is bi directional and will determine both the motor speed and direction To enable speed estimation Speed Search at start set b3 01 1 SpdsrchF Enable If the speed estimation method of Speed Search is to be used then Auto tuning must be performed prior to IMPO
324. p for Differential Feedback in which case b5 18 and b5 19 have no affect on the PI function B b5 20 PI Setpoint Display Scaling Seg EE Hz factory default 1 3 RPM Synchronous Engineering Units The PI Setpoint Display Scaling value b5 20 is a scaling factor that is applied to the monitor display for both the PI Setpoint U1 38 and the PI Feedback U1 24 Table 5 6 PI Setpoint Display Scaling Options If b5 20 is U1 24 and U1 38 Display Increments 0 01 Hz 2 through 39 ORPM enter the of motor poles 40 through 39999 Engineering Units Programming 5 33 If the monitors seem more natural in terms of percentage set b5 20 1 If the monitors are easier to work with when displaying the equivalent synchronous RPM set b5 20 the number of motor poles If another engineered unit such as a fpm or cfm is desired set b5 20 xxxxx where Digit5 Digit4 Digit3 Digit 2 Digit I Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100 speed Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places If Digit5 Z0 number format is XXXX If Digit5 1 number format is XXX X If Digit5 2 number format is XX XX If Digit5 23 number format is X XXX For example If b5 20 10425 then at 100 output the digital operator would display 42 5 for monitor 01 38 U1 24 E 65 21 Sleep Source Sering 0 SES Input Output of PI block PI Setpoint factory default Snooze Paramet
325. pecified by parameter C1 02 The Drive will continue to decelerate until the output current level drops below the L3 06 level less a 296 hysteresis Once the output current drops below the L3 06 296 level the Drive will begin to accelerate at the currently active acceleration rate either C1 01 or C1 03 If L3 05 2 Decel Time 2 the Drive will function as described above except C1 04 will be used instead of C1 02 as the deceleration rate used when the output current exceeds L3 06 for more than 100 ms The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 0520 a Decel time C1 02 or C1 04 Output Frequency b Active Accel time Output Current Fig 5 33 Time Chart for Stall Prevention Level During Running The L3 06 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current If the Drive still faults when L3 05z0 then either lower the L3 06 or adjust the C1 02 or C1 04 settings for a quicker deceleration Programming 5 67 L4 Speed Command Loss Detection L4 05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection o ___ Disabled factory default Enabled of PrevRef 14 06 Frequency Reference at Loss of Frequency Reference Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 of previous speed command Factory Default 80 096 of previous speed command The Drive can be configured to compensate for the loss of its external speed command An external speed command is considered lost if it drops 90 of its value in 400mS or
326. peed command signal between terminals Al and AC or a 4 20 mA speed command signal to terminals A2 and AC Select the AUTO position of the Hand Off Auto switch If you want the Drive to receive the speed command from serial communication Set the parameter indicated in Table 5 2 for the desired serial communication option Connect the RS 485 422 serial communications cable to terminals R R 5 and S on the control I O terminal block The HAND OFF AUTO selector switch must be in the AUTO position B b1 02 Run Source Soning Terminals factory default Opon PCB To successfully operate the Drive or Bypass and motor remotely an external run command must be received by the Drive and Bypass unit Parameter b1 02 specifies from where the run command for the Drive will be accepted This parameter is by default set to 1 Terminals This setting is required by the Bypass logic circuit To issue a run command from the control panel Turn the Hand Off Auto switch to the HAND position To issue a run command from a remote source such as a BAS Turn the Hand Off Auto switch to the AUTO position A contact closure between terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 will control the Drive or Bypass start and stop operation To issue a run command via serial communication Set the parameters indicated in Table 5 2 for the desired serial commu nication option Connect the RS 485 422 serial communication cable to R R S and S on the removable termi
327. peration Selection 0 No Fit Relay fault contact will not activate during 0 1 0 Programming Restart Sel an automatic restart 1 Flt Relay Active fault contact will activate during an automatic restart Maximum Restart Time After Tf the restart fails or is not attempted due to a Fault continuing fault condition e g an OV fault the Drive 0 5 to 600 0 180 0sec Quick Setting Max Restart Time waits L5 03 seconds before attempting another restart Torque Detection Determines the Drive s response to overtorque undertorque condition Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6 02 and L6 03 0 Disabled 1 OL SpdAgree Alm Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection OL At RUN Alm Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection OLG SpdAgree Flt Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut Torque Detection Selection 1 down onan OLS fault Load Detecti OL At RUN Fit Overtorque Detection is always 0108 0 Programming oad Detection 3 active and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault LL SpdAgree Alm Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation contin ues after detection LL at RUN Alm Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection LL SpdAgree Flt Undertorque D
328. peration Selection After Communication Error Com Bus Fit Sel Alarm Selects the serial com error response alarm and con Only tinue operation H1 01 Terminal 53 Function Selection Set for Drive run Terminal S3 Sel Drive H1 02 Terminal S4 Function Selection Set for fault reset or Terminal S4 Sel Multi Frequency Reference 1 Step Ref 1 Reference 1 or Serial Communication Step Ref 1 H2 02 Terminals M3 Function Selection Set for serial Term M3 M4 Sel Com communication run command RUN Command H3 02 100 0 Terminal A1 Gain Setting Terminal A1 Gain TABLE 0 1000 H3 08 Terminal A2 Signal Level Signal selection 0 to 10 Term A2 Signal 0 10 TABLE H1 03 Terminal S5 Function Selection Set For Frequency Terminal S5 Sel Multi TABLE VDC Drive control board switch 51 2 off or 4 to 20 VDC mA Drive control board switch 51 2 on Programming 5 2 Table 5 1 Continued Bypass Parameter Settings SETTING E oa iem Bypass Default H3 09 SEE 2 Terminal A2 Function Selection Selects how this Terminal A2 Sel Aux TABLE input will be used by the Drive Reference 52 H3 13 SEE N A Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection TA1 A2 Select Main Fref TABLE Determines which terminal A1 or A2 will be the TAI 512 main speed reference source L4 05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Ref Loss Sel Stop Determines Drive response to loss of the frequency 01 Number of Re st
329. peration at full speed only directly from line power Main Bypass control Three electrically interlocked IEC rated contactors isolate the Drive when operating in Bypass mode Control logic cir functions cuit provides Hand Off Auto functions and safety circuit interlocks Includes fused 120VAC control transformer motor circuit protector disconnect motor overload relay selector switches and indicating lights Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown plows capacity 110 of rated output current for 60 seconds maximum current 208 240VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410 V 480VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820 V 8 208 240VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190 480VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 380 V gt Momentary power loss Power Interuptions of 15 ms or more E ride thru By selecting the momentary power loss method operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration or running Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits 5096 of inverter rated current Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 Vdc or more Enclosure Type Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 CIMR E7U20P4 thru 2030 and 40P4 thru 4055 Op
330. protection filter can also be an effective measure If Peripheral Devices Like DDCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or Running Drive B If noise is generated by Drive switching implement the following countermeasures 1 Change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to reduce the amount of internal switching Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive s input power terminals Use metal conduit Electric waves can be shielded by metal so encase the Drive and power wires in metal Ground the Drive and motor Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring Uh ES Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 20 If a Stand Alone Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run The Drive performs internal switching so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause an external ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply Whenever possible use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level 1 a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per unit with an operating time of 0 1 s or more or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures i e one designed for use with Drives It will also help to change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency In addition remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical V
331. r a communication fault occurred for 2 seconds or more Baseblock Circuit Fault Baseblock circuit fault at power up EEPROM Fault EEPROM fault check sum not valid Cause Connection is broken master has stopped communicating Connection is broken master has stopped communicating Digital operator cable not securely connected digital operator defective control board defective Control circuit damage Digital operator cable not securely connected digital operator defective control board defective Gate array hardware failure during power up Noise or spike on the control circuit input terminals Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 4 Corrective Action Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Table 61 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display Perform a factory initialization CPF04 Noise or spike on the contr
332. r during parameters processing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Drive B Slave Not Responding In the following cases the slave will ignore the write function When a communication error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid If the slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not IMPORTANT return response messages to the master Communications D 13 Modbus Self Diagnosis The Drive has a built in function for self diagnosing the operations of serial communication interface circuits The self diagnosis function connects the communication parts of the send and receive terminals receives the data sent by the Drive and checks if communication is being performed normally Perform the self diagnosis function using the following procedure 1 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive and set parameter H1 05 Terminal S7 Function Selection to 67 Com Test Mode Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF Turn ON the terminating resistance Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1 pn de ow Turn ON th
333. r is the Power On monitor The factory default Power On monitor is Speed Command U1 01 Below the Speed Command monitor are the next two sequential monitors Output Frequency U1 02 and Output Current U1 03 Pressing the INCREASE key once scrolls the monitors to show the User Monitor as selected by o1 01 The factory default for o1 01 is the Output Voltage monitor U 1 06 The active monitor displayed when the Drive is powered on can be changed to either be U1 01 Speed Command U1 02 Output Frequency U1 03 Output Current or the User Monitor Whichever monitor is selected as the Power On top monitor the two monitors displayed below it are the next two sequential monitors See example below DRIVE Frequency Ref Active Monitor Title Active Monitor 0140 X 60 00Hz Next two Bigeye UEM Output Frequency sequential U1 02 60 00Hz U1 03 105 Output Current monitors For example if the Drive needs to display the Elapsed Timer as the Power On monitor then 01 01 must be set to 13 and 01 02 must be set to 4 The next time Drive power is cycled the digital operator displays U1 13 Elapsed Time U1 14 Flash ID and U1 15 Term AI Level DRIVE Elapsed Time Active Monitor Title ctive Monitor Flash ID Next two Ui 14 03010 sequential 1 15 51 2 Term Al Level 1 Programming 5 76 01 03 Digital Operator Display Scaling Seg ci Hz factory default
334. reference input only The Auto Mode Selection 1 0 6D and the Hand Mode Selection H1 0x 6E allows use of a digital input to toggle between the Auto and Hand operational modes for speed control The Auto Mode Selection and Hand Mode Selection cannot both be programmed simultaneously If both 6D and 6E are programmed together an OPEO3 fault will occur The 6D setting for digital input defines the speed command or setpoint source as the keypad operator for an open contact and allows b1 01 to determine the speed command source for a closed contact Setting 6D has no effect on the run command Input Contact Status Speed Command or PI Setpoint Source OPEN Keypad operator override b1 01 CLOSED Determined by b1 01 Programming 5 55 The 6E setting for digital input defines the speed command or setpoint source as the keypad operator for an closed contact and allows b1 01 to determine the speed command source for a open contact Input Contact Status Speed Command or PI Setpoint Source OPEN Determined by b1 01 CLOSED Keypad operator overrides b1 01 Programming 5 56 H2 Digital Outputs B H2 01 Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection H2 02 Terminal M3 M4 Function Selection Setting Range 0 to 3B Factory Default 2 01 0 During Run 1 H2 02 3B Run Src Com Opt H2 01 and H2 02 are two of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 The Drive has two multi function ou
335. req 02 05 Output Current at Most Recent Fault Output Current 02 07 Output Voltage at Most Recent Fault Output Voltage U2 08 DC Bus Voltage at Most Recent Fault DC Bus Voltage U2 09 Output Power at Most Recent Fault Output kWatts Input Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as U2 11 for 01 10 Input Term Sts Output Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as for 01 11 Output Term Sts Drive Operation Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as U2 13 for 01 12 Inverter Status U2 14 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault Elapsed time Note Fault trace is not executed at CPF00 UVI and UV2 Parameters 28 Fault History List Table A 4 Fault History List Fault History Most Recent Fault Last Fault 214 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 2 3 03 3144 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 3 th U3 04 47 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 4 U Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 1 3 06 Cumulative Operation Time at 214 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 2 Cumulative Operation Time at 3 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 3 3 08 Cumulative Operation Time at 4 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 4 5 Most Recent Fau Fault Message 5 6 Most Recent Fau Fault Message 6 8 Most Recent Fau Fault Message 8 9th Most Recent Fau Fault Message 9 U 108 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 10 Cumulative Opera
336. ressure limit switch Verify that these customer emergency contacts are properly terminated in the Bypass safety shutdown circuit These contacts should be wired between terminal TB1 1 and TB1 2 No field programming is required Verify that all other field installed wires are correctly terminated included the shields Verify that the motor is wired for the application voltage Record the motor nameplate information Voltage Motor Rated Amps Verify that the input voltage matches the Bypass unit rating Verify that the motor rated full load amps FLA does not exceed the rated output current of the Drive and Bypass controlling it When multiple motors are simulaneously operated by the Drive the sum of all motor FLA values must be less than or equal to that of the Drive and Bypass controlling them Record any other connections to the Bypass unit by terminal number to determine if special programming of any of the following is required see Chapter 5 for programming details e Multi function Digital Inputs e Multi function Digital Outputs e Analog Outputs Differential PI control O 10 Verify that the building automation system logic is ready for the start stop and speed command functions Start Up and Operation 4 3 BYPASS UNIT START UP PROCEDURE Please review Bypass Start Up Preparation on page 4 3 1 Reset Button Before applying power make sure that the following conditions are met DR
337. rking properly prior to the fault mm Fault Description Possible Cause Corrective Procedure 1 No lights some no fuses dre Blow Check for any short circuits before contactors pick up replacing the fuses 2 No 1 but fuses are not Power wiring is disrupted to cabinet Check the power to the control blown and or transformer transformer cabinet 3 No 2 but power has no The Ribbon cable and or Operator Check for the cause shorting before problem A3 board are faulty ordering replacement 4 No 3 but Operator A3 The wiring to Relay A2 board is Inspect the wiring connectors to relay board and ribbon cable OK loose Relay board faulty board before ordering replacement 5 Power light on contactors Consol cedit astare blown Check for any short circuits wiring before do not pick up replacing the fuses No 5 but fuses are not User connections to TB1 are Inspect connections to blown disrupted 7 No 6 but connections The contactors wiring are Inspect contactors and check the power at are secure faulty disrupted the contactor No 7 but wiring and The wiring to Relay A2 board is Inspect the wiring connectors to relay contactors OK loose Relay board faulty A2 board before ordering replacement Contactor blowers pick up Bad connection relays loose circuit Check TB1 wiring PCB ribbon cable with delay boards sockets before ordering replacement 10 Some options do not work Loose wiring connectors on Relay Inspect the Relay A2 board
338. rload fault OL1 when motor amps exceed the value set in parameter E2 01 by 10 Actual trip time will vary depending on severity of overload Operation selection when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH3 alarm level 1 17V 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Stopping method when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH4 level 2 34V 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Delay Time applied to motor temperature analog input H3 09 E for filtering purposes Setting Range 0 1 to 20 0 0 00 to Factory Setting Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming PwrLoss Ridethru mm SEES Enables and disables the momentary power loss function 0 Disabled Drive trips on UV1 fault when power is lost 1 PwrL Ride Thru t Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L2 02 2 CPU Power Active Drive will restart if power returns prior to internal power supply shut down n order for a restart to occur the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period Determines the power loss ride thru time This value is dependent on the capacity of the Drive Only effective when L2 01 1 Used to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the Drive output turns back on After a power loss if L2 03 is greater than L2 02 operation resumes after the time set in
339. rm and continue running L8 03 3 Alarm Only alarm and continue running but at a reduced speed L8 03 4 Alarm amp Reduce If L8 03 4 Alarm and Reduce the Drive will continue to run but will reduce the speed to the level determined by parameter L8 19 Refer to the description for parameter L8 19 If a digital output is configured for OH Prealarm H2 01 20 OH PreAlarm it will close whenever the heatsink temperature is greater than the L8 02 level no matter what the setting is of L8 03 L8 10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection 0 Fan Mode factory default Fan Always On Programming 5 73 B 18 11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Setting Range 0 to 300 Seconds Factory Default 300 Seconds Parameters L8 10 and L8 11 allow the Drive programmer to customize the heatsink cooling fan operation Parameter L8 10 determines whether the cooling fans are always ON whenever the Drive is powered L8 10 1 Fan Always or if the cooling fans are only ON when the Drive is in a Run condition L8 10 0 Fan On Run Mode Parameter L8 11 is a delayed OFF for the cooling fan if L8 10 0 Fan On Run Mode When the cooling fans are set to turn OFF when the Run command is removed parameter L8 11 will cause the fans to continue cooling the Drive for the amount of time programmed into L8 11 after the Run command is actually removed The Drive can be programmed to allow the
340. rminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch 51 2 must also be ON H3 02 0 0 Terminal Al gain 0 0 To insure no stray signal level at this unused terminal H3 09 0 Frequency Bias Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal A1 input Terminal A1 is not used therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1 02 keypad as a preset speed This default input contact is closed when H O A Hand Options None Bypass with no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 02 0 0 Terminal Al gain 0 0 To insure no stray signal level at this unused terminal H3 09 0 Frequency Bias Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal A1 input Terminal A1 is not used therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1 02
341. rminals FM and AC 1 Frequency Ref 100 max output frequency 2 Output Freq 100 max output frequency 3 Output Current 100 Drive rated current 6 Output Voltage 100 230V or 100 460V 7 DC Bus Voltage 100 400V or 100 800V 8 Output kWatts 100 Drive rated power 15 Term A1 Level 16 Term A2 Level Terminal FM Monitor Selection 18 Mot SEC Current 100 Motor rated secondary Terminal FM Sel current Programming 20 SFS Output 100 max output frequency 24 PI Feedback 31 Not Used 36 PI Input 37 PI Output 100 max output frequency 38 PI Setpoint 51 Auto Mode Fref 100 max output frequency 52 Hand Mode Fref 100 max output frequency 53 PI Feedback 2 NOTE 100 10V DC output FM gain setting H4 02 H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10V 0 0 to 100 0 Prosramnin Terminal FM Gain when selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 8 H4 03 Terminal FM Bias Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10V 110 0 to 0 0 Prosraiimin Terminal FM Bias when selected monitor is at 0 output 110 0 8 Selects which monitor will be output on terminals AM and AC 1 Frequency Ref 100 max output frequency 2 Output Freq 100 max output frequency 3 Output Current 100 Drive rated current 6 Output Voltage 100 230V or 100 460V 7 DC Bus Voltage 100 400V 100 800V 8 Output kWatts 100
342. round terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Drive will become unstable 5 When using more than one Drive be careful not to loop the ground wire OK Fig 2 4 Ground Wiring Examples For grounding connection to earth ground see Figures 2 1 and 2 2 B Control Circuit Ground Terminals The removable Drive control terminal card provides two ground terminals marked TB3 and TB4 to accept the control wire shield connection The control wire shield should be connected on this end only the opposite end should be isolated with electrical tape IMPORTANT Grounding of the Bypass enclosure and motor is required for proper system operation Electrical Installation 2 5 Motor Wire Routing The following Figures indicate suggested wire entry and bending areas for representative wall mount enclosures connection Motor connection Control circuit ZSS li Typical Enclosure 2 Typical Enclosure 2 Fig 2 5 Wall Mount Enclosures Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 240 Table 2 2 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 240 VAC CIMR _ _ 2022 and 2030 30 Hp to 40 Hp CIMR _ 20P4 to 2018 1 2 Hp to 25 Hp axi Control circuits Control circuits 2037 to 2110 50 Hp to 150 Hp CIMR 4 R
343. rtion of the Drive kVA Selection kVA E 02 04 Inverter Model CIMR E7I Model Number 0 to FF Dependent Programming Reference Appendix 2 Determines if the Data Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the digital operator Frequency Reference Setting 0 Disabled Data Enter key must be pressed to enter a 02 05 Method Selection reference 1 Operator M O P 1 Enabled Data Enter key is not required The x frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the digital operator without having to press the data enter key Determines if the Drive will stop when the digital operator is removed 1 Programming Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected Oper Detection 0 Disabled The Drive will not stop when the digital operator is removed 1 Enabled The Drive will fault OPR and coast to stop when the operator is removed Cumulative Operation Time 02 07 Setting Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer 0 to 65535 Elapsed Time Set Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Factory settings change when b5 01 1 as follows 01 06 1 01 07 38 01 08 24 Programming Parameters A 24 Parameter Name mm Digital Operator Display Cumulative Operation Time 02 08 Selection Elapsed Time Run Initialization Specification 02 09 Selection Init Mode Sel Cumulative
344. s 6 15 Parameters eee ee reet 5 82 A 25 Cover Protective isses eerte 1 25 CPU Faults taie 6 4 Identification eese 3 10 A 27 Power 088 nio 5 64 19 Critical Frequency Rejection 5 42 6 20 6 21 A 9 Current DC Injection Braking se 5 16 A 4 Maximum Output Overload Capacity C 4 Monitor Analog Output 2 15 A 17 Motor Rated FLA esses EE 4 3 5 50 5 85 6 14 A 11 A 25 B 4 Rated Output 1 2 1 8 1 22 2 3 5 52 C22 C 3 Customer Wiring sess 1 13 2 2 2 3 2 8 2 11 D Damper Control Circuit eese 2 10 2 16 4 11 End Switch iet 1 15 2 9 1 16 4 4 4 10 5 38 DATA ENTER 3 3 5 79 A 24 Sa Se yi 3 9 3 16 4 5 5 9 6 17 Data Lengths nt de D2 to D13 Date Stamp Drive ice mmi teme rte ds 6 26 DC Braking 4 5 4 7 5 16 4 DC Bus Capacitors Uode chitin 7 2 Fuse Checking heels 6 23 Fault euet 6 8 RE Moe SE 1 10 C 2 E 2 Voltage Checking iue aee eger 6 22 7 0 Overvoltage Undervoltage 6 8 6 9 6 12 C 4 Safet ee eee EIER eS 1 DC Injection Braking
345. s Replacement Parts F 3 DIGITAL OPERATOR CDR001115 OPERATOR INTERFACE PCB A3 UTC000037 2 22mm selector SW 2 pos maintained USW000071 USD000039 22mm selector SW 3 pos maintained USW000072 22mm PCB contact block 1 N O standard UMC000080 W1 Wall mount enclosure 1 W2 Wall mount enclosure 2 Fl Floor mount enclosure 1 Bypass Replacement Parts 4 A A TUNE Menu sse enne 3 8 3 15 ReactOE s E ERE ERE EE F 3 Accel Decel odere abere ti doe A 7 cns crt 5 38 Acceleration Specification p ore dee ore C 4 Stall Prevention During 5 65 6 18 A 20 eost stor Stute CE 5 38 A 7 2 2 6 18 Access Levels siento o 5 9 A 2 etait P EO 3 8 3 14 Add on Box 1 4 to 1 6 1 18 1 20 1 26 Alarm Displays amp 6 2 222121 6 10 Indicators eee AS 3 4 Overheat 5 73 A 22 B 4 t tet oh ES 4 Ambient Temperature sees 1 24 Maintenances ere o ETE TRE et 7 2 1 3 Specification etienne teneret 4 Troubleshooting esses 6 7 6 11 6 19 Analog Inputs lp e EE 5 58 5 62 A 16 Configuring e reete een 2 16 Connection Diagram serene 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals
346. s a number where 8192 100 of Drive rated output current H1 Digital Inputs B H1 01 Terminal S3 Function Selection H1 02 Terminal S4 Function Selection H1 03 Terminal S5 Function Selection H1 04 Terminal S6 Function Selection H1 05 Terminal S7 Function Selection Setting Range 0 to 6E Factory Default H1 01 70 Bypass Drv Env This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 H1 02 This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 2 H1 03 This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 2 H1 04 4 Multi Step Ref 2 2 Wire 3 Multi Step Ref 1 3 Wire H1 05 6 Jog Freq Ref 2 Wire A Multi Step Ref 2 3 Wire Programming 5 52 The Drive has five multi function contact digital inputs By programming parameters H1 01 through H1 05 the user can assign specific functions to each input Below is a table with a complete list of all of the digital input functions The programming manual has a more detailed description of each of the functions Table 5 12 Digital Input Functions setting Function setting Function Ramp Hold f 60 __ _____ Forvardiog 65 Remekg 9 log Frequency Reference Fasono 5 Com Selection meBmeo _AuloMode Coe Following are descriptions of only t
347. s communications time out 1 Error occurred Bit F Modbus communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function digital output status Bit 0 Multi function digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Not used Bits 3 to F Not used 002EH 0030H Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H 0037H Not used 0038H PI feedback level Input equivalent to 100 Max output frequency 10 1 without sign 0039H PI input level 100 Max output frequency 10 1 with sign 003AH PI output level 100 Max output frequency 10 1 with sign 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Communication error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used 003EH KVA setting 003FH Control method Note Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input errors can be reset while the Drive is operating Communications D 11 B Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data Broadcast data can be written to Table D 6 Broadcast Data Register Operation signal Bit 0 Run command 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bits 2 and 3 Not used Bit 4 Externa
348. s input Data Display Displays monitor data parameter numbers and settings 1 line x 13 characters 3 lines x 16 characters E BYPASS BYPASS CONTROL RUN POWER ON Indicating Lights MOTOR OL SMOKE SAFETIES FAULT PURGE TEST NORMAL BYPASS DRIVE Selector Switches RUN amp STOP Indicators See Tables 3 4 and 3 5 OFF HAND AUTO Q Fig 3 1 E7 Bypass Control Panel Component Names and Functions Control Panel 3 2 Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Digital Operator Keys MENU Key Scrolls from one of the five main menus to the next E ESCAPE Key Returns to the display before the DATA ENTER key was pressed MONITOR Key Selects the monitor DRIVE mode from any display location INCREASE Key Increases parameter numbers and set values Used to move to the next item or data DECREASE Key Decreases parameter numbers and set values Used to move to the previous item or data Selects the digit to be changed The selected digit will blink Also resets the Drive PES when a fault has occurred DATA ENTER Key Pressed to enter menus and parameters as well as to set values Control Panel 3 3 Drive Mode Indicators The definition of the Drive mode indicators are shown in Table 3 2 FW Lit when a forward run command is input Also lit when the Drive is in Hand Mode R Lit
349. s within the PI function group cause the Drive to shut down momentarily e g Sleep Function WARNING Snooze Function Feedback Loss feature etc Upon recovery from the conditions that activate these features the Drive may start unexpectedly Therefore when enabling these features take appropriate measures to notify personnel working with this equipment that unexpected starting may occur Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 10 Alarm Detection Alarms are Drive protection functions that do not operate the fault contact The Drive will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed During an alarm condition the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 02 if programmed When an alarm occurs take appropriate corrective action according to the table below Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display Option Communication Error TAE BUS Connection is broken master Check all connections verify all Option Com Err After ital comm niganon was has stopped communicating user side software configurations established the connection was lost PEE ne Connection not made properly Serial Communication Transmission Error 4 CALL user software not configured to Check all connections verify all Communication has not yet been estab 7 SI F G ComCall
350. set up in the factory to be a manual reset device requiring operator attention if an overload trip out is experienced B Control Power Transformer A Control Power Transformer CPT is provided to power the Bypass 120 VAC control circuit The VA capacity is determined by the control circuit and optional functions specified for the unit 100 VA of extra transformer capacity for customer control logic is provided in the standard unit and additional capacity is available as an engineered or custom option The CPT primary is fused in both legs the secondary is fused when required by NEC above 350 VA One side of the transformer secondary is grounded to the Bypass enclosure B Relay and Selector Switch Logic Operating elements such as indicating lights and selector switches as well as the control relay logic have been incorporated into a PCB assembly to eliminate the potential for loose wires after shipment and to control factory costs The operating elements are located on PCB A3 mounted to the inside of the enclosure door and ribbon cable connected to the control relay logic PCB A2 The control relay logic PCB A2 is mounted to the left hand side of the enclosure and contains the control circuit field wiring terminal strip TB1 B Drive Bypass logic interlocks explained The Bypass 120 VAC relay logic circuit is interconnected with the Drive multi function digital input terminals and multi function digital output terminals to allow a sing
351. shipped with the original Bypass unit Once all wiring has been disconnected from the Drive the Drive is ready to be removed from the enclosure Drives located in Bypass units are mounted differently than stand alone drives A Drive in a Bypass unit is mounted such that the heat sink is external to the enclosure Mounting brackets are located on the top and bottom of the Drive between the Drive and the Drive s heat sink These brackets are bolted to the Bypass back panel with the heat sink projecting through an opening in the back panel m Fig 7 8 Drive Top Mounting Bracket Maintenance 7 10 Drive Bottom Bracket all T Fig 7 9 Drive Bottom Mounting Bracket 1 F EE Mounting Ring Bypass Enclosure Back Panel Fig 7 10 Back Panel with Mounting Ring To free the Drive remove the bolts from the Drive mounting brackets remove the bottom first When free pull the Drive through the front of the Bypass enclosure by guiding the heat sink back through the opening in the back panel With the Drive out of the Bypass assembly remove the mounting brackets from the old Drive by removing the bolts affixing the mounting brackets to the Drive Attach the mounting brackets to the new Drive using the bolts from the old Drive B Installing the Replacement Drive Place the new Drive into the Bypass by sliding the heat sink through the opening in the rear of the Bypass enclosure Line
352. sing from misapplication of its products AWARNING Read and understand this manual before installing operating or servicing this Drive and Bypass Unit All warnings cautions and instructions must be followed All activity must be performed by qualified personnel The Drive must be installed accord ing to this manual and local codes Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off Status indicator LEDs and Digital Operator display will be extinguished when the DC bus voltage is below 50 VDC To prevent electric shock wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage The Drive and Bypass unit is not suitable for circuits capable of delivering more than the specified RMS symmetrical amperes Install adequate branch short circuit protection per applicable codes Refer to the specification Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and or personal injury Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the Drive These devices may generate peak
353. sistance L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimun Base Block Time L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Capacity Related Parameters B 5 Notes Capacity Related Parameters B 6 Appendix C Specifications This appendix details the standard Drive Specifications Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications 2 208 240 MAG to sunset iban tind 2 480 a esae 3 PA VON AGES Pee Dread ee 4 Specifications C 1 Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications The standard Drive and Bypass specifications are listed in the following tables 208 240 VAC Table 208 240VAC Drive and Bypass Specifications VENUS 35 is 2 25 25 a0 ae 75 106 1 4 5 25 3 4 3 EA 30 4 3 0 167 508 362 394 743 ive 1 3 1C 15 1C 15 16 7 0 6 5 5 25 6 Drive rated output capacity V 14 18 30 41 64 8 120 180 230 290 340 440 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240VAC Proportional to input voltage 1207 Rated voltage y 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240VAC 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Hz Rated input curent Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 15 Allowable frequen
354. so called the Monitor menu Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current displaying fault history or displaying the fault traces QUICK The Drive can be programmed in this menu Quick Setting Use this menu to set read the most commonly used parameters DRIVE Operation ADV The Drive can be programmed in this menu Programming Use this menu to set read every parameter VERIFY Modified Constants Parameters The Drive can be programmed in this menu Use this menu to set read the parameters that have been modified from their factory default settings For Bypass units Auto Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software A TUNE Part Number DWST616 C2 A free download from www drives com Auto Tuning The Drive can be programmed in this menu Use this menu to auto tune the Drive in order to utilize the bi directional speed search feature Control Panel 8 Main Menu Structure The menu selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display While viewing the menu selection display press the MENU key repeatedly to scroll between the menu selections MENU DRIVE Main Menu Auto Tuning Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the desired menu selection Modified Consts Modified Parameters Control Panel 3 9 DRIVE Operation Menu This menu is used for setting a speed command or
355. specified operating conditions Installation Site Location of the Bypass unit is important to achieving proper performance and design operating life Install the Bypass unit as close as possible to the motor The NEMA type 1 amp 12 enclosed units should be installed in an area where it will be protected from Direct sunlight rain or moisture corrosive gasses or liquids vibration and dust or metallic particles The ambient air available for cooling the unit should be 104 F 40 C or less Wall mount units require a minimum 6 inch clearance above and below to achieve adequate heat sink cooling When the add on box is employed for optional equipment no additional bottom clearance is required No side clearance is required for cooling because the cooling air flow is in and out of the enclosure door at the front surface of the unit do not block the air flow louvers Clearance for the opening swing of the enclosure door should be considered when placing these units The door is hinged on the left and must open through at least a 90 degree swing with a 120 to 180 degree swing being preferable minimum clearance is 1 5 Floor mounted units require a minimum clearance of 10 inches above the enclosure to allow for air flow over the heat sink fins Install the Bypass unit under the following conditions in UL pollution degree 1 amp 2 environments This excludes wet locations where surfaces may become conductive due to moisture and contami
356. t can be configured to come from one of many different inputs or parameters The table below describes the options for originating the PI setpoint Table 5 5 PI Setpoint Options Status of The PI Setpoint Modbus Status of will be read from Register b1 01 OFh bit 1 Parameter b5 19 Modbus Register 06H D1 01 Terminal Al Serial Com Option PCB In some situations there are two feedback inputs The Drive can be programmed to maintain a set differential between two analog signals If input A2 is configured as a PI Differential Mode H3 09 16 PI Differential then the Drive will maintain a set difference between the measurements read on inputs Al and A2 This differential setpoint is programmed by parameter 65 07 B b5 01 PI Mode Sting 8 0 Disabled factory default The Drive can be used as a stand alone PI controller If PI functionality is selected by parameter 65 01 the Drive will adjust its output to cause the feedback from a transmitter to match the PI setpoint b5 19 The setting of b5 01 will determine whether PI functionality is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled enabled b5 01 1 Enabled or enable with the output of the PI function used to trim a Speed Command b5 01 3 Fre PI B b5 02 Proportional Gain Setting Setting Range 0 00 to 25 00 Factory Default 2 00 The proportional gain will apply a straight multiplier to the calculated difference error bet
357. t signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop contact closure for Bypass applied to terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 13 0 Main Fref TA1 default Specific speed command source Terminal A1 H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1 01 to select terminals and the speed pot as the speed command An open contact selects serial com for speed command and run stop This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H5 08 0 Modbus 1 or 2 FLN Drive communicates via protocol selected Programming 5 8 1 Initialization The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial setup of the Drive Parameters involving the display language access levels initialization and password are located in this group 1 00 Select Language o Prati acon deity o 31 hee _____ 3 Pw 3 Fm 4 hme 5 Eme s Pmms The setting of parameter A1 00 determines which international language the Drive will use to display non numerical text The A1 00 parameter will not be changed by an Initialization of the Drive A1 03 1110 User Initialize 2220 2 Wire Initial or 3330 3 Wire Initial If the Drive is accidentally set to a language unfami
358. t voltage m Rated frequency Hz DC Reactor Optional Measures for power supply harmonics Power supply characteristics 12 pulse Nate Not possible Rectification Control characteristics Table C 2 480VAC Drive Specifications Continued Bypass Model Number E7B_ Bose 8077 B06 Biz wie ewe 300 400 40 200 250 350 450 500 4300 Drive rated output capacity kVA 9 3 30 0 315 0 Drive rated output current A j ij j 240 0 304 0 414 0 Drive max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC Proportional to input voltage Drive max output frequency Hz 120 Hz Max voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC 50 60 Hz Rated input current A 106 134 172 198 264 334 Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 15 Power supply characteristics Allowable frequency fluctuation 5 DC Reactor Measures for power supply harmonics 12 Pulse 2 Possible Rectification Control characteristics Note The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Bypass and Drive s rated output current is equal to or greater than the motor s rated current A 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power suppl
359. ta can only be read Table D 5 Monitor Data Register No Drive status Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation Bit 2 Drive startup complete 1 Completed 0 Not completed Bit 3 Fault 1 Fault 0070H Bit 4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi function digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Not used Bits 8 toF Not used Fault details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC Ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Drive overload OL2 Bit 3 Drive overheat OH1 OH2 Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PI feedback reference lost FbL 0021H Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit A PG broken wire detected PGO Overspeed OS Speed deviation DEV Bit B Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Main circuit undervoltage 1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention pue circuit error UV3 power loss Bit D Missing output phase LF Bit E Modbus communications error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 Not used 0022H Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to F Not used
360. tact at TB1 5 and TB1 6 will override the run command preventing Drive or Bypass operation until these input contacts are closed For example this input could insure that the system dampers achieve an operating position before the fan is started in order to protect the ductwork from over pressure Drive Run Contact Output Terminals TB1 7 and TB1 8 are an output contact that closes whenever the motor is running in Drive mode If the Drive is receiving a run command but a fault condition occurs this contact will not be closed Bypass Run Contact Output Terminals TB1 9 and TB1 10 are an output contact that closes whenever the motor is running in Bypass mode If the Bypass is receiving a run command but a fault condition occurs this contact will not be closed Drive Fault Contact Output Terminals TB1 11 TB1 12 and TB1 13 are a Form C set of output relay contacts NO and NC that are activated when the Drive is in a fault condition Start Up and Operation 4 10 Motor Overload or Customer Safeties Fault Contact Output Terminals TB1 14 TB1 15 and TB1 16 are a Form C set of output relay contacts and N C that are activated when one of the N C contacts of the Customer Safety device input series circuit or the motor overload relay contacts is opened 120VAC Damper Actuator Output Output terminals TB1 19 and TB1 20 are provided to energize a damper actuator circuit or solenoid air valve typically for outdoor air intake dampers When the
361. tal operator is removed set 02 06 0 Disabled and 02 15 0 Disabled Hand Key Function If both 02 06 and 02 15 are disabled then the digital operator can be disconnected without disturbing Drive operation B 02 07 Cumulative Operating Time Setting Setting Range 01065535 Hours Factory Default 0 Hours 02 08 Cumulative Operation Time Selection SSS Running Time factory default The Drive features an Elapsed Timer monitor that records in units of hours The Elapsed Timer monitor is U1 13 Parameter 02 08 programs this function to either accumulate elapsed hours based on time the Drive is powered 02 08 0 Power On Time or time the Drive is running 02 08 1 Running Time The Drive is considered running anytime there is an active run command or when the Drive is outputting voltage 1 e including during deceleration DRIVE Elapsed Time U1 13 U1 14 03010 U1 15 34 1 Parameter 02 07 allows manual adjustment of the Elapsed Timer primarily to accommodate maintenance or control board replacement in the event of damage To reset the Elapsed Timer back to zero set 02 07 0 Programming 5 80 B 02 10 Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting Setting Range 0 to 65535 Hours Factory Default 0 Hours The elapsed time of heatsink cooling fan operation is tracked by the U1 40 monitor Much like the 02 07 parameter can be used to adjust or reset the Drive operation elapsed
362. tarted without circuit breaker tripping Start Up and Operation 4 6 13 14 15 16 17 Adjustment Dial Label Trip Setting Adjustment Dial MCP Fig 4 2 Typical MCP Circuit Breaker IMPORTANT To maintain overcurrent short circuit and ground fault protection the manufacturer s instructions for setting the instantaneous trip circuit breaker must be followed Turn the HAND OFF AUTO switch to OFF and the DRIVE BYPASS switch to BYPASS The Drive will ramp the motor to zero speed then the Drive will be de energized and control transferred to Bypass mode Be prepared to monitor the rotation direction of the motor in Bypass operation Bump the HAND OFF AUTO switch to the HAND position and quickly back to OFF Check the motor rotation Do not allow the motor to continue operating in BYPASS until rotation is correct If the rotation direction in Bypass is correct skip the rest of this step If not carry out the following corrections 1 Turn OFF the incoming power feed to the Drive Since the correct rotation in Drive mode was previously established do not change any output wires at the motor 2 Instead verify that power to the circuit breaker is OFF Then swap L1 amp L2 on the input side of the circuit breaker disconnect switch CB1 This will affect rotation in Bypass operation only Once connections are complete and tight reapply the incoming power and repeat the previous step to re check the rotation d
363. tely de energize these terminals At the same time the Drive will begin the ramp to stop process in Drive mode with the default stopping method In some air handling unit applications operation during the ramp to stop time with the dampers closed may be problematic Over pressurization of ducts or trip out on high DC bus voltage due to overhauling of the load by other fans in the system are possible outcomes One solution is to reprogram the stopping method in parameter b1 03 to coast to stop eliminating the potential for both of these problems Building Automation system Run Stop circuit A control terminal block position TB1 terminals 3 and 4 is provided to connect the Normally Open NO Run Stop contact from a BAS or other remote controller for auto mode control There must be continuity between these terminals in order for the motor to run in auto mode Safety Interlock Circuit A control terminal block position TB1 terminals 1 and 2 is provided to connect the series circuit of Normally Closed NC safety devices such as freeze up thermostats smoke fire sensors high pressure limits temperature limits or vibration detectors There must be continuity between these terminals in order for the motor to run Building Automation System Interlock Circuit Drive and Bypass enable input A control terminal block position TB1 terminals 5 and 6 is provided to connect Normally Open NO enabling contacts such
364. ter b5 07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop PI Offset Adjustment 1 Parameter b5 07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of 100 0 to PI Offset the PI function ina non Differential PI loop Every time the 4100 0 0 096 Programming output is updated the offset is summed with the PI output This can be used to artificially kick start a slow starting PI loop 2 If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation H3 09 16 then the PI Offset is the targeted maintained differ ential between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog input A2 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when b5 01 0 Parameters A 5 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Pod Setting Factory Menu AM Description No Digital Operator Display Range Setting Location b5 08 PI Primary Delay Time Sets the amount of time for a filter on the output of the PI 0 00 to 8 Constant 0 00sec Programming controller 10 00 PI Delay Time Determines whether the PI controller will be direct or reverse PI Output Level Selection acting 53 03 Output Level Sel 0 Normal Output direct acting Programming 1 Reverse Output reverse acting PI Output Gain Setting b5 10 Sets the output gain of the PI controller 0 0 to 25 0
365. ter the deceleration has finished DC injection Output Frequency gt r1 b2 03 b2 04 Fig 5 7 DC Injection Braking During Starting and Stopping Parameter b2 04 also serves the function of affecting the length of time DC Injection to stop b1 03 2 DC Injection to Stop will occur B b2 09 Motor Pre Heat Current Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 A DC current can be circulated within the motor windings while the motor is stopped The current will produce heat within the motor and prevent condensation Parameter b2 09 determines the percentage of Drive rated output current that will be used for the motor pre heat function This function can be useful in applications where the motor sits for extended periods of time in humid conditions Motor pre heating can only be initiated by closing a digital input programmed as a Motor Pre heat Input 1 0 60 Check with the motor manufacturer to determine the maximum acceptable current level the motor can withstand when stopped Be sure not to exceed the motor manufacturers recommended level Programming 5 17 b3 Speed Search The Speed Search function allows the Drive to determine the speed of a motor shaft that is being driven by rotational inertia Speed Search will allow the Drive to determine the speed of the already rotating motor and begin to ramp the motor to a set speed without first having to bring it to a complete stop When a momentary loss of supply p
366. the Auto Restart Attempts count is increased by one Even if the restart fails the restart count is increased by one as long as the Drive attempted to rotate the motor The restart count will not be incremented if the restart is not attempted due to a continuing fault condition i e an OV fault The Drive waits L5 03 seconds before attempting another restart Run NNUS i ioc ioc Fault trying each i L5 03 seconds try 22 Pa Attempts Count 3 TIME Voltage Drive trips on OC condition remains high resets 2 tries gone resets 3 for a long time again but motor still and runs then reset 1 shorted trips again and run Fig 5 35 Automatic Restart Timing Diagram The auto restart count is reset back to O if any of the following occur e No further faults for ten minutes after the last retry e Drives power is turned off the Drive must be without power long enough to let control power dissipate e The SHIFT RESET key is pushed after the last reset attempt Programming 5 69 The setting of parameter L5 02 determines whether the fault output MA MB will be closed during an auto restart attempt The setting of L5 02 can be important when interfacing the Drive with other equipment The following faults will allow the Auto Restart function to initiate e OC Overcurrent e LF Output Open Phase e Input Phase Loss e PUF DC Bus Fuse e OLI Motor Over
367. the DC bus voltage falls below the UV trip level L2 05 Base Blk 1 Closed when the Drive is not outputting voltage Operator Reference Closed when the speed command is coming from the digital operator A Remote Auto Oper Closed when the run command is coming from the digital operator B Trq Det 1 N O Closes when the output current exceeds the value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 C Loss of Ref Closes when the Drive has detected a loss of analog speed command Speed command is considered lost when it drops 90 in 0 4 seconds Parameter L4 05 determines Drive reaction to a loss of speed command D DB Overheat E Fault Closes when the Drive experiences a major fault F Not Used 10 Minor Fault Closes when Drive experiences a minor fault or alarm 11 Reset Cmd Active Closes when the Drive receives a reset command from terminals or serial comms 12 Timer Output Output for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input 17 Trq Det 1 N C Opens when the output current Terminal M3 M4 Function exceeds the value set in parameter H2 02 Selection L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 0 to 3B Term Sel 1A Reverse Dir Closes when the Drive is running in the reverse direction 1E Restart Enabled Closes when the Drive is performing an automatic restart Automatic restart is configur
368. the proper baud rate user side software configurations lished configuration Both the forward and the reverse run com An external forward and mands are input simultaneously for 500mS reverse command are input Check external sequence logic or more This alarm stops the motor simultaneously EF External Fault Check for an external condition EFO Opt External Communication Option Card External Fault Flashing An external fault condition Verify the parameters exists Verify communication signal Ext Fault 53 External Fault at Terminal 53 Flashing EF4 Ext Fault S4 External Fault at Terminal 54 Flashing Eliminate the cause of an external EF5 An external fault condition fault condition Ext Fault S5 External Fault at Terminal S5 exists connected to a Flashing multi function digital input EF6 Ext Fault S6 External Fault at Terminal S6 Flashing EF7 Ext Fault S7 External Fault at Terminal 57 Flashing Remove the fault from a multi function digital input DNE The Run command has been Apply the enable command Drive not Enable The Drive doesmot have enable pasig applied prior to the enable before applying the run mand when the run command is applied Flashing signal command FAN Failure of the Drive internal cooling fan Cooling Fan Error when L8 32 0 Drive cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6
369. then ask you to enter two parameters DriveWizard will ask you to fill in parameters T1 02 Mtr Rated Power and T1 04 Rated Current After this data has been entered click on the Load button to enter these values into the Drive memory The Start button will become available click on Start to begin the auto tuning process While Auto Tuning is running the Drive output current and frequency will be displayed the flashing green light indicates DriveWizard is communicating with the Drive When complete DriveWizard will have auto tuned the Drive adjusted several motor related parameters and the Drive will be ready for optimum performance for bi directional Speed Search and other functions Programming 5 85 Notes Programming 5 86 Chapter 6 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive and Bypass Bypass DIagriDSllGS o efecto ee o ponas erede 2 Troubleshooting the Bypass Printed Circuit Boards 2 Drive Diagnostics Ham rem vehat dx edet 3 Fault Detectlon rer n ere o E e ER RA ERG 4 Alarm D tection s oor teri 11 Operator Programming Errors OPE 14 Auto Tuning Faults eei opere 15 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults 16 Drive Serre 17 If Parameter
370. ting bolts connectors etc Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty Bypass Operator Interface PCB Bypass Relay Controller PCB Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the Control PCB PCBs Terminal PCB Power PCB Gate Drive PCBs Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Contactors Input Diodes Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using Output Transistors modules or components clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi or IPMs Are there any irregularities such as Bcd ice on or odor Replace the capacitors or Drive DC bus capacitors Apply power to the Drive and Bypass then conduct the following inspection Table 7 2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied Corrective Action Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Check U1 40 for elapsed cooling fan operation time Cooling fan s Replace Cooling Fan Maintenance 7 2 Preventive Maintenance Table 7 3 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Points ltem ____ Check Points Every 3 6 Months Ambient Temperature Humidity Environment Dust Harmful
371. tion B PI Feedback ax DIES H3 09 Terminal A2 Sel D Frequency Bias 2 0 100 bias Die 2 Programming E Motor Temperature See parameters L1 03 amp L1 04 16 PI Differential 1F Not Used H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting eer 0 0 to Terminal 2 Gain Sets the percentage when 10V 20mA is input 1000 0 100 0 Programming H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias Setting M 100 0 to Terminal A2 Bias Sets the percentage when 4mA is input 100 0 0 0 Programming T Analog Input Filter Time Constant Used to smooth out erratic or noisy analog input 0 00 to Hn Filter Avg Time signals 2 00 0 30 Programming Determines which terminal will be the main reference source 0 Main Fref TAI Terminal TAI is the main speed Master Frequency Reference command and Terminal TA2 is the Aux speed H3 13 Terminal Selection command Oorl 0 Programming TA1 A2 Select 1 Main Fref TA2 Terminal TA2 is the main speed command and Terminal TA1 is the Aux speed command Only effective when H3 09 is set to 2 Aux Reference Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when b5 01 0 Factory setting changes to B when b5 01 1 Parameters A 16 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Setting Menu i Location Parameter Parameter Name No Operator Display Description Analog Outputs Selects which monitor will be output on te
372. tion Time at 5 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 5 Cumulative Operation Time at 6 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 6 U Cumulative Operation Time at 7 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 7 Cumulative Operation Time at 8 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 8 Cumulative Operation Time at 9 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 9 U Cumulative Operation Time at 10 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 10 Note Faults such as CPF00 01 CPF02 CPF03 UV1 and UV02 are not stored in fault history U3 01 U3 02 U3 3 05 U34 U3 07 U3 ee 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 19 3 20 Parameters 29 Decimal to Hex Conversion Decimal Decimal 51 33 TH IT g UJ D gt o Hwy A Parameters 30 Appendix B Capacity Related Parameters This appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of 02 04 Drive Capacity ertet tt e exe 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 3 Capacity Related Parameter 4 Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Drive Capacity Parameter 02 04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number Parameter 02 04 will need to be adjusted when replacing a control board If a Control
373. to receive the PI Feedback source signal Check to ensure the PI Feedback source is installed and working properly Check the motor for a phase to phase short Check the Drive for a phase to phase short at the output Verify C1 01 and C1 02 are set correctly Check load conditions Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault Check for dirt build up on the fans and cooling fins Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive Remove the heating unit Check for an external condition Verify the program parameters H1 01 thru H1 05 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Recheck the accel decel time C1 01 and 1 02 Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 thru 1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Check the digital operator connector Verify the setting of 02 06 Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications OV DC Bus Overvoltage 7 3 The deceleration time is set too Lane DC Bus Overvolt 208 240VAC Trip point is gt 400Vdc shoit Extend the time in C1 02 Flashing 480VAC Trip point is 2 800Vdc Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input to the Drive High input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 Remove the power factor
374. to maximum speed E1 04 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 sets the time to decelerate from maximum speed to zero C1 01 and C1 02 are the factory default active accel decel pair Another accel decel pair C1 03 and C1 04 exists that can be activated by a multi function digital input 1 0 7 or specified by a switch over frequency as programmed in parameter C1 11 Note In fan applications employing duct high pressure safety limit switches it may be necessary to further adjust the deceleration time to avoid high pressure limit trips due to damper closure as the system is shut down an alternate solution in this situation is to set parameter b1 03 to Coast to Stop C1 09 Fast Stop Time Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Seconds Factory Default 10 0 Seconds A special deceleration parameter is available for use with emergency or fault operations Parameter C1 09 will set a special deceleration that can be operated by closing a digital input configured as H1 Ox 15 or 0 17 A digital input configured as H1 Ox 15 will look for a switch closure before initiating the Fast Stop operation A digital input configured as H1 0x 17 will look for the switch opening before initiating the Fast Stop operation Unlike a standard deceleration time once the Fast Stop operation is initiated even momentarily the Drive cannot be re operated until the deceleration is complete the Fast Stop input is cleared and the Run command is cycled Program
375. tputs By programming parameters H2 01 and H2 02 the user can assign specific functions to each output Below is a table with a complete list of all of the digital output functions Refer to the Programming Manual for a more detailed description of each of the functions Table 5 16 Digital Output Functions Parameter Function Parameter Function setting Setting M EENENEENM T NN s oeenn Cer oe Programming 5 57 H3 Analog Inputs H3 02 Terminal A1 Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 0 H3 02 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit depending on the options provided See Table 5 2 The addition of another input signal on terminal A1 to the Drive and Bypass unit after shipment to the job site would be the only reason for changing this parameter For example in variable air volume AHUS with a volume matching control strategy P1 differential control is employed with feedback signals connected to both terminals A1 and A2 B H3 03 Terminal A1 Bias Setting Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 0 In order to have the Drive properly interpret an analog input it may be necessary to apply a gain and or a bias to the signal The analog inputs have a resolution of 10 bits 1024 steps Using the factory default settings for the analog input s gain and bias the 0 10Vdc
376. ts Al 2 Jump Frequencies a Jump Frequency 1 43 01 Jump Freq 1 These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited Programming Frequency 2 frequency points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration d3 02 J a 2 y of the motor machine This feature does not actually eliminate the 0 0 to 200 0 0 0Hz Programming pmp reg selected frequency values but will accelerate and decelerate the 43 03 Jump Frequency 3 motor through the prohibited bandwidth 0 0Hz Programming Jump Freq 3 Jump Frequency Width This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each 1 mi en idi selected prohibited frequency point A setting of 1 0 will result in 0 0 to 20 0 1 0Hz Programming a deadband of 1 0 Hz MOP and Trim Control 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Trim Control Level 84 02 Trim Control Lvl Set the percentage of maximum speed to be added or subtracted via 0 to 100 10 Programming multi function inputs Parameters 9 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No 1 01 1 03 1 04 Input Voltage Setting Input Voltage V F Pattern Selection V F Selection Maximum Output Frequency Max Frequency Maximum Output Voltage Max Voltage E1 06 Base Frequency Base Frequency E1 07 Mid Output Frequency A Mid Frequency A E1 08 E1 09 1 10 1 11 Mid Output Frequency Mid Frequency B 1 12 1 13 Mi
377. tting Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 0 Parameters H3 10 and H3 11 perform the same function for the A2 analog input that parameters H3 02 and H3 03 perform for the Al analog input Please refer to the parameter description for H3 02 and H3 03 for information about H3 10 and H3 11 These parameters could be used for final calibration of a factory or field installed pressure to electric transducer input connected to terminal A2 and AC This field calibration may be needed if there is a job site variation from the typical 3 to 15 PSIG pneumatic signal input range H3 12 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Setting Range 0 0 to 2 00 Seconds Factory Default 0 30 Seconds An analog input filter can be used to prevent erratic Drive control when a noisy analog reference is used Parameter H3 12 sets the time constant for a first order filter that will be applied to both the A1 and A2 analog inputs The Drive operation becomes more stable the longer the time programmed but it becomes less responsive to rapidly changing analog signals gt Filter Noisy input Internal Analog Input Valve signal Filtered Fig 5 29 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Effect on Noisy Signal Programming 5 62 H3 13 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection z Main Fref 1 factory default Main Fre A2 H3 13 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass l
378. u wish to check for the torque condition whenever the Drive is running or only at speed agree Nuisance detection during acceleration when variable torques are normally required can be avoided 3 Do you want the Drive to fault if the torque condition is detected or only alarm and continue operation The following table can help choose the proper setting for Torque Detection Selection 1 to get the wanted results Table 5 19 L6 01 Setting Choices L6 01 Overtorque Undertorque Fault Alarm Always Only Detected SAN Detected Spd Agree Torque Detection Disabled X X Suggested settings for Loss of Load indication Programming 5 71 After selecting the proper detection scheme the Torque Detection Level L6 02 must be specified If the current level read by the output current transformers rises above overtorque or drops below undertorque this level and remains there for at least the Torque Detection Time L6 03 then the Torque Detection Function will change the state of any digital output configured for Torque Detection H2 01 H2 02 Trq Det 1 N O or 17 Trq Det 1 N C Torque detection level 10 32 on 2680 ESS 5 Closed 2885 When the output current drops below the Torque Detection Level by approximately 10 of the Drive s rated output current the digital output is reset Fig 5 36 Over Torque Detection Torque detection level 10 E Mao eu
379. uage Selection 3 Francais Select Language 4 Italiano 5 Espanol 6 Portugues Not returned to factory setting by initialization This setting determines which parameters are accessible Al 01 Access Level Selection 0 Operation Only Access Level 1 User Level 2 Advanced Level Used to return all parameters to their factory or user setting 0 No Initialize 1110 User Initialize The user must set their own parameter A1 03 Initialize Parameters default values and then parameter 02 03 must be set to 1 to save Init Parameters them If the parameter values are changed after 02 03 is set to 1 the user default values can be restored by setting A1 03 to 1110 2220 2 Wire Initial 3330 3 Wire Initial 1 04 Password 1 When the value set into 1 04 does NOT match the value set into 0 to 9999 Enter Password 1 05 parameters A1 01 thru A1 03 and A2 01 thru A2 32 cannot be changed All other parameters as determined by A1 01 can be 1 05 Password 2 changed Parameter A1 05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU 0 to 9999 Select Password while holding the RESET key User Parameters User Parameter 1 User Parameter 2 User Param 2 A2 03 User Parameter 3 Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level User Param 3 A1 01 1 These are the only parameters accessible for the user level These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function User Parameter 4 202 User Param 4
380. uncon trolled deceleration The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the system and the rotation will stop ON CLOSED Run Command OFF OPEN 100 i gt Motor Speed UNE Output Frequency 4 Drive Output Frequency Interrupted 0 TIME Fig 5 3 Coast to Stop After a stop is initiated a subsequent Run commands input before the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 IMPORTANT j has expired will be ignored Programming 5 13 2 DCInj to Stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will Baseblock turn off its output for the Minimum Base block Time L2 03 Once the Minimum Baseblock Time has expired the Drive will inject DC current into the motor wind ings to lock the motor shaft The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop The level of DC Injection current is set by parameter b2 02 50 Default The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2 04 and the output frequency at the time the Run command is removed b2 04 x 10 x Output Frequency DC Injection Brake Time Maximum Frequency E1 04 ON Run Command CLOSED OFF b2 04 x 10 OPEN e g 100 m 9 Output Frequency 4 Drive Output Voltage Interrupted F b2 04 DC Injection Brake 0 4 gt Minimum Baseblock DC Injection Brake Time z 100 Maximum Time L2 03 b
381. up the holes on the mounting brackets with the holes in the back panel of the Bypass assembly Use the mounting bolts previously removed to re affix the Drive to the Bypass back panel When the new Drive has been mounted in the Bypass enclosure reconnect all power wiring and verify by checking the Bypass schematic Re mount the control terminal card to the Drive by sliding the terminal card into the connector CN8 on the control circuit board Re fasten the captive screws to the control PCB Consult page 7 9 for detailed instructions Re mount any option card and re connect all wiring from the option card to the Drive Be sure to re connect the ground wire to the Drive With the Drive replacement complete return power to the Bypass unit Locate the start up procedure for the Drive and Bypass in Chapter 4 and follow the complete start up procedure Maintenance 7 11 B Programming the Replacement Drive Replacement drives come from the factory with standard factory default parameter settings They are not Bypass ready and the parameters in the replacement Drive will need to be modified for Bypass compatibility Several approaches to this may be available 1 The digital operator keypad from the old Drive may contain a copy of the parameter settings for this application See parameter 03 01 in Chapter 5 for instructions 2 The customer may have a file of parameter settings for the PC software DriveWizard which can be used to dow
382. ure The addition of a HAND OFF AUTO selector switch for the Bypass logic circuit makes the Hand Off and Auto keys on the standard Drive keypad operator redundant In this Bypass configuration the keypad Hand Off and Auto keys are disabled in the Drive firmware and a mask membrane is placed over the keypad operator to cover these keys avoiding the potential for confusion The membrane over the Drive keypad is non removable on these Bypass units In order to use the keypad copy function on a Bypass unit order a separate keypad part number 001115 B Indicating Lights On the enclosure door just below the digital operator are six 22 mm 24 VAC LED indicating lights for Control Power Drive Run Bypass Run Motor OL Safeties Fault Drive Fault and Smoke Purge LED type indicating lights are pro vided to improve the reliability well beyond that of incandescent bulbs LED s have a MTBF of 100K hours eliminating any need for push to test type pilot lights Physical Installation 1 11 B HAND OFF AUTO Selector Switch A three position rotary switch employed to control the source of the motor start and speed commands in either the Drive or Bypass operating modes Hand Position Drive Mode The Drive input and output contactors are energized and the Drive is given a run command Operation is via the local speed input from the keypad or optional speed potentiometer Hand Position Bypass Mode The Bypass
383. ve DIP switch S1 2 on the Drive terminal PCB to the OFF position Observe if the remote speed command can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired If not perform the following see Chapter 5 For 0 10 VDC input at Terminal A2 1 With no input adjust the Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0 Hz is obtained 2 With full scale input adjust the Gain H3 10 setting until an output of 60 0 Hz or other desired maximum frequency is obtained For 4 20 mA input at Terminal 2 1 With 4 mA input adjust Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0 Hz is obtained 2 With 20 mA input adjust Gain H3 10 setting until an output of 60 0 HZ or other desired maximum frequency is obtained Turn the HAND OFF AUTO switch to AUTO then request a run command and speed reference signal from the building automation system to confirm remote auto operation In preparation for testing the Bypass observe the trip setting of the circuit breaker CB1 The trip point is factory set at the lowest possible setting and must be adjusted for each application This breaker will trip due to inrush current and load inertia unless it is reset e For fan applications adjust the trip setting to ten times motor FLA e For pump applications adjust the trip setting to six times motor FLA If circuit breaker tripping is experienced at these settings during motor starting on Bypass increase the setting gradually until the motor can be s
384. ve parameter settings required to interface with the Bypass logic circuit that have been established at the factory and stored in a dedicated location in memory as User Initialization values think of it as a back up file If additional parameters are set to the specific needs of the application project and the system operation has been checked and verified then the User Initialization values should be stored in memory again by selecting and entering 1 Set Default in parameter 02 03 When there is a need for re initialization of the user parameters re setting to the User Initialization values of the Bypass unit then a User Initialization function should be carried out by selecting 1110 User Initialize in parameter A1 03 This will re establish the drive set up required for the Bypass application and any user parameter values that have been stored The factory parameter settings required to interface with the bypass logic circuit have also been stored in the digital keypad memory If there is a need for re initialization re setting to a known factory starting point for trouble shooting purposes of the Bypass unit then the back up file in the digital keypad memory can be copied to the drive In parameter 03 01 select 2 OP gt INV WRITE to carry out the copy function Table 1 of the schematic is also used to document parameters that have been factory set to typical values for fan and pump applic
385. w be equivalent to 0 100 speed command span Gain 100 Output Frequency Bias 25 8mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 26 Output Frequency with Reduced Bias Setting As a further example for an inverse acting speed command set the bias 100 and the gain 0 The minimum analog input level OVdc or 4mA will produce a 100 speed command and the maximum analog input level 10Vdc 20mA will produce a 096 speed command Bias 10096 Output Frequency Gain 0 ov 10V 4mA 20mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 27 Output Frequency with Inverted Gain and Bias Settings Programming 5 59 H3 08 Terminal A2 Signal Level 9 mvpc 430m Defui H3 08 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 2 The H3 08 parameter Terminal A2 Signal Level allows the programmer to specify the signal that will be applied to the A2 analog input The A2 analog input can accept either a 0 10 Vdc or 4 20 mA signal as a reference The Drive also has a DIP switch S1 on the removable terminal board that must be set for the proper reference signal into the A2 analog input The 51 2 dipswitch setting determines the internal resistance of the A2 input while parameter H3 08 determines how the Drive interprets the measured signal ta Yoon yy sane 4 OFF resistance 2 i DIP Switch S1 1 located on gt terminal b
386. ween the PI Setpoint and the measured transmitter feedback at terminal A2 A large value will tend to reduce the error but may cause instability oscillations if too high A small value may allow to much offset between the setpoint and feedback See Figure 5 14 on following page B b5 03 Integral Time Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 360 0 Seconds Factory Default 5 0 Seconds Programming 5 29 The Integral factor of PI functionality is a time based gain that can be used to eliminate the error difference between the setpoint and feedback at steady state The smaller the Integral Time set into b5 03 the more aggressive the Integral factor will be To turn off the Integral Time set b5 03 0 00 Measured Feedback Measured Feedback Setpoint Setpoint Zero offset with Integral Action Feedback Feedback No Integral With Integral Fig 5 16 PID Feedback Response Characteristics B b5 04 Integral Limit Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 100 096 On some applications especially those with rapidly varying loads the output of the PI function may have large oscillations To suppress these oscillations a limit can be applied to the integral factor by programming b5 04 B b5 06 PI Output Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 100 0 Places cap on the output of the PI function Limiting the PI function may help to prevent large overshoots in the Drive s response to error t
387. when converting a pneumatic signal to an electrical signal for use as the Drive speed command input The need for this option comes up on retrofit applications when the pneumatic signal that formerly controlled the pneumatic actuator on Inlet Guide Vanes IGV for example is now to be used to control the fan speed via the Drive This option is wired to Drive terminals V A2 and AC parameters H3 10 and H3 11 are used for final field calibration of this input if there is jobsite variation from the typical 3 to 15 PSIG pneumatic signal input range Physical Installation 1 9 Option R 3 Input Line Reactor Employed on the input side of the Drive for Total Harmonic Distortion THD suppres sion A line reactor also minimizes the potential for Drive input diode damage from line transients and reduces voltage peaks on the DC bus capacitors This option is installed on the input power side of the Drive between the input contactor and the Drive Option S Speed Potentiometer A door mounted single turn potentiometer for manual control of Drive output and motor speed This option is wired to Drive terminals V Al and AC and is used as the local speed command input to the Drive instead of the keypad up and down arrows Parameters for use of this option in conjunction with other input signals are detailed in Table 5 2 Option W Engraved Plastic Nameplate An enclosure identification nameplate to carry the controlled equipment tag number Option
388. will look for a run command contact closure at terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 on the relay PCB A2 Speed command signal level and source is determined by the parameter settings and the options present in the unit see Tables 5 1 and 5 2 The AUTO speed command must be wired directly to the Drive terminals 2 and AC not the control terminal block TB1 Consult Figures 2 7 and 2 8 in Chapter 2 Electrical Installation for correct configuration of the speed command analog frequency reference Operating in HAND position Bypass mode The Bypass can be operated locally from the front control panel by placing the DRIVE BYPASS switch in BYPASS In BYPASS mode the Bypass contactor coil can be energized manually by placing the HAND OFF AUTO switch in HAND position In Bypass mode moving the HAND OFF AUTO switch to HAND causes the motor to run at full speed directly across the line Operating in AUTO position Bypass mode The Bypass can be operated remotely by placing the DRIVE BYPASS switch in BYPASS and the HAND OFF AUTO switch in AUTO In the AUTO position the Bypass will look for a run command contact closure at terminals TB1 3 and TB1 4 on the relay PCB A2 to control the run stop status of across the line full speed motor operation Operating in TEST position Bypass mode TEST position is used to energize the Drive input contactor while operating in the Bypass mode The only valid use of the TEST position is in Bypass mode In Drive mode swit
389. will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency B The motor does not operate when an external run command is input The following causes are possible The Drive is not in Drive mode If the Drive is not in Drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key once and press the DATA ENTER key The Drive is now in Drive mode The Speed Command is too low If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 18 B The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too high The Drive has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too great Lengthen the acceleration time CI 01 or reduce the load Also consider increasing the motor size B The motor only rotates in one direction Reverse run prohibited may be selected If b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 reverse run prohibited the Drive will not receive reverse run commands This is the default to use both forward and reverse operation set b1 04 to 0 and operate in Auto mode The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor rotates in the wrong direction th
390. wing PI Feedback PI Output and PI Setpoint would be useful when setting up a PI Control Loop Programming 5 78 02 Key Selections B 02 03 User Parameter Default Value Ser Defaults Clea Al The Drive gives the option of configuring any and all of the programming parameters and then saving the parameters as User Initialization Values After configuring the Drive set parameter 2 03 1 Set Defaults to save the parameters to a User Initialization memory location Once this has been done the Initialize Parameters parameter A1 03 will offer the choice of 1110 User Initialize Choosing A1 03 1110 User Initialized will reset all modified parameters back to what they were the last time they were saved using 02 03 The choice of setting 1 03 1110 User Initialized is unavailable until first setting the User Initialization parameters using 02 03 Once a User Initialization is set saved it can be cleared by setting 02 03 2 Clear After clearing the User Initialization parameters the choice of 1110 User Initialize is no longer a available in 1 03 B 02 05 Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection Seng Diss Enabled factory default The factory default setting of the Frequency Reference Setting Method parameter 02 05 1 Enabled dictates that when setting a Speed Command via the digital operator mode it is not necessary to press
391. wire control 3 wire control q p Fig 5 1 2 amp 3 Wire Control Wiring Examples Some parameters are unaffected by either the 2 Wire or 3 Wire initialization The following parameters will IMPORTANT not be reset when parameter A1 03 2220 or 3330 A1 00 Language Selection E1 03 V f Pattern Selection 02 04 KVA Selection Programming 5 10 B A1 04 Password Entry Setting Range 0 to 9999 Factory Default 0 If parameters A1 01 through A1 03 and all of the A2 parameters are locked unchangeable they can be unlocked by entering the correct password number into A1 04 Once the correct password number is entered and the specified parameters are unlocked a 2 Wire or 3 Wire initialization will reset the password to 0000 B A1 05 Select Password Setting Range 0 to 9999 Factory Default 0 When the value set into 1 04 does NOT match the value set into 1 05 parameters 1 01 thru 1 03 and A2 32 cannot be changed All other parameters determined by 1 01 can be changed Parameter 1 05 can be accessed by displaying parameter A1 04 then press and hold the RESET key along with the MENU key simultaneously b1 Sequence The Sequence Group contains parameters associated with starting and stopping the Drive Parameters involving the Run Command Speed Reference location Stopping Method and Hand Auto changeover are located in this group B b1 01 Reference Speed Command Source Selection This is one of the special parameter
392. witches and indicating lights The E7 Drive a component of the E7 Bypass package is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive for 3 Phase AC induction motors This type of Drive is also known as an Adjustable Frequency Drive Variable Frequency Drive AC Drive AFD ASD VFD and Inverter In this manual the E7 Drive will be referred to as the Drive The Drive is a variable torque AC drive designed specifically for HVAC applications in building automation including fans blowers and pumps A new benchmark for size cost performance benefits and quality the Drive includes numerous built in features such as network communications H O A PI parameter storage and copy functions The Drive has embedded communications for the popular building automation protocols Johnson Controls Metasyse N2 and Siemens APOGEE FLN as well as Modbuse An optional LONWORKSo interface card is also available The LCD keypad operator is equipped with Hand Off Auto functions copy feature 7 language choices and 5 lines of display with 16 characters per line User parameter settings can be recovered at any time via User Initialization Optional DriveWizard software allows upload download as well as graphing and monitoring of drive parameters from a PC for ease of drive management Built in PI control eliminates the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system It includes feedback display inverse square root and differential control fun
393. x 584 2 5 5514 5 5515 5 5525 5 5512 5 5513 5 5514 5 5515 Floor Mount WxD Floor Mount WxD 85 0 x 13 0 889 x 330 0 30 5 x 16 5 774 7 x 419 1 127 5 5525 N A 35 0 x 13 0 889 x 330 0 4 Data represents the total weight of the Drive with all possible standard options not shipping weight Physical Installation 1 22 Table 1 6 Bypass Dimensions and Weights Continued In me 1 12 Wall Drawing Nominal Dimensions inches mm Mounting Drawing Number Weight p HP Dimensions Number w Add on Ibs Current Amps Height Hx W Box B002 004 774 7 B014 B021 om eor 1 1 1 2 1 6 4 1 2 3 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3 7 1 1 2 2 8034 4 5 6 7 8052 8065 41 5 23 0 43 00 25 63 17 03 B077 1092 2 651 0 432 6 a 5 5514 5 5515 8096 100 8124 125 8156 Floor Mount 150 B180 8400 37 75 217 WAD 200 B240 2133 6 958 9 5512 350x130 1 Horsepower rating is based on standard NEMA B 4 pole motor design 2 Height dimension includes the mounting screw tabs 3 Add on box adds 13 6 inches to Height dimension and 91 Ibs Max to total 4 Data represents the total weight of the drive with all possible standard options not shipping weight Physical Installation 1 23 Checking and Controlling Installation Site Install the Bypass unit as described below and maintain the
394. y for 12 pulse rectification Specifications C 3 All Voltages Table Common Drive Specifications All Models Specification Sine wave PWM Control method V f control Speed range 40 1 Speed control accuracy 2 to 3 77 F 50 F 25 C 10 C Frequency accuracy Digital references 0 01 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C temperature characteristics Analog references 0 1 77 F 50 F 25 C 10 C Digital references 0 01 Hz Frequency setting resolution 3 Analog references 0 025 50 Hz 10 bit with sign 8 Fre setting signal E quency setting signa _ 2 Speed Command 0 10 Vdc 4 20 mA 2 Acceleration Deceleration g dm 0 0 to 6000 0 s 2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings o 2 Restarting for momentary power loss bi directional speed search overtorque detection 5 preset speeds acceleration deceleration time changes S curve acceleration 3 wire sequence auto tuning cooling fan ON OFF con Main Drive control E S fsnetons trol torque compensation jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PI control with sleep function energy saving control Modbus communications RS 485 422 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset and copy function Provides an alternate connection for the motor to line power for o
395. ysical Installation This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving and the installation process for a Drive and Bypass unit Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style 2 Enclosure Data 4 Confirmations upon Delivery 7 Receiving Checks Qa ER ua SER d 7 Bypass Nameplate Information 7 Bypass Unit Enclosures 8 Bypass Product er ir b edle eoa nf sar 9 Bypass Component Descriptions 11 Bypass Unit Front Control Panel 11 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 22 2 1 17 Bypass Unit 30 HP and Below 480 VAC 15 HP and Below 208 240 17 Bypass Unit 30 HP and Below 480 VAC 15 HP and Below 208V 240V With Add On Box 18 Bypass Unit 40 HP to 100 HP 480 VAC 20 HP to 40 HP 208V 240V 19 Bypass Unit 40 HP to 100 HP 480 VAC 20 HP to 40 HP 208V 240V With Add On Box 20 Bypass Unit 125 HP to 250 HP 480 VAC 50 HP to 125 HP 208V uoce tate estne pet tup 21 Dimensions and Weights 22 Checking and Controlling Installation Site 24 I

Yaskawa E7B Drive O&M - Coward Environmental Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Yaskawa E7B Drive O&amp;M - Coward Environmental Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Yaskawa E7B Drive O&M - Coward Environmental Systems